JP7484445B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, reserve the right to play a game with a first special symbol (first special symbol game) when a gaming ball enters a first winning slot. In such gaming machines, when a predetermined hold occurs (for example, a hold where the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot or a hold with a long variable display time), the same, similar, or similar performance (successive hold performance) that clearly indicates or suggests the expectation (jackpot expectation) that the jackpot lottery result for the predetermined hold will be a jackpot is played consecutively for a predetermined number of first special symbol games for a predetermined number of holds at the time the predetermined hold occurs.

Some gaming machines are equipped with a second winning port into which a gaming ball can enter by opening an electric device such as an electric tulip, and a game with a second special symbol (second special symbol game) triggered by a gaming ball entering the second winning port is played in priority over a first special symbol game for a gaming ball entering the first winning port. Some such gaming machines play a performance (second special symbol special performance) that clearly indicates or suggests that a special bonus (for example, the execution of a guaranteed jackpot game after the end of the second special symbol game) will be awarded when a jackpot symbol stops or a reach occurs during the second special symbol game.

JP 2020-014640 A

By the way, it is important for a gaming machine to attract attention and interest in the game, and to increase the player's motivation to play.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the attention and interest of players in the game and improve their motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win due to the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
a reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 77) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
The present invention is characterized by comprising:

1 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening and closing door provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4 . 5 is a diagram showing an example of an opening/closing door, a crane device, and a game ball retention section provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X1-X1 in FIG. 6. A diagram to explain the specific period for which game balls are retained in the game ball retention section, the prescribed period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball port of the Kluen device, and the specified period for displaying specific information indicating a non-set value on the seven-segment display section. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 of FIG. 8, and FIG. 10B and FIG. 10C are cross-sectional views taken along the line X3-X3 of FIG. FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of how numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit, and FIG. 11(C) is a diagram showing an example of how alphabets are displayed on the 7-segment display unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a memory area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance information display device of a main control device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example on a setting value display unit of the performance information display device. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a main timer interrupt process executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for start winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of Figure 20. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the first pending command setting process executed in the start winning process of Figure 21. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for variable game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 23. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for data setting processing executed in the variable game control processing of Figure 24. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for variable start processing executed in the variable game control processing of Figure 24. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a setting value change process executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a sub timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for display order setting processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34 . FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a numeral display order determination table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 35 . 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34 . A figure showing an example of a first stop pattern selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 37. A figure showing an example of a performance pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 37. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34 . 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a seven-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 . FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a seven-segment display control information storage area set in the voice lamp control device. 11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining an example of control of a seven-segment display unit and an example of updating a seven-segment display unit control information storage area. 6A and 6B are diagrams for explaining a control example of a seven-segment display unit. 11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display unit control information storage area. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 . A figure showing an example of screen transition during the ending presentation of a jackpot game. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a setting value suggestion process executed by a voice lamp control device of an amusement machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a seven-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48 . A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of Figure 48. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display order setting process executed by a voice lamp control device of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 51 . FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 53. A flowchart showing an example of a procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 53. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 . 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56 . 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56 . 11 is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation situations. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing an example of screen transition on the pattern display unit in a standby state. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 . 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 . 63 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG. 62 . FIG. 13 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 64. 6A and 6B are diagrams showing examples of turning on and off a lamp display unit. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34 . 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a seven-segment display control information storage area set in the voice lamp control device. FIG. A figure showing an example of screen transition during round play when the lamp display unit is controlled during a jackpot game. A figure showing an example of a display screen during the ending presentation of a jackpot game. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of the lamp display unit. A diagram for explaining the conventional performance execution order of a gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. A figure for explaining the performance execution order of a gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing an example of a memory area of the main control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 74. A block diagram showing an example of an electric role reservation area in the memory area of the main control device shown in Figure 75. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a through gate process executed in a main timer interrupt process. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 79. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting normal map data executed in the normal map game control process of Figure 80. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular map fluctuation start processing executed in the regular map game control processing of Figure 80. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 79. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a screen in a pattern display section. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the hold continuous presentation processing executed in the command determination processing of Figure 85. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the hold continuous presentation processing executed in the command determination processing of Figure 85. A figure showing an example of a table used in the hold continuous performance processing. FIG. 91(A) is a diagram showing an example of the color of the decorative pattern, and FIG. 91(B) is a diagram showing an example of a stopping pattern combination of the decorative patterns. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special chart special effect processing executed in the command determination processing of Figure 85. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a performance type executed in the command determination process of Figure 86. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a performance type executed in the command determination process of Figure 86. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a performance type executed in the command determination process of Figure 86. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a performance type executed in the command determination process of Figure 86. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a performance type executed in the command determination process of Figure 86. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a performance type executed in the command determination process of Figure 86. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a stop pattern combination executed in the command determination process of Figure 86. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a stop pattern combination executed in the command determination process of Figure 86. A figure for explaining the performance execution order of a gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart for explaining a difference from the sixth embodiment in a command determination process. 13 is a flowchart for explaining a difference from the sixth embodiment in a command determination process. A flowchart for explaining the differences from the sixth embodiment in the second special chart special effect setting process. 13 is a flowchart for explaining the differences from the sixth embodiment in the performance type setting process. 13 is a flowchart for explaining the differences from the sixth embodiment in the performance type setting process. 13 is a flowchart for explaining the differences from the sixth embodiment in the performance type setting process.

The following describes the first to seventh embodiments of the present invention with reference to the attached drawings to facilitate understanding of the present invention. Furthermore, each of the following embodiments is an example of the present invention and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[General configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, Fig. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, Figs. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and Fig. 4 is a front view of a gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions of front/rear, left/right, and up/down used in this embodiment are defined by the front/rear direction D1, the up/down direction D2, and the left/right direction D3 shown in Figs. 1 to 3.

As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in a gaming hall by fixing the outer frame 14 to an island facility (not shown) in the gaming hall. Note that in this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as reel-type gaming machines (slot machines), arrange ball gaming machines, and jan-ball gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed relative to the outer frame 14 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11. The back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operating button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illumination section 27.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper tray 23. The operation button 20 is equipped with an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) that switches the input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described below depending on whether or not it is pressed. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 (operated or not operated). This operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button performance that is executed in response to a player's operation of the operation button 20 during a predetermined operation acceptance period in a variable game performance executed in a variable game that clearly shows the player the lottery results in a jackpot lottery.

The location of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is a position that can be operated by the player. Also, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, but may be two or more.

In addition, instead of the operation button 20, a touch panel may be provided that displays touch keys and accepts operation of the touch keys by the player. The operation button 20 may also be equipped with a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the player on the touch panel or panel 25 during the variable game presentation will be reflected in the operation button presentation, etc.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that is operated by the player to launch game balls. In the gaming machine 10, basic play is performed by launching game balls from the game ball launch mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the launch handle 22 is being operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the play area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is disposed below the panel 25, and is used to store the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 132 of the dispensing mechanism 130 described below, and to lead the stored game balls in a single row to the game ball launching mechanism 32. The lower tray 24 is disposed further below the upper tray 23, and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper tray 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless, transparent or colored, transparent glass or synthetic resin, allowing the player to view the game board 31 in the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect that outputs sound. Note that the installation position of the speakers 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. The illumination unit 27 also has built-in light sources such as indicator lamps and LEDs, and performs lamp effects by changing the lighting color and flashing modes such as turning on and off.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As described above, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball launching mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Note that in FIG. 2, the surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

The control unit 33 is provided on the rear side of the game board 31, and has a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In the game machine 10, commands (control signals) for instructing the control content are sent in one direction from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, an outlet 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a crane device 37, a game ball retention section 38, and a seven-segment display section 39.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. After being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the outlet 318.

2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and guides the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 one by one onto the launching rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may also be a mechanism that launches game balls using other driving means, such as a motor, instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the outlet 318 have openings formed therein that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. The back side of the game board 31 is provided with ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 12) that can individually detect the entry of game balls, corresponding to the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, respectively. The game balls that pass through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the outlet 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 and are detected by the outlet ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12), which will be described later. The variable winning hole 316 is provided in the center of the right side of the game board 31, and the game balls shot into the right area of the game board 31 can enter the variable winning hole 316. The game balls that pass through the through-hole 316b of the variable winning hole 316 are guided to the crane device 37 by the guide path 316c (see FIG. 6) described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which the game balls can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) that can individually detect the game balls that pass through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, the game balls shot into the right area of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317, and when the passage of the game ball through the through gate 317 is detected, a normal winning lottery is executed to determine whether or not to open the second winning hole 315.

The entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command to the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls according to the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of the entrance of a game ball by the entrance ball sensors 313a to 316a may be referred to as winning. In addition, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection results of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here corresponds to the number of launched game balls launched onto the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) sets a special out ball detection command indicating that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the cranes device 37 described below, and transmits this special out ball detection command to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 23. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

Note that the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensor capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls using other detection methods.

The second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric device (electric device) 315b that switches between restricting and not restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315. The electric device 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. On the game board 31, the electric device 315b opens to allow game balls to enter the second winning opening 315, and the electric device 315b closes to restrict the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315.

Furthermore, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 that switches whether or not the game ball is restricted from entering the variable winning opening 316. The opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, the opening/closing door 319 allows the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening/closing door 319 restricts the game ball from entering the variable winning opening 316. The opening/closing door 319 is moved to a position that opens the variable winning opening 316 in a round game in the opening/closing execution mode in a jackpot game, and is otherwise kept waiting in a position that closes the variable winning opening 316. As a result, the game ball 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 in a round game in a jackpot game can enter the variable winning opening 316.

5 and 6, the opening and closing door 319 has a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of mounting parts 319d for rotatably mounting the opening and closing door 319 to the game board 31, and when the opening and closing door 319 is in the operating position, it protrudes slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31. As a result, when the opening and closing door 319 is in the operating position, it can receive the game ball 99 that is shot out to the right area of the game board 31. The pair of guard walls 319b extend from the left and right edges of the base 319a, preventing the game ball 99 received by the base 319a from spilling out from the left and right sides of the base 319a. In addition, the pair of guides 319c guide the game ball 99 received by the base 319a to the variable winning opening 316. The pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable winning opening 316, forming a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. The variable winning opening 316 has a through-hole 316b that discharges the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. This through-hole 316b communicates with a guide path 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. The guide path 316c extends in the up-down direction D2 and has a lower opening. The game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 enters the variable winning opening 316 and is guided to the crane device 37 via the through-hole 316b and the guide path 316c. The guide path 316c is provided with a ball entry sensor 316a. As a result, the game ball 99 that enters the variable winning opening 316 is detected when it passes through the through-hole 316b and is introduced into the guide path 316c. This ball entry sensor 316a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331. As a result, the detection result of the ball entry sensor 316a is input to the main control unit 331, and the main control unit 331 can detect that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning opening 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensor 314a or the ball entry sensor 315a detects the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, a jackpot lottery is held by the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 then controls the display of the main display section 36 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. The lottery result by the main control unit 331 is also transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34, etc. according to the lottery result.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a detect the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls is 10 when the ball enters the general winning opening 313, the number of prize balls is 3 when the ball enters the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, and the number of prize balls is 10 when the ball enters the variable winning opening 316. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game machine 10 transitions to a jackpot game state (special game state), and the round game (unit game) described below in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or 16 times), so that a large number of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. If the lottery result is a win, the game transitions to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot game state includes a 5R jackpot game state (5R normal jackpot game state and 5R variable jackpot game state) and a 16R variable jackpot game state. The 5R jackpot game state is a game state that includes an open/close execution mode in which the variable winning port 316 is opened for five rounds (unit games) until a predetermined time has elapsed or until an upper limit number (e.g., 9) or more game balls enter the variable winning port 316. The 16R jackpot game state is a game state that includes an open/close execution mode in which 16 rounds of play (unit play) are played, and is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot game state, as more prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in the approximate center of the game board 31. This pattern display section 341 displays still or moving images, and the display content of the pattern display section 341 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the pattern display section 341 performs various image presentations such as a variable display presentation of decorative patterns according to the lottery results in a jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, and a variable game presentation performed in conjunction with the variable display presentation. In addition, the pattern display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the decorative pattern changing display performance in the pattern display section 341 is performed by scrolling multiple types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" in sequence vertically, horizontally, diagonally, etc. Note that secondary patterns such as other letters or designs may be displayed between the decorative patterns. Also, in this embodiment, there are no secondary patterns, and there are nine types of decorative patterns from "1" to "9."

In the gaming machine 10, in variable play, the display of changes in decorative patterns is executed so that the change in all decorative patterns stops after a preset display time has elapsed from the start of the display of changes in patterns in the pattern display section 341. More specifically, in the display of changes in decorative patterns, first, all decorative patterns change along a preset direction of change (e.g., horizontally, vertically, etc.), and the change in multiple decorative patterns stops in sequence. Then, when the change in decorative patterns on all lines has stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the display of changes in the decorative patterns ends.

When the display of the decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 is finished, the decorative patterns are displayed in one or more valid lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative patterns indicates or suggests the result of the lottery in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, if the lottery result is a "5R jackpot", a "16R jackpot", or a "5R normal jackpot", the decorative patterns of the same type are displayed in a lined up on the valid lines, and it is indicated that there is a jackpot. In addition, the type of jackpot may be indicated by the combination of the decorative patterns on the valid lines, but this is not necessarily the case. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", a state in which a pattern combination of, for example, "777", which is set as a pattern combination indicating a 16R jackpot, is displayed in a lined up on the valid lines, or a state in which a combination of the same decorative patterns other than "777" is displayed in a lined up on the valid lines. In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot", a state in which a combination of decorative symbols, such as "333", which has been set as a combination of symbols indicating a 5R special jackpot, is lined up on the valid line, or a combination of the same decorative symbols, such as "777" or "333", other than the combination of symbols indicating a 16R special jackpot or a 5R special jackpot, is lined up on the valid line. In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", a combination of the same decorative symbols, such as "222" or "444", which has been set as a combination of symbols indicating a normal jackpot, is lined up on the valid line. In addition, if the lottery result is a "miss", a state in which a combination of different decorative symbols (such as "323" or "723") is lined up on the valid line is displayed.

In addition, in the symbol display section 341, along with the display of the decorative symbols in the variable play, a variable play effect is displayed that suggests the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. If the lottery result is a "16R variable jackpot" and a state in which a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a 16R variable jackpot is lined up on an effective line is displayed, a suggestive effect is executed as a variable play effect that suggests a 5R variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect is executed that clearly shows that the lottery result for the variable play is a 16R variable jackpot. Similarly, if the lottery result is a "5R variable jackpot" and a state in which a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a variable jackpot is lined up on an effective line is displayed, a suggestive effect is executed as a variable play effect that suggests a 5R normal jackpot. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect is executed that clearly shows that the lottery result for the variable play is a 5R variable jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state transitions to a jackpot game state, the pattern display section 341 displays jackpot game effects including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

It is also possible to provide a magnet sensor or a radio wave sensor (both not shown) on the game board 31. The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 or the variable winning hole 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior when a magnet is used to fraudulently guide a game ball to the first winning hole 314 or the variable winning hole 316. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior when a radio wave is fraudulently input to the ball entry sensor 314a, 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

As shown in FIG. 4, the Kroon device 37 distributes game balls that enter the variable winning opening 316 to either the normal out ball opening 378 or the special out ball opening 373 (see FIG. 7 and FIG. 8), which will be described later. Here, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the opening and closing door 319, the Kroon device 37, and the game ball retention section 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is an oblique view of the Kroon device 37, and FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view along the X1-X1 cutting line in FIG. 6.

As shown in Figures 6 to 8, the crane device 37 is dish-shaped and has a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 that surrounds the bottom wall 371. The bottom wall 371 is circular in plan view and has a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and a left-downward inclined portion 371c provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

The high bottom 371a constitutes the right side portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined downward to the right. The high bottom 371a is provided with a special out ball passage 374 having a special out ball port 373 (special discharge port). This special out ball passage 374 is adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and is provided so as to extend in the up-down direction D2 at the center of the high bottom 371a in the front-rear direction D1. This special out ball passage 374 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. In addition, a first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. This first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retention section 38. The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375a and a lower opening 375b connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The lower opening 375b is provided to the right of the upper opening 375a, and releases the game balls 99 in the special out ball passage 374 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retention section 38.

It is also possible to provide the first guide member 375 with a function of retaining game balls 99 that cannot be retained in the game ball retention section 38. In this embodiment, a number (specific information) corresponding to a non-set value, which is a game setting value other than the set value, which is a game setting value set in the game machine 10, is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during a specified period (see FIG. 9) (the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period). In this embodiment, since the number of segments of the 7-segment display section 39 is 7 (excluding the dot point DP), one non-set value can be reliably identified with 7 pieces of information. Also, since the game setting value has 6 stages from 1 to 6, there are 5 non-set values, and therefore all non-set values can be identified with 35 pieces of information. In other words, the game machine 10 is required to be able to present at least 35 pieces of information (a prescribed number). Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball retention section 38 is configured so that a prescribed number or more of game balls 99 can be retained in a specific period (see FIG. 9) described later. However, depending on the arrangement of various members of the gaming machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the game ball retention section 38 to retain a prescribed number or more of game balls 99. In this case, by giving the first guide member 375 a function of storing game balls 99, it is possible to retain a number of game balls 99 that is difficult to achieve using only the game ball retention section 38, using the first guide member 375. This makes it possible to retain a prescribed number or more of game balls 99 in a specific period, and information necessary to identify all non-set values is presented. Similarly, the game balls 99 may also be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. As a result, when it is difficult to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 due to the arrangement of various components, even by providing the first guide member 375 with a function to retain game balls 99 as well as the game ball retention section 38, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 by using the special out ball passage 374. As a result, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 for a specific period of time, and there is a possibility that the information necessary to identify all non-set values will be presented.

On the other hand, it is also possible to set a limit on the number of game balls 99 that are retained during a specific period. For example, it is possible to set the limit to the specified number (to make the limit equal to the specified number). In this case, for example, when a number of pieces of information (individual pieces of specific information) corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 are presented, information for identifying all non-set values during one specific period may be presented. Also, when a number of pieces of information corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that satisfy a specified condition among the game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373, for example, the number that wins the lottery, is presented, information on an expected number according to the probability of winning the lottery is presented, and since the expected number of pieces of information is basically smaller than the specified number, there is a possibility that all of the information necessary to identify all non-set values may not be presented. This makes it possible to prevent the set value from being identified by the entry of game balls 99 into the special out ball port 373 during one specific period, and as a result, it is possible to prevent a player from ending play on the gaming machine 10 early when the set value is low (when the probability of a jackpot is low).

As a means for setting a limit on the number of game balls 99 retained during a specific period, for example, a configuration is adopted in which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, the first guide member 375, and the special out ball passage 374, and when a limited number of game balls 99 enter the special out ball passage 374, the game balls 99 are positioned near the special out ball opening 373 (causing ball clogging) to limit the entry of game balls 99 into the special out ball passage 374. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to limit the number of game balls 99 retained during a specific period to a limited number using a simple mechanical configuration without requiring a complex configuration or control.

On the other hand, the game ball retention section 38 has a retention lane 381 that is inclined downward to the left as described below. In other words, the first guide member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention section 38. The game ball 99 that enters the special out ball port 373 will not enter any of the various winning ports 313 to 316, and will not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game ball 99 that enters the special out ball port 373 is treated as an out ball when it is no longer expected to enter any of the various winning ports 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it is introduced into the special out ball passage 374 (when it is detected by the special out ball sensor 384).

The low bottom 371b constitutes the left side of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined so as to be lower toward the center. The low bottom 371b is provided with a normal passage 376 having a normal out ball port 378. This normal passage 376 is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction D2, except for the portion along the peripheral wall 372 in the low bottom 371b, at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c. This normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 that enters through the normal out ball port 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a larger opening area than the special out ball port 373. In addition, a second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376. This second guide member 377 collects the game balls 99 that pass through the normal passage 376 to the back side of the game board 31, similar to the game balls that pass through the opening of the out port 318. The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12) and counted as out balls.

In such a Krun device 37, the game ball 99 that is shot out to the right area of the game board 31 and received by the opening and closing door 319 as described above is guided by the guide path 316c. Then, the game ball 99 guided to the Krun device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372. This delays the flow of the game ball 99 down in the Krun device 37. Then, most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 enter the normal out ball port 378, for example, by reducing their kinetic energy or by colliding with the peripheral wall 372 of the Krun device 37 or other game balls 99. The game ball 99 that enters the normal out ball port 378 moves through the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and is guided to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

Meanwhile, some of the game balls moving on the bottom wall 371 have their direction of movement changed by collisions with the periphery of the normal out ball opening 378 or with other game balls, and enter the special out ball opening 373. The game ball 99 that enters the special out ball opening 373 is released toward the game ball retention section 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375.

Here, the probability of the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 entering the special out ball opening 373 is set to, for example, 0.5% to 5%, preferably 1% to 3%. In other words, the expected number of balls entering the special out ball opening 373 per round of play for 10 rounds is set to, for example, 0.5 to 5, preferably 1 to 3. By setting the ball entry probability or the expected number of balls entering within such a range, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the set value too early, while making it possible to identify the set value realistically. This makes it possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine 10 from being terminated when the set value is identified early, such as when the set value is low, while preventing the game on the gaming machine 10 from being terminated due to boredom caused by the inability to identify the set value.

In this embodiment, the special out ball port 373 is provided at the high bottom 371a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal out ball port 378 has a larger opening area than the special out ball port 373, so that the special out ball port 373 is significantly more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter than the normal out ball port 378. However, instead of or in addition to all or part of these, it is also possible to make it more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball port 373 by other means. For example, it is possible to provide an obstruction means for obstructing the game ball 99 from entering the special out ball port 373 in the periphery of the special out ball port 373. As the obstruction means, for example, an obstacle that obstructs the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball port 373, such as a wall portion surrounding the special out ball port 373, a means for generating a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 in the periphery of the special out ball port 373, and a means for forming an air curtain by spraying air in the periphery of the special out ball port 373 are conceivable.

In addition, an opening/closing section may be provided to open and close the special out ball opening 373, and this opening/closing section may make it difficult for a game ball to enter the special out ball opening 373. In this case, the special out ball opening 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out ball opening 378, and the normal out ball opening 378 may be formed to have the same or approximately the same opening area as the special out ball opening 373.

The distribution means for distributing the game balls 99 that enter the variable winning opening 316 to the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 is not limited to the crane device 37, and may be other means. For example, the balls may be distributed to the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 by adjusting a rotating member such as a switching valve or a rotating member, or the arrangement of nails driven into the game board 31.

As shown in Figures 4 and 8, the game ball retention unit 38 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 and retains the game ball 99 until a specific period has elapsed. After the specific period has elapsed, segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 described below are controlled, and a number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 until the specified period has elapsed. Here, Figure 9 is a diagram for explaining the specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention unit, the specified period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball port of the Kluen device, and the specified period for displaying specific information indicating a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit.

Note that, in the following, with reference to FIG. 9, a specific period is described as a period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, a predetermined period is described as a period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 is cumulatively counted, and a "prescribed period" is described as a period during which all or part of a number (specific information) indicating a non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period. However, the "specific period" is not limited to the period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, and the "prescribed period" is not limited to the period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 is cumulatively counted. In other words, the "specific period", "prescribed period", and "prescribed period" include at least the periods described below.

9(A) and 9(B), the specific period during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention section 38 is from the start of the jackpot game (opening) to the end of the open/close execution mode in the jackpot game (the start of the ending), and a specific period is set for each jackpot game that is started in a predetermined period. That is, the start of the specific period is the time when the jackpot game starts, and the end of the specific period is the time when the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game ends (the start of the ending). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(A), in the case of winning a normal jackpot in the low probability mode (when the first hit is a normal single jackpot), the specific period is from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game. Also, as shown in FIG. 9(B), when a special jackpot is won in low probability mode (when the first win is a special jackpot and a jackpot streak begins), for all jackpot games that are played until the jackpot streak ends with a normal jackpot game when a normal jackpot is won in high probability mode, a specific period is set from the start of each jackpot game to the end of the open/close execution mode for that jackpot game. In other words, in a jackpot streak, multiple specific periods are set corresponding to the number of jackpot games played during the jackpot streak.

In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot or the timing of winning, the number of segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39, which corresponds to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during a specific period of one jackpot game, are controlled to be turned on and off at the end of the jackpot game, which is the specified period. In other words, the specified period is set as a period during which the 7-segment display unit 39 displays numbers indicating game setting values (multiple non-set values) other than the game setting value (set value) that specifies the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot, based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period.

If the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 during a specific period of one jackpot game is 7 or more and less than 14, a number specifying a game setting value (multiple non-set values) other than the game setting value (set value) that specifies the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery set in the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending (specified period) after the specific period of the jackpot game has elapsed, according to the display order set in the display order setting process of Figure 36 described below. In addition, in the ending (prescribed period) after the specific period of the jackpot game, if the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 during the specific period of one jackpot game is 14 or more and less than 20, two numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the number is 21 or more and less than 28, three numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, if the number is 28 or more and less than 35, four numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, and if the number is 35 or more, five numbers (all numbers) specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order. Note that if the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 during the specific period of one jackpot game is less than seven, no numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the ending (prescribed period) after the specific period of the jackpot game.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, each time a jackpot game is executed, one to five numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values can be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 described later based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 during a specific period, and the set value can be specified by displaying the numbers specifying the five non-set values. For example, the number 1 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 1 is a non-set value, the number 2 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 2 is a non-set value, the number 3 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 3 is a non-set value, the number 4 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 4 is a non-set value, the number 5 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 5 is a non-set value, and the number 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can specify that game set value 6 is a non-set value. Also, the five numbers 2 to 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to identify that the non-set values are game set values 2 to 6, and therefore the user can determine that the set value is game set value 1. Similarly, the five numbers 1, 3 to 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 2, the five numbers 1, 2, and 4 to 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 3, the five numbers 1 to 3, 5, and 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 4, the five numbers 1 to 4 and 6 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 5, and the five numbers 1 to 5 displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 allow the user to determine that the set value is game set value 6.

It is also possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all segments A to G become the control objects. For example, if segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, when segment A, the first control object, is turned off, the candidates for the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 are "1" and "4". When segment F, the sixth control object, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". In other words, the numbers "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, the sixth control object, becomes the control object before all segments A to G become the control objects. When segment A, the first control object, is turned on, the candidates for the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 are "2", "3", "5", and "6". Then, when segment B, the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined that the number is either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined that the number is either "5" or "6". Furthermore, when segment C, the third control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "3", and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2". In other words, the numbers "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, the third control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control targets. Furthermore, when segment E, the fifth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "6", and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5". In other words, the numbers "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, the fifth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control targets. That is, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control target, is turned on or off, the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, which is the fifth control target, is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, which is the sixth control target, is turned on or off. In this embodiment, even if a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 become control targets, control for displaying the number of the next priority is not started unless all segments A to G become control targets. As a result, in order to identify all non-set values, more specific conditions need to be satisfied than when control for displaying the number of the next priority is started at the stage when the number corresponding to the non-set value can be grasped. As a result, the difficulty level until all non-set values are identified and thus the difficulty level for recognizing the set value can be increased, so that the set value is prevented from being recognized in a short game time. Therefore, even if the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly learning the set value, which prevents a decrease in playing time on the gaming machine 10 and suppresses a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, when a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 become the control target, control to display the number of the next priority may be started. For example, when the priority of numbers is "1" → "2" → "3" → ..., when it is grasped that the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 is "1" by making segment F, which is the sixth in the control order for the number "1", the control to display the number "2" of the next priority may be started without making segment G, which is the seventh in the control order, the control. However, when segments A to G are controlled to display the number to be displayed next after all segments A to G become the control target, even if the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can be recognized before all segments A to G become the control target, control of segments A to G to display the number to be displayed next is not started until all segments A to G become the control target. Therefore, even if the player recognizes a number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all segments A to G become the control target, information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 to identify the number already recognized by the player until the display of the next number to be displayed begins. In other words, if the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G have become the control target, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease during the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. In contrast, if control to display the next number with priority is started when a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 become the control target, segments A to G that do not contribute to guessing the non-set value will not become the control target after one non-set value is identified. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to segments A to G being unnecessarily controlled.

On the other hand, the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode for the normal jackpot. That is, the start of the predetermined period is the time when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started, and the end of the predetermined period is the time when the opening and closing execution mode for the normal jackpot game is ended (the time when the ending of the normal jackpot game is started). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9 (A), when a normal jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is a normal jackpot and a single jackpot), the predetermined period is from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening and closing execution mode for the jackpot game. That is, in the case of a single jackpot, the predetermined period coincides with the specific period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention section 38. Also, as shown in FIG. 9(B), when a probability variable jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is a probability variable jackpot and a jackpot streak is started), the specified period is the period from when the probability variable jackpot game for the first hit that triggers the jackpot streak to start, to when the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot that triggers the jackpot streak to end, is ended. In other words, in the case of a jackpot streak, the specified period does not coincide with the specific period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention section 38, and is set to multiple periods according to the number of jackpot games that start within the specified period.

When a jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game will not be ended in the middle of the jackpot game or in the middle of a jackpot winning streak. Therefore, a specific period for which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38 is set for each jackpot game, thereby preventing the player from ending the game before the specific period ends. In addition, a specific period for which the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the croon device 37 is cumulatively counted is set from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open/close execution mode for the jackpot game for a normal jackpot, thereby preventing the player from ending the game before the specific period ends. In the jackpot game, at the ending (prescribed period) after the specific period has elapsed, the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled based on the number of game balls 99 staying in the game ball retention unit 38 during the specific period (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37), and information that allows the non-set value to be specified or guessed (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed, and at the ending after the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot has elapsed, information that allows the non-set value to be specified or guessed (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed in accordance with the cumulative number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during the specified period. This prevents the game from ending before the timing at which the non-set value can be specified or guessed, even if a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set value other than the set value can be specified or guessed continues playing the game. Therefore, even if a player does not know the timing at which non-set values can be identified or guessed, the non-set values can be identified or guessed, and by identifying all non-set values, it becomes possible to identify the set values. In addition, it is possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior by other players who play aiming for the timing at which non-set values can be identified or guessed.

In addition, by setting a specific period for each jackpot game that starts in a predetermined period, in the case of consecutive jackpots, the predetermined period is set spanning from the first jackpot to the last jackpot game of the consecutive jackpots. Therefore, in the case of consecutive jackpots, the predetermined period is longer than in the case of a single jackpot, and the more jackpot games are played, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, in the case of consecutive jackpots, the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is more likely to be greater than in the case of a single jackpot, and in the case of consecutive jackpots, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the more likely the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 will be greater. As a result, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the greater the expected value of the game value that can be acquired, and the more information can be obtained to identify or guess the non-set value, making it easier to guess or identify the non-set value and ultimately the set value.

The start of the specific period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention section 38 may be set during a jackpot game, and may be the time when the opening and closing execution mode starts (the opening of the first win ends), not limited to the start of the jackpot game. The end of the specific period may be set during a jackpot game, and may be set during the ending to which the game normally transitions after a jackpot. Preferably, the specific period is set as one section including the opening and closing execution mode for one jackpot game. This allows information for identifying a non-set value to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 after the specific period has elapsed, based on the number of specific conditions that are established in response to the game ball 99 entering the variable winning port 316 in the opening and closing execution mode (based on the number of game balls 99 that have passed through the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37). As a result, in the open/close execution mode, the player can enjoy playing by focusing on whether or not the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373, and after the open/close execution mode ends, that is, after a specific period of time has elapsed, the player can enjoy playing by focusing on the content displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 and identifying or guessing the non-set value based on the displayed content.

The start of the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is not limited to the time when the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode) starts, but may be set to the jackpot game. Preferably, it may be the time when the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode), for example, the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode) starts (the opening of the first hit ends). In this way, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the jackpot game for the first hit, a predetermined period is always set for one first hit, regardless of whether it is a single jackpot or a consecutive jackpot, so that at least one opportunity to guess or identify a non-set value for one first hit is guaranteed.

On the other hand, the end of the specified period is not limited to the end of the open/close execution mode of the normal jackpot game, but may be set during the jackpot game, for example, at the ending of the jackpot game, typically at the ending of the normal jackpot game. The end of the specified period may also be the end of the normal jackpot game (the end of the ending of the jackpot), or the end of the time-saving mode to which the mode is switched after the normal jackpot. In addition, although the present embodiment is described assuming a loop probability variable machine, in other types of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and type 1 and type 2 mixed machines, the specified period may be set according to the type of the machine. For example, in a V-ST machine, if there is no V win on the first hit (normal jackpot), the specified period is set in the same way as for a normal jackpot on a loop probability variable machine, and if there is a V win on the first hit (probable probability variable jackpot), the start of the specified period is the start of the first jackpot game or the start of the open/close execution mode, and the end of the specified period is the end of the open/close execution mode on a jackpot without a V win, or the end of a set number of jackpot draws in the high probability mode.

The specified period may also be set to the period during which variable play is executed (the period from the end of a jackpot game to the start of a jackpot game) regardless of the jackpot game. For example, the specified period may be set according to the type of condition (specific condition) under which all or part of the specific information (numbers) indicating a non-set value is displayed, and may be set to the period during which the player stays in the normal game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode) (the period from the end of the time-saving mode to the start of the next jackpot), the period during which the player stays in the time-saving mode (the period from the end of a normal jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game), the period during which the player stays in the low probability mode (the period from the end of a normal jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game), the period until a specified number of jackpot lotteries are drawn in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the period until a specified number of jackpot lotteries are drawn in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, or the period until a specified number of jackpot lotteries are drawn in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Examples of the period include a period until a normal winning lottery is drawn, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the general winning port 313 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the first winning port 314 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the second winning port 315 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, and a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are shot onto the game board 31 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. The predetermined period may also be set for each variable game. That is, the predetermined period may be set from the start of the variable game (the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern) to the end of the variable game (the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern). In this case, the entire period of one variable play may be the specified period, or a portion of one variable play may be the specified period. When a portion of one variable play is the specified period, the specified period may be the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the time when the decorative pattern reaches a reach state, the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the time when a development performance such as a special reach performance starts, the period from the time when the decorative pattern reaches a reach state to the time when the development performance starts, the period from the time when the decorative pattern reaches a reach state to the time when the development performance ends, the period during which the development performance is executed, etc.

In this way, by setting a predetermined period during which variable play is executed, it becomes possible to identify or guess non-set values and recognize or guess set values even outside of the period during which jackpot play is executed. This makes it possible to enjoy the progress of play while identifying or guessing non-set values (set values) during the period during which variable play is executed.

When the predetermined period is set as the period during which the variable game is executed, the distribution means such as the Krun device 37 may be provided in a position (for example, the left side area of the game board 31 (above or below the general winning hole 313) or the central area (above or to the side of the first winning hole 314)) where the game ball 99 shot into the left side area of the game board 31 is distributed to the normal out ball hole 378 and the special out ball hole 373 when the game ball 99 shot into the left side area of the game board 31 is shot out normally. In this case, the non-set value (set value) can be identified or guessed without performing a special shot (right shot that shoots the game ball 99 into the right side area of the game board 31). This allows the player to enjoy identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while playing the game normally, without lowering the probability of the game ball 99 entering the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314.

The start of the specified period may be set when the main power supply for the gaming machine 10 is turned on, depending on the type of specific condition. The end of the specified period may be set when the main power supply for the gaming machine 10 is turned off, depending on the type of specific condition.

The specific condition is that, instead of the game ball 99 distributed by a distribution means such as the Krun device 37 entering the special out ball port 373 during a specified period, the game ball 99 passes through a specific area other than the special out ball port 373, such as the game ball 99 passing through the through gate 317 or the game ball 99 entering one of the various winning ports 313 to 316.

In addition, the game balls 99 that enter the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314, or that pass through the through gate 317, may be guided to a distribution means such as the Krun device 37, and a specific condition may be that the game balls 99 distributed by the distribution means enter the special out ball hole 373. In this case, too, it is possible to enjoy identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while playing the game as usual, without performing any special shooting.

The specific condition may also be the occurrence of a specific event that may occur during the progress of the game. In this case, the specific event may be either an advantageous or disadvantageous circumstance for the player. If the specific event is an advantageous event for the player, the player may further obtain all or a portion of the specific information indicating a non-set value (set value) in addition to the benefit obtained from the occurrence of the specific event. On the other hand, if the specific event is an disadvantageous event for the player, the player may further obtain all or a portion of the specific information indicating a non-set value (set value) as a remedy for the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the specific event. Specific events may be, for example, winning the jackpot a predetermined number of times (including once) or more (a jackpot game being played a predetermined number of times (including once) or more), winning a special or regular jackpot a predetermined number of times (a special or regular jackpot game being played a predetermined number of times (including once) or more), reaching a predetermined number of consecutive jackpots (winning a special jackpot a predetermined number of times in succession before winning a regular jackpot), reaching a predetermined number of jackpot draws before winning a jackpot, winning more than the upper limit of 99 balls (over-winning) during a round of play in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game, etc.

The specific event may be the execution of a specific effect that is set in advance in a variable game or a jackpot game. The specific effect in this case is not particularly limited, and may be set to any of a non-reach effect and a reach effect, and may be set to any of an opening effect, a round game effect, and an ending effect. Typically, the specific effect may be a premium effect in which a jackpot or a guaranteed jackpot is confirmed in a variable game effect, or an effect that indicates that a reserved consecutive win will be executed after the end of the jackpot game in a jackpot game (the reserved wins include the lottery result of the jackpot at a specific time point of the jackpot game, such as the start of the jackpot game, the start of the open/close execution mode, the end of the open/close execution mode, or the end of the jackpot game). Furthermore, the specific event may be a stop display or a provisional stop display (intermediate stop display) of a decorative pattern in a specific combination on the pattern display unit 341. For example, in the symbol display section 341, when the decorative symbol is stopped at "777", when it is stopped at a specific out-of-reach number such as "767", when it is stopped at a specific non-out-of-reach number (variable number) such as "367", and when a development effect such as a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed as a reach effect, a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed is possible. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed, for example, such as "7 development 7", where the decorative symbols on the left and right are temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display) in a reach state, and a symbol indicating that a development effect such as "development" will be executed as the center symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, the specific condition may be the occurrence of multiple specific events of a specific combination.

The specific condition may also be satisfied in relation to a set value. In other words, the specific condition may include a set value, and may be satisfied, for example, when a specific event occurs at a specific set value. In this case, while the type of specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 is determined by the set value, as described below. Therefore, the numbers indicating non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in different orders depending on the type of specific condition. This makes it possible to set the display order for each set value, for example, based on whether the probability of winning a jackpot is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple numbers indicating non-set values for each set value.

In addition, the specified period during which the specific information or a part of it (special information) indicating a non-set value is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied is not limited to being set for each ending of a jackpot game, and may be set at other times, depending on the relationship with the specified period, the relationship with the specific period, or the relationship with a specific condition. For example, the specified period may be only the ending of a 5R normal jackpot game, in which the end of the specified period is typically set after the passage of a specified period as described in the second embodiment below, or may be other than a jackpot game, for example, after the end of a jackpot game. In addition, when the specified period is set to the execution period of a variable game, the specified period may be, for example, the start of the change of the decorative pattern in the variable game, the timing of the temporary stop display when the decorative pattern is in a reach state, the timing when the development performance such as the super reach performance or the special reach performance starts, or during the execution of the development performance. In other words, the specified period may be set to the period during which a variable game is executed. When the specified period is set to the period during which a variable game is executed, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating a non-set value together with the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the result of a big win lottery is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by displaying a changing decorative symbol, it is also possible to simultaneously display specific information on the symbol display unit 341. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the variable game by displaying the specific information.

Here, FIG. 10(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line in FIG. 8, FIG. 10(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 described below is in the upper limit position, and FIG. 10(C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 is in the lower limit position. The configuration of the game ball retention portion 38 will be described below with reference to FIG. 6 and FIG. 8 in addition to FIG. 10.

As shown in Figures 6, 8, and 10, the game ball retention section 38 retains game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 for a specific period of time, and includes a retention lane 381, a discharge lane 382, and a stopper section 383.

The retention lane 381 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 and allows the game ball 99 to stay. The retention lane 381 is open at the top and inclined downward to the left. The retention lane 381 has a depth dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and at least a part of the game ball 99 that has stayed in the retention lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). This makes it possible to visually confirm that the game ball 99 has been retained in the retention lane 381, and also makes it possible to visually confirm the number of retained game balls 99, that is, the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 within a specific period. In addition, it is preferable that the retention lane 381 is formed transparently using resin or the like. This makes it easier to grasp the number of game balls 99 that have been retained in the retention lane 381. Instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 visible, the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed. The number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed, for example, by the number of lit lamps, or by displaying an image on the pattern display unit 341.

The discharge lane 382 is connected to the left end of the retention lane 381 and guides the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 to a predetermined location, such as a position where they can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

In addition, the discharge lane 382 is provided with a special out ball sensor 384. This special out ball sensor 384 detects the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 when they move along the discharge lane 382. In other words, the special out ball sensor 384 is used to count the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls that enter the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 within a specific period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out ball sensor 384, so that the MPU 41 determines whether the game balls 99 have moved along the discharge lane 382. In addition, when the special out ball sensor 384 detects a game ball 99, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and transmits this special out ball detection command to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives a special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls and controls the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of special out balls and the setting value (see the command determination process of FIG. 37 and the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40).

The special out ball sensor 384 may be, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor, but the game ball 99 may be detected by other detection methods (for example, an optical sensor). The special out ball sensor 384 may also be connected to the sound lamp control device 5. In this case, the special out ball detection command is not set in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, but the sound lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384.

The stopper portion 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is moved up and down between an upper limit position and a lower limit position by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. The upper limit position is a position where the tip protrudes upward, and when the stopper portion 383 is at the upper limit position, it is possible to retain the game ball 99 in the retention lane 381 (see FIG. 10(B)). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip does not protrude upward, and when the stopper portion 383 is at the lower limit position, it is possible for the game ball 99 in the retention lane 381 to be discharged via the discharge lane 382 (see FIG. 10(C)). The game ball 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 is then guided to a position where it can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

The means for allowing the game ball 99 to be retained in the retention lane 381 and for allowing the game ball 99 in the retention lane 381 to be discharged to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the stopper portion 383 that can move up and down, and may be other means such as a stopper portion that can move forward and backward, or a stopper portion that can rotate between an upright state and a prone state. Also, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be discharged by releasing the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force. Furthermore, by configuring the retention lane 381 to be movable up and down, it is possible to realize a state in which the game ball 99 is retained and a state in which it is discharged. For example, the retention lane 381 may be configured to wait at a lower position than the discharge lane 382 to retain the game ball 99, while the retention lane 381 may be configured to move to a higher position than the discharge lane 382 to move the game ball 99 to the discharge lane 382. Alternatively, an opening may be provided in the game board 31 through which the game ball 99 can be discharged to the rear side of the game board 31, and the retention lane 381 may be configured to be movable up and down between a position where the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 and a position where the game ball 99 can be discharged from the opening to the rear side of the game board 31. Also, instead of the retention lane 381, a box-shaped movable body may be moved to set the game ball 99 in a state where it can be retained in the movable body and a state where it can be discharged to the rear side of the game board 31.

Here, FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a seven-segment display unit 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of numbers displayed on the seven-segment display unit, and FIG. 11(C) is a diagram showing an example of alphabets displayed on the seven-segment display unit.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), the seven-segment display unit 39 is made up of seven segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and dot point DP can be individually turned on and off, and can display at least the numbers 1 to 6 as shown in FIG. 11(B), and at least the letters A to F as shown in FIG. 11(C). In this embodiment, the seven-segment display unit 39 displays numbers (specific information) indicating each of the multiple (six) game setting values (numerical information) corresponding to the jackpot probability (see FIG. 14(A) and FIG. 14(B)) other than the game setting value (setting value (predetermined numerical information)) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10, by turning on or off each of the segments A to G. Specifically, in the seven-segment display unit 39, when the non-set value is the game setting value 1, the segments B and C are lit to display the number 1, when the non-set value is the game setting value 2, the segments A, B, D, E, and G are lit to display the number 2, when the non-set value is the game setting value 3, the segments A to G are lit to display the number 3, when the non-set value is the game setting value 4, the segments B, C, F, and G are lit to display the number 4, when the non-set value is the game setting value 5, the segments A, C, D, F, and G are lit to display the number 5, and when the non-set value is the game setting value 6, the segments A, C to G are lit to display the number 6. In this embodiment, when the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed, the dot point DP is lit to clearly indicate that the number corresponding to the non-set value has been displayed.

In addition, the numbers corresponding to non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 are displayed in an order that is determined when the main power is turned on (when the power is turned on) or when the set value is changed, as described below (see Figures 35 and 36). Also, as described below, the control order for turning on or off each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 is set (fixed) to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G.

In the seven-segment display unit 39, the segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during a predetermined period (the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during a predetermined period) are controlled to be turned on and off, as described below, and a number or a part of a number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Here, the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 indicates a non-set value other than the set value after the game set value. Therefore, the part of the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 does not indicate the game set value, but indicates a part of specific information indicating a non-set value, and corresponds to an indication of special information. In other words, the special information is displayed using a part of the multiple segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39. In this way, by displaying not only the number indicating the non-set value but also a part of the number (special information) on the seven-segment display unit 39, the player can not only identify the non-set value when a number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, but also can guess the non-set value based on the part of the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Therefore, even if no numbers are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, players can enjoy guessing the non-set value based on part of the numbers, which increases the fun of the game.

In addition, whether or not each segment A to G is a control target in the seven-segment display unit 39 may or may not be clearly indicated to the player. When it is clearly indicated that each segment A to G is a control target, it is easier to guess the set value compared to when it is not clearly indicated. In this embodiment, the control order of each segment A to G is fixed, so a method is adopted that does not clearly indicate that each segment A to G is a control target, making it difficult to guess the set value. When it is clearly indicated to the player that each segment A to G is a control target, for example, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is a control target by flashing the segment to be controlled, or to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is a control target by lighting it in a color different from when the segment to be controlled is lit.

In addition, the 7-segment display unit 39 may display information for identifying the non-set value with an alphabet corresponding to the non-set value. For example, the letter A may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 1, the letter B may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 2, the letter C may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 3, the letter D may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 4, the letter E may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 5, and the letter F may be displayed when the non-set value is game setting value 6 (see FIG. 11(C)).

The main display unit 36 includes a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a first reserved number display unit 364, and a second reserved number display unit 365, which are located in the upper right corner of the game board 31.

The normal symbol display section 361 includes a pair of LEDs representing normal symbols (normal symbols), and displays the result of a normal symbol winning lottery, which is triggered by winning through the through gate 317 and determines whether or not to open the electric role 315b, by a combination of turning on and off the LED pairs. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the LED pairs (displaying a normal symbol in a variable manner) when a player wins through the through gate 317, and displays the result of the normal symbol winning lottery by turning on or off each LED after the variable display time has elapsed.

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a seven-segment display device as the first special symbol (first special symbol), and displays the result of the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be played, which is triggered by a win in the first winning slot 314, by a combination of turning on and off seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the seven-segment display device to flash (display the first special symbol in a variable manner) in response to a win in the first winning slot 314, and displays the result of the jackpot lottery by turning on or off each segment after the variable display time has elapsed.

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a seven-segment display device as the second special symbol (second special symbol), and displays the result of the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be played, which is triggered by a win in the second winning slot 315, by a combination of lighting and extinguishing seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the seven-segment display device to flash (display the second special symbol in a variable manner) in response to a win in the second winning slot 315, and displays the result of the jackpot lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment after the variable display time has elapsed.

The first reserved number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reserved number N of the first special chart, which is displayed in a variable manner due to a winning entry into the first winning slot 314, by the number of lit LEDs.

The second reserved number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reserved number M of the second special chart, which changes in display due to a winning entry into the second winning slot 315, by the number of lit LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3 , the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140 .

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23. When the upper tray 23 is saturated with game balls, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.

As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level and supplies it to the control device and drive means provided within the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
12, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transitioning to a preset jackpot game state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is a calculation device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 41 also has a built-in ROM 411 and RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, some or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main control device 4 and outputs control signals from the main control device 4. The input/output I/F 42 is also connected to the ball entry sensors 313a-317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384. The MPU 41 determines whether balls have entered the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316, and whether the game ball 99 has passed through the through gate 317, based on the detection signal from the ball entry sensor 313a-317a. The MPU 41 also counts the number of out balls (number of shot balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. The input/output I/F 42 is also connected to the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the shot control device 8, and the power supply control device 9.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands to the audio lamp control device 5, such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot play start command, a round play start command, a round play end command, an ending start command, a jackpot play end command, a special out ball detection command, and a setting value change command.

The variation pattern command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and includes information regarding the jackpot type if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 of the variation start process in FIG. 26 described below, based on information stored in the reserve storage area 412b described below, when the main display unit 36 starts displaying the varying patterns. The variation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command separate from the variation pattern command.

The first and second hold commands are commands that notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery results in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold, the fluctuation pattern, and the hold number N or the hold number M when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described below increases. The first and second hold commands are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described below when there is an increase in the hold number N or the hold number M (step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process in FIG. 22 described below).

The shift command is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the win/lose information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 has shifted when the reserved number N or reserved number M decreases. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process in FIG. 25 described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is about to start, i.e., that the game state is about to transition to a jackpot game state, and is set in the game state transition process in the main process of FIG. 23 described below when transitioning to the jackpot game state. In addition, since the jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is about to start, by receiving the jackpot game start command, the voice and lamp control device 5 can know that not only the jackpot game is about to start, but also that the opening is about to start. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the voice and lamp control device 5 may know that the opening is about to start by the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 of the start of each round game in the open/close execution mode in the jackpot game, and of round number information indicating which round the round game is, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process in FIG. 23 described later. Note that the sound lamp control device 5 can know that the opening ends and the open/close execution mode starts by the round game start command, but it is also possible to set an opening end command at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command, or to set an open/close execution mode start command at the start of the open/close execution mode. Also, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game that is about to start may be set separately from the round game start command at the start of the round game, and the command may be sent to the sound lamp control device 5.

The round play end command is a command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 that the corresponding round play is to end in the open/close execution mode during jackpot play, and is set in the jackpot play control process in the main process in Figure 23 described below.

The jackpot game end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is ending, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later.

The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37, and is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 described later. The voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a specified period based on the special out ball detection command, and determines the control content in the 7-segment display unit 39.

The setting value change command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the setting value has been changed and the changed setting value, and is set in step S1710 of the setting value change process in Figure 27 described below.

Note that commands other than those mentioned above may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

The main control device 4 also includes an oscillator circuit and a frequency divider circuit as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillator circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillator circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution period of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 (described below) is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the divider circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (e.g., 4 msec), and the MPU 41 starts and executes the main timer interrupt process described below every time the clock signal rises (or falls). Note that the oscillator circuit and divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply operating clocks for the main controls in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. A clock signal may also be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for the processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the voice lamp control device 5, etc. The RAM 412 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

Now, referring to FIG. 13, the storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform the jackpot lottery and the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 performs the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time, etc., using the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the reserved storage area 412b, and the electric role reserved area 412c of the RAM 412.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used to select a jackpot, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, and a reach random number counter C3 used to determine the type of miss. The lottery counter 412a also includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variable type counter CS1 that determines the variable display time in the main display unit 36 and the pattern display unit 341. The lottery counter 412a also includes a normal win random number counter C4 used to select whether the electric role 315b of the second winning port 315 is in an open electric role state, and a normal win initial value counter CIN2 used to set the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they will be simply referred to as counters.

Counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referenced by the MPU 41 when drawing big wins and setting the variable display time, etc.

The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of variable play in which a jackpot lottery is held based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the first special symbol display unit 362 displays a variable display and a stop display may be referred to as a first special symbol play. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is held based on the values stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the second special symbol display unit 363 displays a variable and stationary display may be referred to as a second special symbol game.

When a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as the winning/losing information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as the winning/losing information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in one of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB. The winning/losing information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 41, which functions as the determination means of the present invention, by executing a process according to the control program. In addition, a lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS1, etc.) may be provided separately for each of the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is stored in either the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA or the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB.

Therefore, in addition to the lottery results of the jackpot lottery for 19 variable games that are executed based on the win/lose information stored in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 and the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variable display time) of the variable pattern display displayed on the pattern display unit 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the winning/losing information is stored in an available area in the order of priority from the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. The number of holding areas NAA in which winning/losing information is stored is stored as the holding number N.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning slot 315, the winning/losing information is stored in the free area in the order of priority of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. The number of holding areas REB1 to REB4 in which winning/losing information is stored is stored as the holding number M in the holding number storage area NAB.

In other words, the gaming machine 10 can hold up to four pieces of winning/losing information as winning history for the first winning slot 314 and the second winning slot 315, using a total of eight memory areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserved jackpots in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4.

In another embodiment, a holding area with a maximum holding capacity of eight is provided in common to the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315, and in this case, it is possible to hold a total of up to eight pieces of winning/losing information as winning history. The process of storing the winning/losing information is performed by the MPU 41 by executing a process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is a memory area used to move the winning/losing information stored in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the display of changing patterns in the main display unit 36 and the pattern display unit 341 begins. Specifically, the winning/losing information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE with priority, and when there is no winning/losing information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB and the number of reserved items memory area NAB is 0, the winning/losing information in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

In addition, in another embodiment, if the difference between the reserved number M stored in the reserved number memory area NAA of the first reserved storage area REA and the reserved number N stored in the reserved number memory area NAB of the second reserved storage area REB is 2 or more, the value of the reserved area with the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. In another embodiment, the win/loss information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one round of variable play, the MPU41 performs a lottery for a big win based on the numerical information stored as win/lose information in the execution area AE. At this time, if the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the win/lose information stored in the second reserved area REA2 shifts to the first reserved area REA1, the win/lose information stored in the third reserved area REA3 shifts to the second reserved area REA2, and the win/lose information stored in the fourth reserved area REA4 shifts to the third reserved area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the winning/losing information stored in the second reserved area REB2 shifts to the first reserved area REB1, the winning/losing information stored in the third reserved area REB3 shifts to the second reserved area REB2, and the winning/losing information stored in the fourth reserved area REB4 shifts to the third reserved area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 637, and is reset to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1 (0 to 738). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b when the game ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

The random number value that will result in a jackpot is set to two types, corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode, which is a guaranteed jackpot state, according to the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table storage area in ROM 411. Here, FIG. 14(A) shows an example of the low probability mode win/lose table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 14(B) shows an example of the high probability mode win/lose table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 14(A) and FIG. 14(B), a plurality of win/lose tables are provided as a low probability mode win/lose table and a high probability mode win/lose table, in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot probability) varies according to the game setting value. The low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table each include six win/lose tables corresponding to the six game setting values 1 to 6. The game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1 have a higher jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, in that order, which is advantageous for the player.

At game setting value 1, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 206 (0-205) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 821 (0-820) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/79.9 (820/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

In game setting value 2, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 212 (0-211) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 845 (0-844) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, in game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/77.6 (845/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

In game setting value 3, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 218 (0-217) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 869 (0-868) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, in game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/75.4 (869/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

At game setting value 4, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 224 (0-223) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 893 (0-892) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/292.6 (224/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/73.4 (893/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

At game setting value 5, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 230 (0-229) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 917 (0-916) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/284.9 (230/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/71.5 (917/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

At game setting value 6, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 236 (0-235) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 941 (0-940) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/277.7 (236/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/69.6 (941/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a random number other than the ones that result in a jackpot win, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

Here, the low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table share the same random numbers that will result in a jackpot lottery result for a jackpot between the same game setting values, but it is also possible that the random numbers that will result in a jackpot are not the same. Also, the random numbers that will result in a jackpot may not be consecutive values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

Although six low probability mode win/lose tables and six high probability mode win/lose tables are provided corresponding to the six game setting values, it is sufficient if there is at least one win/lose table for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six levels. It is also possible to provide multiple low probability mode win/lose tables corresponding to multiple game setting value levels, while providing one high probability mode win/lose table. In other words, it is also possible to provide multiple game setting value levels for the low probability mode, and not provide multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode, with a uniform jackpot probability. Of course, it is also possible to provide a uniform jackpot probability in the low probability mode, and multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 19, and is reset to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b when the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two jackpot types, the special jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area in the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 14(C) is a diagram showing an example of the allocation table. In the example shown in FIG. 14(C), when the type of variable play is the first special symbol play triggered by winning the first winning slot 314, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R jackpot is 10 numbers from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that will result in a 16R jackpot is 5 numbers from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of variable play is the second special symbol play triggered by winning the second winning slot 315, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R jackpot is 5 numbers from 0 to 4, the number of random numbers that will result in a 16R jackpot is 10 numbers from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. In other words, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop jackpot machine in which the probability of a jackpot in the first special symbol play and the second special symbol play is the same. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a 16R jackpot is set higher in the second special symbol game than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the jackpot game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric role 315b), the expected value of winning game balls when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is set higher than in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode with a low probability of opening the electric role 315b).

In this embodiment, an individual allocation table is set for the first winning slot 314, which triggers the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second winning slot 315, which triggers the second special symbol game upon winning. The allocation probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball wins into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, but it is also possible that the allocation probability of the jackpot type is the same for the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop probability machine, and it is also possible to configure it as a so-called ST machine, V-ST machine, type 1 and type 2 mixed machine, etc.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R sure jackpot", a "16R sure jackpot", a "5R normal jackpot", or a "miss".

Here, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened is repeated five times during the jackpot game. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game is repeated 16 times during the jackpot game.

In the case of a 5R or 16R guaranteed jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a guaranteed jackpot game state, which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning the jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric roler 315b. In this embodiment, the guaranteed jackpot game state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R guaranteed jackpot", a "16R guaranteed jackpot", or a "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a time-saving game state in which the game is in a low probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is low and in a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric device 315b is high. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) continues until the results of the jackpot lottery a preset number of times, such as 50 or 100 times, have been notified to the player, or ends when the player is informed that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed.

Incidentally, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine, rather than a loop probability variable machine, after the end of the jackpot game at the probability variable jackpot, a preset number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 50 times, 100 times) are executed in the probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), and if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed, the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, as another embodiment, a lottery for falling from the probability variable game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state can be considered in variable play. Note that if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, there is no transition to the jackpot game state or the time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 will be described as having three types of jackpots: a 5R special jackpot, a 16R special jackpot, and a 5R regular jackpot. However, the invention is not limited to this and other jackpot types, such as a 2-round special jackpot, a 2-round regular jackpot, and a 16R regular jackpot, may also be considered.

The reach random number counter C3 is incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and is reset to 0 after it reaches a maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b when the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a miss. Specifically, the miss type table stored in the miss type table storage area in the ROM 411 sets the values of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to three types of miss types: a front-back miss reach in which the final stop symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, a non-front-back miss reach in which the final stop symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and a complete miss in which no reach occurs.

Here, FIG. 14(D) is a diagram showing an example of a miss type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14(D), the random number value for a front or rear miss reach is 0 to 8, the random number value for a reach other than a front or rear miss is 9 to 38, and the random number value for a complete miss is 39 to 238. Note that in variable play in which a 5R special jackpot, a 16R special jackpot, or a 5R regular jackpot is won, that is, in variable play that transitions to an open/close execution mode, the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, the term "reach" refers to a state in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating a big win is likely to occur between the start of the display of the symbols in the symbol display section 341 and the stop display of the symbols. In one example, the same symbols are displayed in two of the three stop positions on the pay line in the symbol display section 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining stop position changes. In addition, during the reach change state in the symbol display section 341, a story presentation process is executed in which a video of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, and a player-participation type operation presentation process is executed in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the presentation. Note that, during the execution of these presentation processes, the display of the variable symbols in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged form.

The normal win random number counter C4 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 250, and is reset to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. The normal win random number counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric role reserve area 412c in the RAM 412 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the electric role device 315b will be opened for a predetermined period of time, based on the value of the normal win random number counter C4 stored in the electric role reserve area 412c. For example, a win is considered when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 0 and 199, and a loss is considered when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 200 and 250.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 199, and is reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the pattern variation display displayed on the pattern display unit 341 according to the lottery result of the big win lottery. In this way, by determining the variation pattern type, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the rough variation game presentation type such as high-speed variation presentation (basic presentation, non-reach presentation), normal reach presentation, super reach presentation, and special reach presentation according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern by referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a special jackpot variation table, or a miss variation table prestored in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be provided separately for the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Also, a special jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R special jackpot and the 16R special jackpot.

Here, Fig. 15(A), Fig. 15(B) and Fig. 15(C) are diagrams showing examples of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a special jackpot fluctuation table and a miss fluctuation table. As shown in Fig. 15(A), Fig. 15(B) and Fig. 15(C), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the special jackpot fluctuation table and the miss fluctuation table, a fluctuation pattern is previously associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the MPU41 refers to the normal jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R normal jackpot", the special jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot" or a "16R special jackpot", and the miss fluctuation table when the lottery result is a "miss", respectively, to identify the type of fluctuation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(A) and FIG. 15(B), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the guaranteed jackpot fluctuation table, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Here, when the fluctuation pattern "01" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach performance pattern with a fluctuation display time of 30 s as the fluctuation type (performance pattern type), and the normal reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is a normal reach performance. Also, when the fluctuation pattern "02" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the super reach performance pattern with a fluctuation display time of 60 s as the fluctuation type (performance pattern type), and the super reach performance pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is a super reach performance. Furthermore, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach presentation pattern, which has the longest variation display time of 90 seconds, as the variation type (presentation pattern), and executes the special reach presentation pattern on the symbol display unit 341. The special reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a special reach presentation.

As shown in FIG. 15(C), in the miss variation table, the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern is determined for each stop type at the time of miss (reach of miss before and after, reach other than reach of miss before and after, complete miss) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of miss is reach of miss before and after or reach other than miss before and after, one of the variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of miss is complete miss, one of the variation patterns "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach performance pattern (non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 7 s as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the non-reach performance pattern is executed in the pattern display unit 341. Furthermore, when the variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach presentation pattern (non-reach presentation pattern) with a variation display time of 10 seconds as the variation type (presentation pattern type), and the non-reach presentation pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the losing variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "04", a losing pattern variable display is executed in which the variable display stops at a losing symbol without a notice effect in which a character, message, etc. is displayed. Also, in the gaming machine 10, as the losing variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "05", a losing pattern variable display is executed in which the variable display stops at a losing symbol accompanied by a notice effect in which a character, message, etc. is displayed. Also, when the losing variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "05" is executed, a player participation type operation effect in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected may be executed as a notice effect.

The types of variation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C). In addition, a special jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R special jackpot and the 16R special jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach presentations with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach presentations executed in the normal reach presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "01", and one of the normal reach presentations selected from among them is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of super reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the super reach effects executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "02", and one of the super reach effects selected from them is executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is higher than in the normal reach effect, and the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is lower than in the special reach effect.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of special reach effects with different characters and stories are prepared as the special reach effects executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "03", and one of the special reach effects selected from among them is executed. The special reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is an effect that develops from, for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation level) of winning the jackpot is higher than with the normal reach effect or the special reach effect.

In addition, the presentation patterns corresponding to the variation patterns may include player participation type operation presentations, such as an operation presentation in which the operation status of the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, for example, a single operation presentation in which a single operation is reflected in the presentation, a rapid-fire operation presentation in which the rapid-fire operation of the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, and a long press operation presentation in which the operation of the player long-pressing the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation.

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies a variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 and the symbol display section 341 of the main display section 36, it inputs a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "A01" to "A03" in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added before the variation pattern "01" to "03". Also, if the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "B01" to "B03" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R special jackpot is added before the variation pattern "01" to "03". Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "16R guaranteed jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the fluctuation pattern commands "C01" to "C03," which have a "C" before the fluctuation pattern "01" to "03," indicating that it is a 16R guaranteed jackpot. If the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 outputs one of the fluctuation pattern commands "D01" to "D05," which have a "D" before the fluctuation pattern "01" to "05," indicating that it is a miss. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and determines the details of the fluctuation mode, such as the fluctuation type and performance type, displayed on the pattern display unit 341, based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, plays a sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the fluctuation display, and turns on, blinks, or turns off the illumination unit 27.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process to determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) for the fluctuation display in the symbol display unit 341 based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured with an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big win lottery. In addition, since the details of the fluctuation mode actually displayed in the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of fluctuation modes.

Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, ball output performance, etc. In this embodiment, the game information storage area 412d stores the game information such as "number of out balls", "number of balls paid out from the general winning port", "number of balls paid out from the first winning port", "number of balls paid out from the second winning port", "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port", "set value", "base information", "sequential role ratio information", "role ratio information", "cumulative number of jackpot lotteries", "number of unit jackpot lotteries", "number of jackpots", and "number of consecutive misses". Of this game information, "set value", "base information", "sequential role ratio information", "role ratio information", and "number of unit jackpot lotteries" correspond to game information (performance information) related to ball output performance.

The "number of out balls" is the cumulative number of game balls that have been released onto the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a count of the number of out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, which will be described later.

The "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the general winning port 313 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). When a winning into the general winning port 313 is detected by the ball entry sensor 313a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to a winning into the general winning port 313 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the first winning port 314 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). When a winning into the first winning port 314 is detected by the ball entry sensor 314a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning into the first winning port 314 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the second winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the second winning port 315 in the time-saving play state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). When a winning into the second winning port 315 is detected by the ball entry sensor 315a in the time-saving play state, this "number of balls paid out from the second winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning into the second winning port 315 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the variable winning port 316 during a jackpot game state. When a winning into the variable winning port 316 is detected by the ball entry sensor 316a during a jackpot game state, this "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to a winning into the variable winning port 316 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "setting value" is used to select the low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(A)) and high probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (win/lose determination). In other words, the "setting value" specifies the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and high probability mode. In this embodiment, six setting values (six types of low probability mode win/lose tables (see FIG. 14(A)) and high probability mode win/lose tables (see FIG. 14(B)) with different jackpot probabilities) are prepared as described below. The "setting value" is updated during the setting value change process in FIG. 27 described below.

"Base information" is information about the "base", which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and this "base" is the ratio of the combined number of paid balls of the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" and the "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" to the "number of balls out" in the normal game mode. The "base" can be expressed mathematically as "base" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the general winning port" + "number of balls paid out from the first winning port") / "number of balls out". "Base information" includes information about the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the 60,000 ball base B2 before last. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the 60,000 ball base B2 before last are updated each time the number of balls out reaches 60,000 balls in the specific performance information update process of Figure 28 described below (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the number of out balls two balls before that reaches 60,000 balls is the second previous 60,000 ball base B2, and each is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. Also, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. Also, when the counter value of the number of out balls is calculated as the current base BL until it reaches 60,000 balls, the "base information" stores the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port", "number of balls paid out from the first winning port", and "number of out balls" for base calculation, in addition to the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port", "number of balls paid out from the first winning port", and "number of out balls" described above.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes the "current base BL", the "previous 60,000 ball base B1", and the "second-previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are kept as history, but it is also possible to keep three or more past 60,000 ball bases as history. In addition, the "base information" may include the cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present.

The "continuous feature ratio information" is information relating to the "continuous feature ratio," which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable feature port to the total number of balls paid out from all the feature ports (general feature port 313, first feature port 314, second feature port 315, and variable feature port 316) that pay out prize balls. The "continuous feature ratio" can be expressed mathematically as "continuous feature ratio" = 100 x "number of balls paid out from variable feature port" / "total number of balls paid out." The "continuous feature ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described below. In this embodiment, the "continuous feature ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous feature ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "sequential feature ratio information" may be the consecutive feature ratio for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), the period until a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 1,000 times) are performed in normal game mode, or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "sequential feature ratio information" may include both the cumulative consecutive feature ratio and the consecutive feature ratio for a certain period.

The "functionality ratio information" is information on the "functionality ratio," which is the ratio of the combined number of balls paid out from the second winning port and the variable winning port to the total number of balls paid out from all winning ports (general winning port 313, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, and variable winning port 316) that pay out prize balls. The "functionality ratio" can be expressed as a formula: "functionality ratio" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the second winning port" + "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port") / "total number of balls paid out." The "functionality ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described below. In this embodiment, the "functionality ratio information" is stored as the cumulative functionality ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "function ratio information" may be the function ratio for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), the period until a certain number of jackpot draws are performed in normal game mode (e.g., 1,000 times), or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "successive function ratio information" may include both the cumulative function ratio and the function ratio for a certain period of time.

The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is the number of jackpot draws that have been performed in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) since the gaming machine 10 was started before the opening of the gaming hall until the present. In other words, the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is also the cumulative number of times that the pattern change display of the first special pattern display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 has been executed in response to a winning entry into the first winning slot 314 in the normal game mode. The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is incremented by one each time the pattern change display of the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 of the change start process in FIG. 26, which will be described later. In addition, the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "unit number of jackpot draws" is the number of times a jackpot draw is received triggered by winning the first winning slot 314 (the number of times the pattern change display of the first special pattern display unit of the main display unit 36 is executed) per a certain number of negative difference balls in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). In this embodiment, the certain number is "250 balls", and the difference balls is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "number of balls paid out to the general winning slot" and the "number of balls paid out to the first winning slot" from the "number of out balls". In other words, the "unit number of jackpot draws" is the number of times the first special pattern change display of the first special pattern display unit 362 is displayed (the number of times a jackpot draw is received) on average for 1000 yen when 250 balls are lent for 1000 yen at a game hall. The "unit number of jackpot draws" may be the number of times a jackpot draw is received per a certain number of "out balls" in the normal game state. The "number of unit jackpot draws" is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described later. In this embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot draws" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "number of unit jackpot draws" may be for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot draws (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot draws (for example, 1,000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state, or a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, both the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws and the number of unit jackpot draws in a certain period may be stored as gaming information as the "number of unit jackpot draws".

The "number of jackpots" is the number of times that a jackpot has been drawn in a jackpot lottery that has been held since the gaming machine 10 was started up before the opening of the amusement hall until the present. The "number of jackpots" is incremented by one each time the gaming state is transitioned to a jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition process executed in step S1306 of the main processing in FIG. 23, which will be described later. In addition, the "number of jackpots" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "number of consecutive misses" is the number of consecutive misses in the jackpot lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and is cleared to 0 when the lottery result is a jackpot. When the pattern change display on the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 in the change start process in FIG. 26 described later, if the result of the win/loss determination based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S1603 is a miss, the "number of consecutive misses" is incremented by one, and if the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot, the "number of consecutive misses" is cleared to 0. In this embodiment, the "number of consecutive misses" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "number of consecutive misses" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "setting values" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a setting value display section 45, a setting value change operation section 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a schematic example of a performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided in a position that is visible when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of multiple (four in this embodiment) seven-segment displays 431-434, and is referred to as a four-digit seven-segment display. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or may be provided in another component of the game other than the main control unit 331. It is also possible to display the "base information" by using the first special symbol display section 362 and/or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

The seven-segment displays 431-434 are capable of displaying the numbers "0" through "9" and the letters "A" through "F." When displaying the letter "B" on the seven-segment displays 431-434, a dot is lit up to display "8." in order to distinguish it from the number "8," and when displaying the letter "D," a dot is lit up to display "0." in order to distinguish it from the number "0." Additionally, when displaying any of the letters "A" through "F," it is also conceivable to light up a dot to clearly indicate that it is a letter.

The performance display monitor 43 has four seven-segment displays 431-434, of which the two leftmost seven-segment displays 431, 432 are identification segments that display the "base type" as an abbreviation, and the two rightmost seven-segment displays 433, 434 are ratio segments that display the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the two leftmost seven-segment displays 431, 432 display the abbreviation for the current base BL, "BL", as "8." and "L", while the two rightmost seven-segment displays 433, 434 display the base value "31" as "3" and "1". In other words, the four seven-segment displays 431-434 display "8.", "L", "3", and "1" from the left, respectively.

The performance display switch 44 is operated to switch the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four seven-segment displays 431 to 434) on and off collectively by pressing it, and is provided in a position that allows easy operation when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44 turns the power on, and pressing the lower half turns the power off. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn the power on, electricity is supplied to the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434, enabling the display of base information on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn the power off, electricity is cut off to the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. The performance display switch 44 may be provided somewhere other than the main control device 4.

Here, FIG. 18(A) is an example of display on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 18(A), when the performance display switch 44 is off, the seven-segment displays 431-434 are turned off, and the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 18(B) to FIG. 18(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, the "base information" is displayed repeatedly at regular intervals in the following order: current base BL → previous 60,000 ball base B1 → previous 60,000 ball base B2 → current base BL, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off. In the example shown in FIG. 18(B), the current base BL is 28%, in the example shown in FIG. 18(C), the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and in the example shown in FIG. 18(D), the previous 60,000 ball base B2 is 32%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18(A), when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the seven-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

The programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as a program to calculate the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and a program to display the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 in sequence at regular intervals on the performance display monitor 43, are stored in a ROM 47 provided in the main control device 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. This reduces the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store the programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. The programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may also be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

In addition, the performance display monitor 43 may display other performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d, such as "continuous feature ratio information" or "feature ratio information," instead of or in addition to the "base information."

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a seven-segment display, and may be configured with other types of display, such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 17, the setting value display unit 45 displays the above-mentioned setting values for selecting the low probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(B)) to be referenced in the jackpot lottery, and is configured with a 7-segment display. Note that the setting value display unit 45 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured with other types of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display, and the setting value may be displayed using the performance display monitor 43.

The set value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the seven-segment display on and off when pressed, and when the power of the seven-segment display is on, it allows the set value to be changed by rotating the unit. The set value change operation unit 46 has a function as a contact switch that is turned on and off by pressing the unit, for example, and a function as a rotary switch that switches the contact by rotating the unit (by a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of the display on the set value display unit 45 of the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 19(A), when the setting value display unit 45 is turned off and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the seven-segment display is energized and a number is displayed on the setting value display unit 45. The number displayed at this time is the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current setting value. In the illustrated example, the setting value is "1". On the other hand, when the setting value display unit 45 is turned on and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the power to the seven-segment display is cut off and the setting value display unit 45 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 19B, when the setting value display unit 45 is turned on, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated. In the illustrated example, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is increased by rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the right, and the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is decreased by rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the left. When the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the setting value display unit 45, the changed number is stored as the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Therefore, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the number corresponding to the desired setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45 and the power supply of the 7-segment display is turned off, the number displayed immediately before the power supply was turned off is determined as the setting value. This allows the MPU 41 to perform a jackpot lottery based on a low-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(A)) or a high-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(B)) that is selected according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412.

The method of changing the set value is not limited to turning the set value change operation unit 46 and then turning off the power of the set value display unit 45. For example, the method may involve rotating the set value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) to determine the set value, repeatedly or long-pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) to change the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 and then turning off the power of the set value display unit 45, or inserting a key into a keyhole provided on the main control unit 4 or the like and turning the key to change the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 and then removing the key.

Here, the performance information display device 4A equipped with the setting value display unit 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. The control unit 33 is also provided on the rear side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Therefore, the setting value display unit 45 is provided on the rear side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the game board 31 relative to the front frame 11, it is possible to select a state in which it is visible from the outside of the gaming machine 10 (the front side of the front frame 11) and a state in which it is not visible. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 cannot be seen, while by opening the game board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 can be seen. As a result, when a player plays a game on the gaming machine 10, the setting value display unit 45 cannot be seen unless the game board 31 is opened, and the player is prevented from learning the setting value from the numbers displayed on the setting value display unit 45. When the setting value display unit 45 is lit, it is turned off by pressing the setting value change operation unit 46. Therefore, by keeping the setting value display unit 45 turned off during the business hours of the gaming hall, it is possible to prevent the player from learning the setting value from the setting value display unit 45, even if the setting value display unit 45 is made visible by opening the game board 31 due to ball jamming on the gaming machine 10 or the like.

On the other hand, when the setting value display unit 45 is turned off, pressing the setting value change operation unit 46 turns it on, and the number corresponding to the setting value is hidden. Therefore, outside the business hours of the gaming hall, by opening the gaming board 31 to the front frame 11 and pressing the setting value change operation unit 46, the setting value display unit 45 turns on, allowing the setting value to be confirmed based on the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45, and the setting value can be changed by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. This ensures the confidentiality of the setting value during business hours, while allowing the setting value to be changed outside business hours with a simple operation.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in Figure 12, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and performs pattern variation display and performance display in the pattern display section 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The voice and lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51 and an input/output I/F 52. The MPU 51 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 also includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512 built therein.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp blinking patterns used in variable game presentations and big win game presentations. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

The sound lamp control device 5 inputs commands (control signals) to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4 by executing processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 using the MPU 51, and controls the display of the symbol display unit 341. The sound lamp control device 5 also controls the playback sound output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, when executing the variable game presentation and the big win game presentation described below, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the playback sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Commands such as a change pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. The voice lamp control device 5 also outputs a display change pattern command and the like to the display control device 6. Note that another embodiment may also be configured such that the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Another embodiment may also be configured such that the sub-control unit 332 includes a single control device having the functions of both the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The input/output I/F 52 is also connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the flashing mode of the illumination unit 27, the up and down movement of the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38, the 7-segment display unit 39, and the like, based on commands input from the main control device 4. The MPU 51 controls the up and down movement of the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38, so that a state in which the game ball (special out ball) that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention unit 38, and a state in which the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 is discharged through the discharge lane 382 are selected. In addition, the MPU 51 controls the lighting or extinguishing of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39. In addition, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the operation switch 20a. This allows the MPU 51 to detect when an operation has been performed on the operation button 20, and based on the detection result, it is also possible to control image game effects executed on the pattern display unit 341, audio output effects in which sound is output from the speaker 26, and lamp effects based on the blinking pattern of the illumination unit 27.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined calculation processing based on commands such as the variation pattern command, the first hold command, the second hold command, and the shift command input from the main control unit 4.

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern (decorative pattern stop pattern combination (see FIG. 38(A)), variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 38(B))) and presentation pattern type (see FIG. 39(A) to FIG. 37(C)) based on the variation pattern command, sends a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6 (see step S2105 in the command determination process in FIG. 37), and starts the pattern variation display in the pattern display unit 341. At this time, in the case where the variation pattern command indicates a miss, the pattern display unit 341 displays the decorative pattern combination corresponding to the miss.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on a display variation pattern command input from the voice lamp control device 5, thereby executing the pattern variation display and the performance display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the pattern display unit 341 are connected to the input/output I/F 62. Note that two-way communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is a calculation device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and a built-in RAM 612. The display control device 6 also has built-in other circuits, such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for receiving interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 and the like. In addition, some or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by electronic circuits.

The ROM 611 stores a control program and a number of types of images, including changing patterns such as decorative patterns used in the changing pattern display of the pattern display unit 341, preview effect images, reach effect images, big win effect images, and miss effect images. The images displayed on the pattern display unit 341 include still images and videos. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each changing display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used, the display timing, and the changing display time of the changing pattern. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays images on the pattern display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the changing display pattern command, thereby realizing the changing pattern display and effect display.

RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processes executed by MPU 61. Note that RAM 612 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Dispensing control device 7]
The dispensing control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71 and an input/output I/F 72. The MPU 71 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also has a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 built in.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs control signals from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input/output I/F 72.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stop member that switches between paying out and not paying out game balls, and a payout sensor 132b that detects the game balls being paid out individually. The payout control device 7 pays out any number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection results of the payout sensor 132b. The payout control device 7 is also provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, to clear the ball jam (return to normal state) when a payout error such as ball jamming occurs in the payout device 132.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island equipment together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 can pay out a number of game balls equivalent to a preset amount within the range of the amount stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10, and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to pay out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the MPU 71 controls the payout device 132 to pay out the predetermined number of game balls. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium with an IC chip built in. The ball lending device 100 may also be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls according to the amount of cash inserted by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 to supply the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321. The launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22, and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation, thereby launching the game balls on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

The launch handle 22 is also provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation performed by the player, and a voltage is input to the launch control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 adjusts the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 based on the voltage value input according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 so that the greater the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22, the stronger the launch strength of the game balls from the game ball launch mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the launch handle 22 is provided with a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b that the player operates to stop the launch of the game ball at will. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to stop the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is detected to be operated by the player. This prevents the launch handle 22 from being fixed in a rotating state, for example, and prevents the player from playing in a situation where the player is not touching the launch handle 22. In addition, the player can stop the launch of the ball game by operating the ball stop switch 21b with his or her thumb or the like at any timing while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors and drive units, a +5V voltage for logic used in the control device, etc. The power supply control device 9 then supplies the generated +12V or +5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, etc.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power supply switch 90 for turning the power supply of the gaming machine 10 ON/OFF, and a RAM erase switch 91 that is operated to return the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power supply switch 90 is operated to turn on the power with the RAM erase switch 91 ON.

The power supply control device 9 is also provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that are charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Also, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Furthermore, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply has been cut off, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the dispensing control device 7, etc. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24 V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, it determines that a power outage has occurred when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22 V. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the dispensing control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they interrupt the control they are currently executing and execute a specified NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Figures 20 to 33. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and an NMI interrupt process that is executed during a power outage. Note that in this embodiment, a description of the start-up process and the NMI interrupt process will be omitted, and only the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described. In addition, in the start-up process, it is confirmed whether the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main control unit 4]
20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt process will be explained below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process to determine the detection state of the sensors connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, the special out ball sensor 384, etc. is determined. At this time, when the MPU 41 detects the entrance of a game ball into any of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information. When an out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. When a special out ball is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and stores the special out ball detection command in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 executes updating of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1003>
Next, in step S1003, the MPU 41 executes updating of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4, respectively, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process associated with a win in the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 (step S1004), and executes a launch control process (step S1005). Details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the launch control process is a process that enables the launch of the game ball on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch has not been operated. The launch control process is also a process that disables the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b has been operated. When the launch of the game ball is enabled, the MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 executes a through gate process in which a normal win lottery is executed to determine whether or not the electric role 315b of the second winning port 315 is in an electric role open state based on the normal win random number counter C4 stored in the electric role reserve area 412c. Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first judges whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. Then, when the high frequency support mode is not in effect, the MPU 41 judges that a normal win has occurred when the normal win random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, and judges that a loss has occurred when the normal win random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. In addition, when the high frequency support mode is in effect, the MPU 41 judges that a normal win has occurred when the normal win random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and judges that a loss has occurred when the normal win random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. When the MPU 41 determines that a normal win has occurred in the through gate process, the electric device 315b is opened for a predetermined period of time, which allows a win in the second winning hole 315 at the upper right of the game board 31 to which the electric device 315b is arranged.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, Fig. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 20. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to Fig. 21.

<Step S1101>
21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been won at the first winning port 314. If the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won at the first winning port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if the MPU 41 determines that a prize has not been won at the first winning port 314 (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 judges whether the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). If the reserved number N is the maximum reserved number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1106. On the other hand, if the reserved number N is not the maximum reserved number (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of Figure 20, and the variable type counter CS1, which is updated in the main processing described below (steps S1302 and S1312 of Figure 23), and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA of the reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the winning/losing information for the first reservation acquired in step S1104 before it becomes the subject of judgment of winning/losing of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later, and executes a first reserved command setting process to set the first reserved command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. The details of the first reserved command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has been made at the second winning port 315. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the second winning port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the second winning port 315 (step S1106: No), the process ends the initial winning process and proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 judges whether the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). If the reserved number M is the maximum reserved number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 in Fig. 20. On the other hand, if the reserved number M is not the maximum reserved number (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of Figure 20, and the variable type counter CS1 (steps S1302 and S1312 of Figure 23), which is updated in the main processing described below, and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB of the reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the winning/losing information for the second reserved command acquired in step S1109 before the winning/losing information is used to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later, and executes a second reserved command setting process to set a second reserved command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, the second reserved command setting process is the same as the first reserved command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that the second reserved command setting process can be performed by replacing the "first reserved command" with the "second reserved command" and the "reserved number N" with the "reserved number M" in the first reserved command setting process in FIG. 22.

[First Pending Command Setting Process]
Here, Fig. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first reserved command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process in Fig. 21. The first reserved command includes information indicating that the command is the first reserved command, and information such as the type of the first reserved command (jackpot type or miss), the fluctuation pattern, and the number of reserved commands N. Hereinafter, the first reserved command setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 22.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the reserved number N from the reserved number memory area NAA of the first reserved storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first reservation from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the mode is the high probability mode, and if the mode is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the mode is not the high probability mode (step S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the mode is the high probability mode based on a high probability mode flag that is set to ON when the mode is changed to the high probability mode in a game state change process (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main process described later, and is set to OFF when the mode is changed from the high probability mode to another game state such as a big win game state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads out the high probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14B) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the setting value change process in FIG. 27 described later, and executes a hit/miss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 corresponds to a jackpot win based on the high probability mode hit/miss table. Meanwhile, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the setting value change process in FIG. 27 described later, and executes a hit/miss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 corresponds to a jackpot win based on the low probability mode hit/miss table.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the hit/miss judgment is performed based on the high probability mode hit/miss table or the low probability mode hit/miss table saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described below. However, in steps S1203 or S1204, the setting value saved in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described below may be read out, and the high probability mode hit/miss table or the low probability mode hit/miss table corresponding to that setting value may be selected one by one to perform the hit/miss judgment.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 judges whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the MPU 41 judges that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206. If the MPU 41 judges that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot win (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads out the counter values of the big win type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the winning/losing information is stored in the third reserve area REA3 in step S1104 in the start-up winning process of FIG. 21, the counter values of the big win type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 included in the winning/losing information stored in the third reserve area REA3 are read out. The reserve area in which the winning/losing information is stored in step S1104 in the start-up winning process of FIG. 21 among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 can be determined by the value of the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NA.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the reserved number N in the first reserved command. In this way, since the first reserved command includes the reserved number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first reserved command can recognize which of the first reserved area REA1 to fourth reserved area REA4 the winning/losing information stored in the first reserved command corresponds to by referring to the reserved number N included in the first reserved command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a miss, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the reserved number N in the first reserved command (step S1209).

The first hold command that is set to on in the first hold command setting process is stored in RAM 412, and is erased after being sent to the voice lamp control device 5 together with other commands in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. 23, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Furthermore, the contents of the first hold command described here are merely an example, and are not limited to those described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 is able to grasp contents similar to the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main Processing of Main Control Device 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Fig. 23. In the main processing, main control processing for the progress of variable play and big win play is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 is executed as a regular processing of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processing of steps S1310 to S1312 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 to the next cycle.

<Step S1301>
As shown in Fig. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 executes an external output process to transmit output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt process or the previous main process in Fig. 20 to a control device such as the sub-control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. For example, when commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a setting value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery count update command are set in the RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Also, when a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a prize has been won in the general prize winning opening 313, the variable prize winning opening 316, etc., based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a prize has been won, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize. At this time, in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a prize has been won in the general prize winning opening 313 or the first prize winning opening 314, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the general prize winning opening or the first prize winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current prize winning. In addition, in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the sure-win game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), if a win occurs in the second winning port 315, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the second winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current winning. Furthermore, in the big win game state, if a win occurs in the variable winning port 316, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the variable winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current winning.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. Details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, but in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned big win lottery is executed, and a variable pattern command required for the pattern variable display by the pattern display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a variable pattern command indicating the lottery result of the big win lottery and the variable display time in the RAM 412 based on each value of the big win random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interruption process in FIG. 20, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in steps S1302 and S1312 of this process.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game consisting of an opening, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 executes a round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened, by controlling the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 319, the number of times corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game (jackpot type). For example, the MPU 41 executes a round game five times when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R variable jackpot, and executes a round game 16 times when the jackpot type is a 16R variable jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot game control process, when starting each round game in the opening/closing execution mode, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412, and when starting an ending, an ending start command is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start process in Fig. 26 described later. In the game state transition process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state in which an open/close execution mode is executed, a sure-variable game state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a time-saving game state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a normal game state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, or the like.

For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state after the variable game that notifies the result of the lottery ends. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Also, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the jackpot game state to a predetermined game state according to the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable jackpot or a 16R variable jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions to a variable jackpot game state after the jackpot game ends, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions to a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when the notification of the lottery results for the specified number of jackpot lotteries has finished during the time-saving game state, the game state will transition to the normal game state after the variable game ends.

In addition, when the MPU 41 transitions the game state, it sets the flag for the game state before the transition to off, while setting the flag for the game state after the transition to on. For example, when the game state transitions from a jackpot game state to a high probability game state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game flag to off, while setting the high probability mode flag to on. On the other hand, when the game state transitions from a high probability game state to a jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets the high probability mode flag to off, while setting the jackpot game flag to on.

Furthermore, when the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state, it sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "number of jackpots" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a setting value change process. In this setting value change process, a process is executed to control display or non-display of a setting value, or change of a setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d, in response to an operation on the setting value change operation unit 46. Details of the setting value change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting value change process is executed in the main process, but it is also conceivable that it may be executed only during the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or during the period from the start-up process until the launch of game balls begins. This prevents the setting value from being changed after the player has started playing until the next time the power is turned on, thereby preventing the setting value from being changed during the opening hours of the game hall.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a process of updating specific performance information from among game information. In this embodiment, the base information, the number of unit big win lotteries, the consecutive role ratio, and the role ratio are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28 and FIG. 29.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes a display control process for the performance display monitor 43. In this display control process for the performance display monitor 43, a process is executed for displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43. Details of the display control process for the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to Figs. 30 to 33.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 judges whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. If the MPU 41 judges that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1301 and executes each process from S1301 onwards. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 judges that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 repeatedly executes steps S1310, S1311 and S1312 until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, during the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process, until it judges that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes).

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the fluctuation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of Fig. 23. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to Fig. 24.

<Step S1401>
As shown in Fig. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 judges whether the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game or not, and if it is in a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is terminated, and if it is not in a jackpot game (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not a jackpot game is being executed is judged based on a jackpot game flag that is set to ON when transitioning to a jackpot game state and is set to OFF when transitioning from the jackpot game state to another game state, for example, in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process of Fig. 23.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the pattern change is being displayed, and if the pattern change is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the pattern change is not being displayed (step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not the pattern change is being displayed is judged based on a change display flag that is set to ON at the start of the change display in step S1606 in the change start process in FIG. 26 described later, and is set to OFF in step S1405 of the change game control process when the change display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes).

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the pattern variable display. If it determines that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), it transitions to step S1404, and if it determines that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), it terminates the variable game control processing.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the first special pattern display unit 362 or the second special pattern display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 to stop displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game (step S1404), and sets the variable display in progress flag to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not both the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA of the reserved storage area 412b and the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB are 0 (step S1406). Here, if the MPU 41 determines that both the reserved number N and the reserved number M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), it ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, if either one of the reserved number N and the reserved number M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the winning/losing information data stored in the reserved storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 ends the process in step S1407, the process proceeds to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a change start process for making the symbol display unit 341 execute a change display based on the winning/losing information, and ends the change game control process. The details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

[Data setting process]
Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 in Fig. 24. The data setting process will be described below with reference to Fig. 25.

<Step S1501>
25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether the reserved number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0 or not, and if the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, if the reserved number M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
If the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA (step S1502) and moves the winning/losing information from the first reserved area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the winning/losing information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the winning/losing information of the second reserved area REA2 is moved to the first reserved area REA1, the winning/losing information of the third reserved area REA3 is moved to the second reserved area REA2, and the winning/losing information of the fourth reserved area REA4 is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the processing of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is performed when the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 is performed when both or either of the reserved number M and the reserved number N is not 0 in step S1406 of Fig. 24 (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the reserved number N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the winning/losing information from the first reserved area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the winning/losing information in the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the winning/losing information in the second reserved area REB2 is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the winning/losing information in the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the winning/losing information in the fourth reserved area REB4 is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the processing of step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the winning/losing information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is then sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. This changes the number of reserved patterns displayed on the pattern display unit 341, etc. When the process of step S1508 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and proceeds to step S1408 in FIG. 24.

[Fluctuation start processing]
Here, Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 in Fig. 24. Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to Fig. 26.

<Step S1601>
As shown in Fig. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 judges whether the game state is in the high probability mode. Whether the game state is in the high probability mode is judged based on whether the high probability mode flag, which is set to ON in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process in Fig. 23, is set to ON. If the game state is in the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1602, and if the game state is not in the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, if the game state is in the low probability mode, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the win/loss information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b is a value corresponding to a jackpot win, based on the high probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(B)) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing in FIG. 27 described later. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the win/loss information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b is a value corresponding to a jackpot win, based on the low probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(A)) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing in FIG. 27 described later.

In steps S1602 and S1603, the hit/miss judgment is performed based on the high probability mode hit/miss table or the low probability mode hit/miss table saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described below. However, in steps S1602 and S1603, the setting value saved in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27 described below may be read, and the high probability mode hit/miss table or the low probability mode hit/miss table corresponding to that setting value may be selected one by one to perform the hit/miss judgment.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal big win, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal big win variation table (see FIG. 15(A)). Also, when the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a sure-win, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the sure-win variation table (see FIG. 15(B)). Furthermore, when the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a miss, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the miss variation table (see FIG. 15(C)).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the big win lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604 in the RAM 412. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 executes the pattern variation display by the pattern display unit 341 based on the variation pattern command.

As described above, when the lottery result is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412, as a variation pattern command, any one of "A01" to "A03" obtained by adding "A" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. When the lottery result is a "5R sure-change jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412, as a variation pattern command, any one of "B01" to "B03" obtained by adding "B" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R sure-change jackpot. When the lottery result is a "16R sure-change jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412, as a variation pattern command, any one of "C01" to "C03" obtained by adding "C" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 16R sure-change jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 sets one of the variation patterns "01" to "08" with the letter "D" added to indicate a miss, "D01" to "D08," as a variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 includes information in the variation pattern command as to whether the result is a near miss, a near miss other than near miss, or a complete miss.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the variable pattern display on the main display unit 36 and ends the variable start process. When the MPU 41 starts the variable pattern display on the main display unit 36, it sets a variable display flag to ON. This variable display flag is referenced in step S1402 in the variable game control process of FIG. 24 to determine whether the main display unit 36 is displaying a variable pattern. When the MPU 41 starts the variable pattern display on the main display unit 36, it adds 1 to the "accumulated number of jackpot lottery draws" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, when the result of the win/loss judgment based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S1603 is a miss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "consecutive number of misses" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and when the win/loss result is a jackpot, it clears the "consecutive number of misses" to 0.

[Setting value change process]
Fig. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value change process executed in step S1307 of the main process in Fig. 23. The setting value change process will be described below with reference to Fig. 27.

<Step S1701>
As shown in Fig. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the pattern variation display is in progress, and if the pattern variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes), the setting value change process is terminated, and if the pattern variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the pattern variation display is in progress is judged based on the variation display in progress flag that is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process in Fig. 26.

<Step S1702>
If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state (step S1702), and if the game is in a jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the setting value change process is terminated, and if the game is not in a jackpot game state (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1703. For example, whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state is judged based on a jackpot game state flag that is set to ON in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
When neither the pattern change display nor the big win game state is in progress (steps S1701 and S1702 are No), the MPU 41 judges whether the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), i.e., whether the operation to turn on the setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46. That is, in this embodiment, when the pattern change display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or when the big win game state is in progress (step S1702: Yes), the setting value is not displayed and the setting value cannot be changed. Here, when the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1704, and when the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 (described later) (step S1704), and displays the number indicating the read setting value on the setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). This allows the current setting value to be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag, which indicates that the setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, to on (step S1706), and ends the setting value change process.

<Step S1707>
If the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The setting value display flag indicates that a setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to on in step S1706. If the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708, and if the setting value display flag is set to off (step S1707: No), i.e., if the setting value display unit 45 is turned off and the power supply is not turned on, the MPU 41 ends the setting value change process.

<Step S1708>
If the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether a rotation operation for changing a setting value has been performed. If the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1709, and if the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process (step S1709) to change the display on the set value display unit 45. For example, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right, the MPU 41 causes a number one larger than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation to be displayed, and conversely, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, the MPU 41 causes a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation to be displayed.

When the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "6", if the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed to "1", and when the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "1", if the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed to "6". Also, when the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is "6", it may be set so that it does not rotate further to the right, and when the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is "1", it may be set so that it does not rotate further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 as the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and ends the setting value change process. As a result, when the power of the setting value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as a valid setting value. Therefore, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. Then, the setting value can be confirmed by turning off the power of the setting value display unit 45 with the number corresponding to the desired setting value being displayed on the setting value display unit 45.

<Step S1711>
If the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, whether or not an operation to turn off the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been performed on the set value change operation unit 46. If the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1712, and if the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has not been switched from on to off (step S1711: No), the MPU 41 ends the set value change process. Note that if the power supply of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the power supply to the seven-segment display is cut off in the set value display unit 45, so that the numbers indicating the set value are turned off, and the set value is confirmed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 selects a low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(A)) and a high probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(B)) according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710, and stores them in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to off, and ends the setting value change process.

Here, in step S1712, a low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(A)) and a high probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 14(B)) are selected according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412. In other words, a win/lose table with the same setting values is selected for the low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table, so the setting values can be easily changed. However, it is also possible to make it possible to change the setting values for the low probability mode and the high probability mode individually. In this case, it becomes possible to set different levels (numerical values) of setting values for the low probability mode and the high probability mode, for example, setting the setting value for the low probability mode to "1" and the setting value for the high probability mode to "6".

[Performance information update process]
Here, Fig. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 in the main process of Fig. 23. Fig. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of Fig. 28. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to Figs. 28 and 29.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
28, the MPU 41 reads the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and judges whether the read number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1802). If the number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1805, and if the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
If the number of out balls does not reach 60,000 (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads out the number of balls paid out from the general winning port and the number of balls paid out from the first winning port for the base calculation of the base information (step S1808). Then, the MPU 51 calculates the current base BL based on the number of out balls for the base calculation of the base information read in step S1801 and the number of balls paid out from the general winning port and the number of balls paid out from the first winning port for the base calculation of the base information read in step S1803, and overwrites and updates the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804) (see FIG. 29 (A)). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 x (number of balls paid out from the general winning port + number of balls paid out from the first winning port) / number of out balls.

<Steps S1805 to S1808>
If the number of out balls reaches 60,000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1805 to S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(A) and FIG. 29(B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base (step S1805), shifts the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1806), and clears the current base BL to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of payout balls from the general winning port, the number of payout balls from the first winning port, and the number of out balls for base calculation stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S1808).

<Step S1809>
When the process of step S1804 or S1808 is completed, the MPU 51 reads various information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performances, updates the other specific performance information to the calculated values (step S1809), and terminates the specific performance information update process. The specific performances in this case are, for example, the number of unit jackpot lottery draws, the consecutive role ratio, the role ratio, etc.

[Display control process of performance display monitor]
30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process of Fig. 23. The display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to Figs. 30 to 33.

<Step S1901>
As shown in Fig. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in Fig. 33. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 in Fig. 31, and if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31 described later. If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1917 of FIG. 32, and if the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 before last, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32 described later. If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 of FIG. 33, and if the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from OFF to ON (step S1904: No), the MPU 41 ends the display control process.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Fig. 29(A), "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in Fig. 29(B), "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1906), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in Fig. 31, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 in Fig. 30 (step S1908), and judges whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1910, and when the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1910) and displays the previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29(A), "8.", "1", "3", and "3" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29(B), "8.", "1", "2", and "9" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to on (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter to display the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the display control process is terminated. Note that if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the seven-segment displays 431 to 434, and the alphabet and numbers indicating the current base BL are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1915), clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1916), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), as shown in Fig. 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 in Fig. 31 (step S1917), and judges whether the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1919) and displays the 60,000 balls base B2 from the previous round included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1920). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29(A), "8.", "2", "3", "2" indicating that the 60,000 balls base B2 from the previous round is 32% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29(B), "8.", "2", "3", "3" indicating that the 60,000 balls base B2 from the previous round is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to on (step S1921), sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to a certain period of time for which the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1922), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the display control process is terminated. Note that if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the alphabet and numbers indicating the previous 60,000 ball base B1 are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1924), clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1925), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), as shown in Fig. 33, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of Fig. 32 (step S1926), and determines whether the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927). If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1928, and if the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928) and displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Fig. 29(A), "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in Fig. 29(B), "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and ends the display control process.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the display control process is terminated. Note that if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the alphabet and numbers indicating the 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous time are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1933), clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1934), and terminates the display control process.

[Processing of voice and lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to Figures 34 to 47.

In addition, in another embodiment, some or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In addition, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, start-up processing when the voice lamp control device 5 is started, and NMI interrupt processing during a power outage, but a description of these processes will be omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
34 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a cycle of 1 msec, for example.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 executes a display order setting process (step S2000), a counter update process (step S2001), a command determination process (step S2002), a variable game presentation process (step S2003), a big win game presentation process (step S2004), and a setting value suggestion process (step S2005).

[Display order setting process]
In the display sequence setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 determines and stores (sets) the sequence of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period, with reference to the game setting value (setting value) set to define the probability of a big win in the gaming machine 10. In this embodiment, the setting value suggestion process is executed in the big win game in the predetermined period, so that five numbers for specifying a plurality (five) game setting values (non-setting values) other than the setting value are displayed in a predetermined sequence on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, in the display sequence setting process, the sequence of displaying the five numbers specifying the plurality of non-setting values on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set. Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display sequence setting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a number display sequence determination table referred to in the display sequence setting process of FIG. 35. Details of the display sequence setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 35 and FIG. 36.

<Step S2011>
As shown in FIG. 35, in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 judges whether the display order setting flag is set to ON (step S2011). The display order setting flag is a flag indicating that the setting of the display order of the numbers specifying the non-set value in the jackpot game for a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to ON in step S2016 of the display order setting process. In addition, the display order setting flag is initially set to OFF when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, when the sub timer interruption process is executed by allowing the sub timer interruption process by the start-up process of the sound lamp control device, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period is set (steps S2014 to S2016 described later). That is, in the gaming machine 10, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period is set when the power is turned on.

Incidentally, the power to the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before the gaming hall opens. Therefore, the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

If the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2012; if the display order setting flag is off (step S2011: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2014.

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
When the display sequence setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the set value change flag is set to on (step S2012). The set value change flag is a flag indicating that the game set value (set value) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 has been changed, and is set to on in step S2121 in the command determination process in FIG. 37 described later. When the set value change flag is on (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the set value change flag to off (step S2013) and then shifts the process to step S2014. That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the set value is changed, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period is set. In this way, when the set value is changed, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set, so that the display order of the numbers can be determined according to the set value, and therefore, the presentation of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, if the setting value change flag is off (step S2012: NO), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2014 to S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 acquires a setting value from the RAM 512, and further refers to the setting value and a number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) to set the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2015). Here, FIG. 36(A) is a diagram showing an example of the number display order determination table, and FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the display order described in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36(A) and the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), in the number display sequence determination table, the display sequence of numbers is determined by a random number value selected for each game setting value 1 to 6 (setting value 1 to 6) that is set to determine the probability of a big win in the gaming machine 10. There are 120 random numbers selected from 0 to 119, and one display sequence is associated with each random number value, and the selection probability of each display sequence is the same. The display sequences include display sequences A1 to A120 selected for setting value 1, display sequences B1 to B120 selected for setting value 2, display sequences C1 to C120 selected for setting value 3, display sequences D1 to D120 selected for setting value 4, display sequences E1 to E120 selected for setting value 5, and display sequences F1 to F120 selected for setting value 6, and 120 display sequences corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating non-setting values are set for each setting value 1 to 6.

The display sequence A1 to A120 selected when the setting value is 1 specifies the order in which the five numbers "2" to "6" that specify the game setting values (non-setting values) 2 to 6 other than the number "1" that specifies the setting value 1 are displayed (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when the setting value is 1 and one of the display sequences A1 to A120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "1" that specifies the setting value 1 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences B1 to B120 selected when the set value is 2 stipulate the order in which the set values "1," "3" to "6," and the five numbers "2" to "6" specifying the set values 2 to 6 are displayed other than the number "2" that specifies the set value 2 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when the set value is 2 and one of the display sequences B1 to B120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "2" specifying the set value 2 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences C1 to C120 selected when the setting value is 3 stipulate the order in which the five numbers "1," "2," and "4" to "6" that specify the setting values 1, 2, and 4 to 6 are displayed, other than the number "3" that specifies the setting value 1 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences C1 to C120 is selected because the setting value is 3, the number "3" that specifies the setting value 3 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences D1 to D120 selected when the setting value is 4 stipulate the order in which the five numbers "1" to "3", "5", and "6" specifying the setting values 1 to 3, 5, and 6 are displayed, other than the number "4" specifying the setting value 4 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences D1 to D120 is selected because the setting value is 4, the number "4" specifying the setting value 4 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences E1 to E120 selected when the set value is 5 stipulate the order in which the set values 1 to 4 and the five numbers "1" to "4" and "6" specifying the set value 6 are displayed, other than the number "5" specifying the set value 5 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences E1 to E120 is selected because the set value is 5, the number "5" specifying the set value 5 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences F1 to F120 selected when the set value is 6 stipulate the order in which the five numbers "1" to "5" specifying the set values 1 to 5 are displayed, other than the number "6" specifying the set value 6 (see FIG. 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences F1 to F120 is selected because the set value is 6, the number "6" specifying the set value 6 is not displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

When the order of the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 has been set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display order setting flag to OFF (step S2016) and ends the display order setting process. That is, when the power is turned on (step S2011: No) and when the setting value is changed (step S2013: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the order of the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 according to the game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6) that are set to determine the probability of a jackpot on the gaming machine 10.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table when the power is turned on, and after the power is turned on, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table by changing the setting value. This makes it possible to display numbers (non-set values) on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a specified order for a specified period when a specified condition (e.g., power-on or setting change) is met. In gaming halls, the power of the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before opening, so the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

In the display sequence setting process of this embodiment, the display sequence of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the gaming machine 10 is powered on and when the setting value is changed, but the display sequence of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 may be set when other conditions (predetermined conditions) are met. The predetermined conditions in this case will be described in the third embodiment described later, and examples of the predetermined conditions include the start of a predetermined period, the start of a jackpot game, and the start of an open/close execution mode for a jackpot game. Even when the display sequence of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set due to the establishment of these predetermined conditions, the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is prevented from being fixed, so that the same information is prevented from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 is prevented from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the number display sequence determination table shown in FIG. 36(A), the probability that all number display sequences are selected is the same for the same set value, but the probability that the number display sequence is selected does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the number display sequence determination table may be set so that the probability that at least some number display sequences are selected is different from other number display sequences for the same set value. That is, it is possible to make a specific display sequence easier to select and, conversely, to make a specific display sequence harder to select. If the probability that at least some number display sequences are selected according to the set value is set to be different from other number display sequences, it is also possible to make a specific number display sequence easier to select and, conversely, to make a specific number display sequence harder to select according to the set value. That is, unlike the case where the probability that all number display sequences are selected is the same, it is also possible to make it easier to identify a specific non-set value and, conversely, to make it harder to identify a specific non-set value. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of a high set value and the likelihood of a low set value. Specifically, for example, when the set value is a low set value (for example, set value 2 or less), the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to high set values (for example, set value 5 or more) may be delayed. In this case, by leaving the possibility of the low set value being a high set value until the end, the player is made to have expectations of the high set value, while preventing the player from identifying the low set value early. This prevents the game on the gaming machine 10 from ending early while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game, and can suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine 10. Conversely, when the set value is a high set value (for example, set value 5 or more), the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to low set values (for example, set value 2 or less) may be delayed. In this case, the numbers corresponding to the high set value and the numbers corresponding to the low set value are not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 until just before the set value is identified as a high set value, and the possibility of the low set value remains until just before the player grasps that the high set value. This allows the player to focus on whether the setting is a high setting that is advantageous to the player, or a low setting that is disadvantageous to the player, and enjoy the thrill of the moment right before realizing that the setting is a high setting. In addition, regardless of the setting value, it is also possible to make it easier to select the display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest game setting value among the non-setting values, for example, the slowest display order. In this case, since the number indicating the non-setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, the possibility of the most disadvantageous non-setting value for the player and a non-setting value that is more advantageous to the player remains until the last number is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to realize that the game setting value (jackpot probability) is the most disadvantageous to the player, and therefore it is possible to prevent early termination of play on the gaming machine 10 and to prevent a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

It is also possible to set the number display order so that numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to high settings and numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to low settings are displayed later in the number display order. For example, it is possible to set a number display order so that at least one of "1" and "2" corresponding to low settings and at least one of "5" and "6" corresponding to high settings are displayed later in the number display order. Even in this case, until the player grasps the setting value, there is a possibility that the setting value is a high setting value that is advantageous to the player, and a possibility that the setting value is a low setting value that is disadvantageous to the player, so the player can enjoy the thrill of wondering whether the setting value is a high setting value or a low setting value until the player grasps the setting value.

In addition, except when the set value is the highest set value (set value 6), it is possible to set the number display order so that the display order of numbers corresponding to non-set values higher than the set value is delayed. For example, it is possible to set the selection rate of a lower display order higher than the number indicating a non-set value with a higher probability of favorable judgment than the set value than the number indicating a non-set value with a lower probability of favorable judgment than the set value. By delaying the display order of numbers indicating non-set values higher than the set value in this way, it is possible to make the player expect that the set value is higher than the actual set value until just before the set value is grasped. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while expecting that the set value is high until just before the set value is grasped. Conversely, it is possible to set the number display order so that the display order of numbers corresponding to non-set values lower than the set value is delayed, except when the set value is the lowest set value (set value 1). For example, it is possible to set the selection rate of a lower display order higher than the number indicating a non-set value with a lower probability of favorable judgment than the set value. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values lower than the set value in this way, the numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to game set values lower than the set value are left as hidden numbers just before the set value is grasped. This makes the final candidates for the set value the actual set value and a game set value (non-set value) lower than that set value. As a result, the game set value that is more advantageous to the player is ultimately grasped as the set value, improving the enjoyment when the set value is grasped.

It is also conceivable to set the number display order so that a later display order of numbers corresponding to high setting values (e.g., setting value 5 or more) is more likely to be selected, regardless of the setting value. Conversely, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that a later display order of numbers corresponding to low setting values (e.g., setting value 2 or less) is more likely to be selected. In this way, by displaying numbers corresponding to low setting values earlier and numbers corresponding to high setting values later, higher setting values are displayed later. This makes it possible to make the player expect that the setting value is likely to be a high setting value that is advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the setting value, and thus allows the player to enjoy guessing non-setting values (setting values) while hoping that the setting value may be high.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 executes updates of the first stop symbol type counter, the performance pattern type counter, the variable display counter, etc. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the performance type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Also, the performance pattern type counter is used to determine the performance type (performance pattern) based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. Meanwhile, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variable display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the pattern display unit 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the change display counter, it is possible to know the remaining change display time, whether a change is occurring, whether the change display of the pattern display section 341 has ended, and so on.

[Command Judgment Process]
In the command determination process (step S2002), the command received from the main control unit 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2002 in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 34.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2101, the MPU 51 judges whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, if the MPU 51 has received a command (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2101: No), the command judgment process ends. The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in an unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 judges whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. Note that, if it is judged in step S2101 that the command has been received and is to be processed, the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is erased from the unprocessed command storage area and stored in, for example, a processing work storage area.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a variation pattern command. If the command is a variation pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2103. If the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2102: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern (the combination of stop symbols of the decorative symbols and the presentation type (presentation pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 38(A)), the variation type table (see FIG. 38(B)), and the presentation type table (see FIG. 39(A) to FIG. 39(C)) stored in advance in the ROM 511, and the value of the presentation type counter stored in the RAM 512. Also, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R variable probability jackpot, sets the 5R variable probability jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R variable probability jackpot, and sets the 16R variable probability jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 16R variable probability jackpot.

The decorative symbol stopping pattern combination consists of a first stopping pattern, a second stopping pattern, and a final stopping pattern. The first stopping pattern is the first decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the second stopping pattern is the second decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the final stopping pattern is the last symbol to be stopped and displayed. The effect type table includes a normal reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to a normal reach (see FIG. 39(A)), a super reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to a super reach (see FIG. 39(B)), and a special reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to a special reach (see FIG. 39(C)).

Here, FIG. 38(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 38(A), the first stop symbol selection table prescribes the decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed in the symbol display section 341. Note that FIG. 38(A) is based on the premise that the decorative symbols are "1" to "9", "333" is a symbol combination indicating a sure chance jackpot (either a 5R sure chance jackpot or a 16R sure chance jackpot), "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 16R sure chance jackpot, and any other repeat number besides "333" and "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R sure chance jackpot, or a 16R sure chance jackpot.

When the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", there is no allocation of "3" and "7" as the first stopping symbol, and the first stopping symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than "3" and "7". In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combinations "333" or "777", which indicate a 5R special jackpot or a 16R special jackpot (special jackpot), will not be displayed.

In addition, when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," there is no allocation of "7" as the first stopping symbol, and the first stopping symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than "7." In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," the symbol combination "777," which indicates a 16R special jackpot, will not be displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R special jackpot, may be displayed. In other words, even when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R normal jackpot, may be displayed as a decorative symbol. Then, when the lottery result is a "5R probability jackpot," if a decorative symbol other than "3" and not "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 5R probability jackpot promotion effect in the jackpot game, indicating that the jackpot is a 5R probability jackpot.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", all the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", a symbol combination with a repeat number other than the symbol combination "777" indicating a 16R jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", a symbol combination with a repeat number other than the symbol combination "777" indicating a 5R jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot may be stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol stop display result. And, when the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", if "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R jackpot promotion effect that clearly indicates a 16R jackpot in the jackpot game.

Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop pattern if the lottery result is a jackpot, it determines the second and final stop patterns to be the same as the first stop pattern that was previously determined. This determines the combination of stop patterns that will be displayed on the pay line of the pattern display unit 341 in that game round.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is a "miss", all of the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a "miss", it determines the second stop symbol based on the miss type selected based on the miss type table (Fig. 14 (D)) and the first stop symbol previously determined. For example, when the miss type is a front/rear miss reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before or after the first stop symbol. Also, when the miss type is a reach other than a front/rear miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be a different symbol from the first stop symbol and the symbol before or after the first stop symbol. Also, if the miss type is a complete miss, the second stop pattern is determined to be a pattern different from the first stop pattern, and the final stop pattern is determined regardless of the first stop pattern and the second stop pattern. The stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns may be determined by the display control device 6, or only the first stop pattern may be determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop pattern and the final stop pattern may be determined by the display control device 6.

Also, FIG. 38(B) is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 38(B), in the variation type table, the variation display time and the content of the variation type (presentation pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command are determined. For example, the variation pattern command "A01" in which the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the variation pattern is "01" is associated with the variation display time "30 s" and the variation type "normal reach presentation pattern". Also, the variation pattern command "B02" in which the lottery result is "5R certain jackpot" and the variation pattern is "02" is associated with the variation display time "60 s" and the variation type "super reach presentation pattern", and the variation pattern command "C03" in which the lottery result is "16R certain jackpot" and the variation pattern is "03" is associated with the variation display time "90 s" and the variation type "special reach presentation pattern". Furthermore, the variation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "miss" and the variation pattern is "04" is associated with a variation display time of "7 s" and a variation type of "non-reach presentation pattern," and the variation pattern command "D05" in which the lottery result is "miss" and the variation pattern is "05" is associated with a variation display time of "10 s" and a variation type of "non-reach presentation pattern."

Furthermore, Figures 39(A) to 39(C) are diagrams showing an example of a presentation pattern type selection table. The presentation pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (presentation pattern). Specifically, Figure 39(A) is a normal reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a normal reach presentation, Figure 39(B) is a super reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a super reach presentation, and Figure 39(C) is a special reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a special reach presentation.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which there are five types of performance types corresponding to each variation type, but there may be six or more types of performance types. Also, in Figure 39, the performance type table for when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(A), "presentation pattern X1" to "presentation pattern X5" are set as presentation pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R special jackpot, 16R special jackpot, and miss). Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (presentation pattern) is a normal reach presentation pattern, it selects the presentation pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter from the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, presentation pattern X1 to presentation pattern X3 included in the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table are presentations in which, for example, a normal reach presentation is executed in which the decorative pattern reaches a reach state after the end of a high-speed variation presentation in which the decorative pattern changes at high speed, and the final individual presentation type is a normal reach presentation.

In addition, in the super reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(B), "performance pattern Y1" to "performance pattern Y5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a super reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the super reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach performance pattern type selection table are, for example, performances in which a normal reach performance is executed after the end of a high-speed variation performance, and further develops into a super reach performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a normal reach performance and a longer performance execution time than a normal reach performance as the final individual performance type. Note that the super reach performance pattern type selection table may include a super reach performance pattern performance that develops into a super reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance without going through a normal reach performance.

In addition, in the special reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(C), "performance pattern Z1" to "performance pattern Z5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the special reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach performance pattern type selection table are performances in which, for example, a normal reach performance and a super reach performance are executed after the end of a high-speed variation performance, and further, as the final individual performance type, it develops into a special reach performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal reach performance or the super reach performance and has a longer performance execution time than the normal reach performance. Note that the special reach performance pattern type selection table may include a special reach performance pattern that develops into a special reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance or a normal reach performance, without going through at least one of the normal reach performance and the super reach performance.

Then, the MPU 51 sets in the RAM 512 a display variation pattern command indicating the stop pattern combination of decorative patterns determined based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the performance type table, and the performance type counter, and the variation type (performance pattern type).

<Step S2104>
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the variable pattern command. The variable display counter is then decremented by one in the counter update process of step S2001 in the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 34, and the MPU 51 can determine whether or not the pattern variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, and the like, based on the variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variable display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for identifying the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 and the content of the variation type (presentation pattern type) to the display control device 6, and ends the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns and the variation type (presentation pattern type) determined in step S2103. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and the presentation image of the decorative patterns corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the presentation display in the pattern display section 341 according to the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns, the variation type, and the presentation type corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., three) until a preset variable display time has elapsed, and causes the multiple decorative symbols to stop varying in sequence. During the variable display of the decorative symbols, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (performance pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc.

When the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets the variable play performance flag to ON. This variable play performance flag is a flag that indicates that a variable play performance is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating the start of a jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 at the start of a jackpot game as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2107, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game presentation determination process (step S2107). The jackpot game presentation determination process is a process for determining presentations to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the like when the game state transitions to a jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines an opening presentation, an ending presentation, and an opening/closing execution mode presentation to be executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the big win game presentation start flag to ON and ends the command determination process. The big win game presentation start flag is a flag for starting a big win game presentation (opening presentation), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening presentation start process in the big win game presentation process in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating the start of a round game in the open/close execution mode, and is set when a round game is started in the big win game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is a round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2110, and if the received command is not a round game start command (step S2109: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game presentation start flag to ON (step S2310) and ends the command determination process. The round game start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the round game presentation in the big win game presentation in step S2004 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open/close execution mode is to be ended, and is set when the round game is to be ended in the big win game control process in step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is a round game end command (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2112, and if the received command is not a round game end command (step S2111: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game presentation end flag to ON (step S2312) and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game presentation in the big win game presentation in step S2004 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a special out ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kleun device 37, and is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 20. Here, if the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2114, and if the received command is not a special out ball detection command (step S2113: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out ball detection flag to ON and ends the command determination process. The special out ball detection flag is referred to when determining whether or not to increment the value of the special out ball counter in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process in FIG. 40, which will be described later.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating the start of an ending in a big win game, and is set in the big win game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2116, and if the received command is not an ending start command (step S2115: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending performance start flag to ON and ends the command determination process. The ending performance start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the ending performance process in the big win game performance process in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 34. The ending performance start flag is also referenced when determining whether or not to move the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position in step S2201 in the setting value suggestion process of Fig. 40.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2118, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the big win game presentation end flag to ON and ends the command judgment process. The big win game presentation end flag is a flag that ends the big win game presentation (ending presentation), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending presentation end process in the big win game presentation process in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 34. The big win game presentation end flag is also referred to when determining whether or not to turn off the lit segments in the 7 segment display unit 39 in step S2301 in the 7 segment display unit control process of Fig. 41.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a setting value change command. The setting value change command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the setting value change process of Fig. 27. Here, if the received command is a setting value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2120, and if the received command is not a setting value change command (step S2119: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed setting value included in the setting value change command, stores the changed setting value, and ends the command judgment process. The setting value stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2014 of the display sequence setting process in FIG. 35 and is referenced to determine the display sequence of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination processing.

[Variable game performance processing]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 34, in the variable game presentation processing (step S2003) of the sub-timer interrupt processing, in a variable game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery, when a variable pattern command is received, a variable game presentation in accordance with the presentation pattern determined in step S2103 of the command determination processing of Figure 37 is executed by the pattern display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc.

[Big Win Game Presentation Processing]
In the big win game presentation process (step S2004) of the sub timer interruption process, the opening presentation, the ending presentation, and the opening/closing execution mode presentation determined in the big win game presentation determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process of Fig. 37 are executed. In the ending presentation, in this embodiment, an ending additional image showing the display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Fig. 47).

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the setting value suggestion process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the up and down movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display portion 39 is controlled. Furthermore, in the setting value suggestion process, a process is executed in which an ending additional image showing the display result on the seven-segment display portion 39 in the big win game is displayed on the symbol display portion 341 as an ending presentation of the big win game. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in Fig. 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the ending performance start flag is set to ON. The ending performance start flag is a flag for starting an ending performance, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command judgment process of Fig. 37. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing for starting an ending performance based on the ending performance start flag. Here, if the ending performance start flag is ON (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2202, and if the ending performance start flag is OFF (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2206.

<Step S2202>
When the ending performance start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 down from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 down from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at the timing of starting the ending performance. As a result, if a game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38, the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382. At this time, the special out ball sensor 384 detects the game ball 99 being moved from the retention lane 381 to the discharge lane 382.

<Steps S2203 to S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is lowered from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 sets a stopper portion lowering flag indicating that the stopper portion 383 is lowering to ON (step S2203). The stopper portion lowering flag is referred to in step S2206 to determine whether or not it is the timing when the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Then, the MPU 51 sets a lowering time counter corresponding to the time until the stopper portion 383 is returned to the upper limit position (step S2204), and further sets the ending performance start flag to OFF (step S2205), and ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S2206>
When the ending performance start flag is OFF (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the stopper unit lowering flag, which is set ON in step S2203, is set ON (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is a timing when the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Here, when the stopper unit lowering flag is ON (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2207, and when the stopper unit lowering flag is OFF (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2216.

<Step S2207>
When the stopper part lowering flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the special out ball detection flag is set to on (step S2207). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that the special out ball sensor 384 has detected a game ball, and is set to on in step S2114 in the command judgment process of Fig. 37. Here, when the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2208, and when the special out ball detection flag is off (step S2207: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208) and sets the special out ball detection flag to off (step S2209). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when the special out balls that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37 in the opening and closing execution mode of the big win game are retained in the game ball retention section 38. The number of special out balls counted in this way is referred to in order to control the lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control process in FIG. 41 described later.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the downward movement time counter set in step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 judges whether the value of the downward movement time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether it is the timing to return the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38, which is at the lower limit position, to the upper limit position.

Whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position may be determined based on whether or not a special out ball has not been detected for a certain period of time, i.e., whether or not the special out ball detection flag has been off for a certain number of times in succession. If the condition for returning the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position is that a special out ball has not been detected for a certain period of time, then even if there are a large number of special out balls, the special out balls can be counted accurately.

If the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2212. If the value of the downward movement time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
If the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 up from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and sets the stopper portion downward movement flag, which is set to ON in step S2203, to OFF (step S2213). This causes the game ball retention portion 38 to return to a state in which the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381.

<Step S2214>
In step S2214, the MPU 51 executes a seven-segment display control process for controlling the on/off state of the seven-segment display unit 39. That is, for each big win game, at the ending of the big win game after a specific period has elapsed, the MPU 51 executes a seven-segment display control process for controlling the on/off state of the seven-segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device during the opening/closing execution mode of the big win game. Details of the seven-segment display control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes an ending additional image control process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to display an additional image corresponding to the on/off state of the seven-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the big win game. This ending additional image control process makes it possible to confirm the on/off state of the seven-segment display unit 39 also on the symbol display unit 341. Details of the seven-segment display unit control process will be described later with reference to Figs. 46 and 47.

<Step S2216>
When the stopper part moving flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the big win game presentation end flag is set to on (step S2216). The big win game presentation end flag is a flag that ends the big win game presentation, and is set to on in step S2118 in the command judgment process of FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing to end the big win game presentation (ending presentation) by the big win game presentation end flag. Here, when the big win game presentation end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2217, and when the big win game presentation end flag is off (step S2216: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S2217>
If the jackpot game presentation end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the lit segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2217). That is, when the jackpot game presentation ends, the MPU 51 turns off all the segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39. In other words, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 can be lit only during the ending of the jackpot game.

Here, the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 display all or part of the numbers corresponding to game setting values (non-set values) other than the game setting values (set values) that determine the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery on the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot. Therefore, the player can obtain information for identifying or guessing the non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game each time the jackpot game is played. This allows the player to identify or guess the non-set value each time the jackpot game is played, and therefore the player can enjoy identifying or guessing the non-set value in the jackpot game. In addition, by obtaining information for identifying or guessing the non-set value for each jackpot game, when the number of jackpot games increases, for example, when the number of consecutive jackpot games increases, it becomes possible to grasp all (five) non-set values, and in that case, it becomes possible to grasp the set values. In other words, the player can grasp the set value based on the identified non-set value, and therefore it becomes possible to guess the set value in the jackpot game, which increases the interest in the game.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game presentation end flag to OFF (step S2218). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot type flag (5R variable jackpot flag, 16R variable jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag) to OFF (step S2219), and ends the setting value suggestion presentation.

[7-segment display control process]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in step S2214 of the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Step S2301 and Step S2302>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the 7-segment display control process, the MPU 51 first obtains the value of the special out ball counter stored in the RAM 512 by being added in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 (step S2301), and judges whether the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302). The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that have won the variable winning hole 316 and entered the special out ball hole 373 of the Kroon device 37 in the opening and closing execution mode of the big win. If the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2303, and if the value of the special out ball counter is not 1 or more, that is, 0 (step S2302: No), the 7-segment display control process is terminated since it is not necessary to light any of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Steps S2303 to S2307>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 reads out the segment display control information from the 7-segment display control information storage area (see FIG. 42(A)) set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display control information is information necessary for controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (a period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37). Then, the MPU 51 determines the control content for the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display control information read out from the 7-segment display control information storage area in step S2303 (step S2304), and executes the control of the 7-segment display unit 39 based on this control content (step S2305). Details of the determination and control of the control content for the 7-segment display unit 39 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. Furthermore, the MPU 51 updates the already displayed information storage area (see FIG. 42 (A)) of the 7-segment display unit control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306), clears the value of the special out ball counter (step S2307), and terminates the 7-segment display unit control processing.

Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the 7-segment display control information storage area set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, FIG. 42(A) is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display control information storage area, FIG. 42(B) is a diagram showing an example of the control order storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area, and FIG. 42(C) is a diagram showing an example of the initial state (unupdated) of the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 42(A), the 7-segment display control information storage area includes a control order storage area shown in FIG. 42(B) and a previously displayed information storage area shown in FIG. 42(C).

As shown in FIG. 42(B), the control sequence memory area is an area that stores the order of numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (the period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is accumulated), and the control target order of segments A to G when displaying each number. This control sequence memory area includes a number display sequence memory area and a segment control sequence memory area.

The number display sequence memory area stores the sequence of numbers (number display sequence) to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (for example, from the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot in a low probability mode to the end of an open/close execution mode for a jackpot game for a normal jackpot). The number display sequence is determined in the display sequence setting process of FIG. 35 described above based on the number display sequence determination table (see FIG. 36) set for a set value that specifies the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In the number display sequence memory area of the example shown in FIG. 42 (B), the display sequence A1 is set based on the number display sequence determination table for the set value 1 in the above-mentioned number display sequence setting process, and "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" are stored as the display sequence of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. In other words, unless the setting is changed during the business hours of the game hall, a fixed sequence is determined as the number display sequence for each business day, and the number display sequence for a predetermined period during the same business day is fixed. In this way, since the number display order is fixed during a predetermined period on the business day, the numbers are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in the same order every time the predetermined period starts, so that numbers in the early number display order are easily displayed and numbers in the late number display order are difficult to display. For example, when the number display order is "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6", the numbers are displayed in this order, so that "2" and "3" are easily displayed, but "5" and "6" are difficult to display. This makes it possible to predict and specify the setting value while preventing the setting value from being easily specified, and allows players to enjoy predicting and specifying the setting value. In addition, since the number display order is fixed during the business day, numbers in the early number display order are easily displayed and numbers in the late number display order are difficult to display, for example, when the setting value is low (when the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent a player from recognizing that the setting is low with a small number of first wins. This prevents players from prematurely ending play on the gaming machine 10 they are playing, and helps prevent a decline in the operating rate of that gaming machine 10.

In addition, the more specific periods in a given period (the more consecutive jackpots), the more numbers are expected to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the more non-set values that can be identified among the multiple non-set values other than the set value. As a result, the more consecutive jackpots there are, the more information can be obtained to identify non-set values, and the set value candidates can be narrowed down. Then, by having 35 or more game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 in a given period, the player can identify all non-set values, and as a result, the set value can be recognized. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while aiming to identify all non-set values, that is, to recognize the set value, and can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the consecutive jackpots will continue (whether the jackpot type is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot), which increases the interest of the game.

The number display order is not limited to being fixed to the order set when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or the settings are changed, but may be determined when a jackpot game is started for a jackpot (first win) in low probability mode. In this way, the number display order is determined when a jackpot game such as a first win is started, so that the number display order is determined, for example, for each predetermined period. This makes it difficult for the player to guess the number display order, and therefore reduces the variation in the order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, it becomes possible to identify all non-set values with a small number of first wins, and it becomes possible to recognize the set values early. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that numbers not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 will be displayed, taking into account the numbers that have been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past, with the aim of identifying all non-set values and recognizing the set values.

Meanwhile, the segment control order storage area stores the control order (segment control order) of segments A to G when displaying numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39. The segment control order is fixed as follows: segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G. That is, the segment control order is not determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the settings are changed, or a jackpot is won, but is fixed as an order specific to the gaming machine 10. In this way, by fixing the segment control order as an order specific to the gaming machine 10, the player can grasp the control order of segments A to G when a number corresponding to a non-set value is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to grasp the number that is scheduled to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 even before the number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing numbers that have not been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 based on the control order of segments A to G, which increases the fun of the game.

The segment control order, like the number display order, is fixed for the same business day by being determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the setting value is changed, but it is also possible to determine it for each business day. In this case, it becomes more difficult to grasp numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 compared to when the segment control order is fixed as an order specific to the gaming machine 10. This increases the difficulty until all non-set values are identified and the set value is recognized, so that, for example, when the set value is low (when the probability of a jackpot in low probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent the player from prematurely recognizing that the setting is low. This prevents the player from prematurely ending play on the gaming machine 10 that he is playing.

The segment control order may also be determined when a jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode starts (when a specified period starts), as described in the third embodiment below.

As shown in FIG. 42(C), the already-displayed information storage area is an area that stores information about numbers that have already been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a specified period, numbers that are in the process of being displayed, and segments A to G that have already been targeted for control. This already-displayed information storage area stores already-displayed number flag information, currently-displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information.

The already-displayed number flag information is information about a flag indicating whether or not a number has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period. This already-displayed number flag information includes a number 1 already-displayed flag, a number 2 already-displayed flag, a number 3 already-displayed flag, a number 4 already-displayed flag, a number 5 already-displayed flag, and a number 6 already-displayed flag. The number 1 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When the number 1 already-displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period, and when the number 1 already-displayed flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 1 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period. The number 2 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When the number 2 already-displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period, and when the number 2 already-displayed flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 2 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period. The number 3 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 has been displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. When the number 3 already displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period, and when the number 3 already displayed flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 3 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. The number 4 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 has been displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. When the number 4 already displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period, and when the number 4 already displayed flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 4 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. The number 5 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game setting value 5 has been displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. When the number 5 already displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 5 has been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a specified period of time, and when the number 5 is set to off, it indicates that the number 5 has not been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a specified period of time. The number 6 already displayed flag is a flag that indicates whether the number 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 has been displayed as a non-set value on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a specified period of time. When the number 6 already displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 6 has been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a specified period of time, and when the number 6 is set to off, it indicates that the number 6 has not been displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 during a specified period of time.

The display target number flag information is a flag indicating whether or not a number is a display target number on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period. This display target number flag information includes a number 1 display target flag, a number 2 display target flag, a number 3 display target flag, a number 4 display target flag, a number 5 display target flag, and a number 6 display target flag. The number 1 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When the number 1 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 1 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when it is set to off, it indicates that the number 1 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 2 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When the number 2 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 2 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when it is set to off, it indicates that the number 2 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 3 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game set value 3 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When the number 3 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 3 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when the number 3 display target flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 3 is not a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 4 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game set value 4 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When the number 4 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 4 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when the number 4 display target flag is set to off, it indicates that the number 4 is not a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 5 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game set value 5 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When the number 5 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 5 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when the number 5 is set to off, it indicates that the number 5 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 6 display target flag is a flag that indicates whether the number 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When the number 6 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 6 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when the number 6 is set to off, it indicates that the number 6 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The already-targeted segment flag information is a flag indicating whether each of the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period. This already-targeted segment flag information includes a segment A already-targeted flag, a segment B already-targeted flag, a segment C already-targeted flag, a segment D already-targeted flag, a segment E already-targeted flag, a segment F already-targeted flag, and a segment G already-targeted flag. The segment A already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether the segment A of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period. When the segment A already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment A has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period, and when it is set to off, it indicates that the segment A is not a control target. The segment B already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether the segment B of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a specified period. When the segment B already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment B has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when the segment B is set to off, it indicates that the segment B is not a control target. The segment C already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment C of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When the segment C already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment C has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when the segment C is set to off, it indicates that the segment C is not a control target. The segment D already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment D of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When the segment D already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that the segment D has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period, and when the segment D is set to off, it indicates that the segment D is not a control target. The segment E already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment E of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. When the segment E already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that segment E has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when the flag is set to off, it indicates that segment E is not a control target. The segment F already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not segment F of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off during the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. When the segment F already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that segment F has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when the flag is set to off, it indicates that segment F is not a control target. The segment G already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not segment G of the seven-segment display unit 39 has become a control target for turning on and off during the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. When the segment G already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that segment G has become a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when the flag is set to off, it indicates that segment G is not a control target.

In the initial state, all flags included in the already displayed number flag information, the display target number flag information, and the already targeted segment flag information are set to off in the already displayed information storage area. Here, the initial state indicates a state outside the specified period, that is, a state at the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot (first jackpot) in low probability mode (the start of a specified period in which the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 is accumulated). In this embodiment, all flags included in the already displayed information storage area are set to off (cleared) in step S2405 in the ending additional image control process in FIG. 46 described later when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), that is, when it is a normal jackpot for which the end of the specified period is set.

Here, Figs. 43 to 45 are diagrams showing examples of control (display examples) of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the 7-segment display unit control information storage area, and examples of updating the already-displayed information storage area. Below, with reference to Figs. 43 to 45, examples of control (display examples) of the 7-segment display unit 39 and examples of updating the already-displayed information storage area in the 7-segment display unit control information storage area will be described.

As described above, in the seven-segment display control process of FIG. 41, the control content of the seven-segment display 39 is determined (step S2304), and the seven-segment display 39 is controlled at the ending of the big win game in accordance with the control content (step S2305). After that, each piece of flag information stored in the already-displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

The control contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 are determined according to the value of the special out ball counter (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period set for the big win game) acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process in FIG. 41. For example, when the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42 (C)), if the value of the special out ball counter is less than 7, some of the seven segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are subject to control for turning on and off. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period is 5), when the contents of the control sequence storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42 (C) (when all flags are set to off), the five segments A to E of the 7-segment display unit 39 are subject to control for turning on and off. When the contents of the control sequence memory area are as shown in FIG. 42(B), the number 2 is displayed first, so segment A is turned on, segment B is turned on, segment C is turned off, segment D is turned on, and segment E is turned on. As a result, the 7-segment display unit 39 changes from the fully turned off state (uncontrolled state) in which all segments A to G are turned off as shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state in which segments A, B, D, and E are turned on as shown in FIG. 43(B).

The change from the uncontrolled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B) may be made all at once, or may be made stepwise by turning on or off each of segments A through E in turn as the controlled objects. Furthermore, when turning on or off each of segments A through E in turn as the controlled objects, the segments A through E that are the controlled objects may be made to flash, for example, to clearly indicate that they are the controlled objects. Of course, it is not necessary to clearly indicate which segments are the controlled objects.

On the other hand, when the control of the seven-segment display unit 39 is terminated, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B), the already-displayed information storage area is updated from the initial state in which all flags shown in FIG. 42(C) are set to OFF to the contents shown in FIG. 43(C). Specifically, in the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), for the number 2 that is first displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, five segments A to E out of segments A to G are controlled, and segments F and G are not controlled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43(C), in the already-displayed number flag information, since none of the numbers 1 to 6 are displayed, all flags including the number 1 already-displayed flag, the number 2 already-displayed flag, the number 3 already-displayed flag, the number 4 already-displayed flag, the number 5 already-displayed flag, and the number 6 already-displayed flag are maintained as OFF. In addition, in the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag for the number 2, for which the five segments A to E are the control targets, is set to on. In addition, in the already displayed segment flag information, since segments A to E are the control targets, the segment A already targeted flag, segment B already targeted flag, segment C already targeted flag, segment D already targeted flag, and segment E already targeted flag for segments A to E are set to on.

Also, when the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)), if the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the seven-segment display control process in FIG. 41 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period set for the big win game) exceeds seven, at least one number (for example, 2) is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Krun device 37 during the specific period is 10), a total of ten segments A to G are subject to control on the seven-segment display unit 39. In other words, the seven (all) segments A to G are subject to control to be turned on and off on the seven-segment display unit 39, so that the first display order number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, and further, three segments A to C are subject to control to be turned on and off for the second display order number. Specifically, when the contents of the control sequence storage area are as shown in FIG. 42(B) and the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state as shown in FIG. 42(C) (when all flags are set to off), the number 2 is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 because the first number in the display order is 2, and then the number 3 is displayed. Therefore, the seven-segment display unit 39 changes from the uncontrolled state in which all segments A to G are turned off as shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segment control state in which segments A, B, D, E, and G are turned on and segments C and F are turned off as shown in FIG. 44(B) and the seven-segment display unit 39 displays the number 2, and further changes from the all-segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial segment control state in which segments A to C are controlled as shown in FIG. 44(C). In the example shown in FIG. 44(C), the second number to be displayed is 3, so segments A to C are turned on.

The change from the uncontrolled state shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B), and the change from the all-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(C) may be made all at once, or may be made stepwise by sequentially turning on or off segments A through G or segments A through C. Also, when sequentially turning on or off segments A through G or segments A through C, the segments being controlled may be made to flash to clearly indicate that they are being controlled. Of course, it is not necessary to clearly indicate the segments being controlled.

In addition, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 44(A), through the all-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B), to the partial-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(C), the already-displayed information storage area is updated from the initial state in which all flags are set to off shown in FIG. 42(C), through the contents shown in FIG. 45(A) and FIG. 45(B), to the contents finally shown in FIG. 45(C). Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 44(B), for the number 2 that is first displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, all segments A to E of the segments A to G are subject to control. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45(A), in the already-displayed segment flag information, all already-targeted flags for segments A to G are set to on. Then, when all the already-targeted flags for segments A to G are set to on, the control to display the number 2 is completed, so as shown in FIG. 45(B), in the already-displayed number flag information, the number 2 already-displayed flag is set to on, and in the currently-displayed number flag information, the currently-displayed number 2 flag is set to off while the currently-displayed number 3 flag is set to on. After that, in the already-displayed segment flag information, all the already-targeted flags for segments A to G are set to off. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45(C), in the already-displayed segment flag information, the segment A already-targeted flag, segment B already-targeted flag, and segment C already-targeted flag for segments A to C are set to on. In other words, every time all the already-targeted flags in the already-displayed segment flag information are set to on (every time the seven segments A to G are set to the control target), the already-displayed flag for the number that was the display target in the already-displayed number flag information is set to on, the display target flag for the number that was the display target in the currently-displayed number flag information is set to off, while the display target flag for the number that will be the next display target is set to on.

As described above, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled according to the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information, thereby displaying all or part of the numbers corresponding to game setting values (non-set values) other than the game setting values (set values) that determine the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery on the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot. This allows the player to identify or guess the non-set values based on the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39, and as a result, to recognize the set values.

Incidentally, some gaming machines, like gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, have multiple setting values with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery, and the setting value can be selected by the gaming hall. In this case, the gaming hall will want to set the setting value low in order to lower the expected value of balls dispensed. And when the setting value is set low, there is a tendency to prefer a gaming machine whose setting value is not known to players, in order to avoid players quitting play because they realize that the setting value is low.

On the other hand, players want gaming machines with set values to be able to guess (narrow down to multiple set values) or recognize the set values, so that they can play on gaming machines 10 with a higher expected value for ball payout. In this way, gaming halls and players tend to have conflicting expectations regarding gaming machines that suggest or clearly indicate game set values.

In contrast, in this embodiment, during a specific period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot open/close execution mode, among the game balls 99 that have entered the variable winning port 316, the game balls (special out balls) that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 are retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention section 38. Then, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 after the specific period has elapsed is counted, and the number of segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 corresponding to the count number are controlled. In other words, at least unless the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game is transitioned to a jackpot game, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are not controlled or lit. Therefore, the set value is not inferred or recognized unless the game is transitioned to a jackpot game.

In addition, it is difficult for the game balls 99 to enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the Krun device 37, and for example, one to two game balls 99 are expected to enter for one 16R jackpot game (about one for 10R of round game). Therefore, in one jackpot, it is difficult for the 7-segment display unit 39 to identify or guess the non-set value. On the other hand, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Krun device 37 during a predetermined period from the start of the jackpot game (opening) that is executed when the lottery result in the low probability mode becomes a jackpot to the end of the opening and closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game (the start of the ending). In other words, if the first hit is a sure-variable jackpot, the predetermined period will not end as long as the jackpot streak in the high probability mode continues, but will continue until the opening and closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends when a normal jackpot is won. That is, in this embodiment, the game has a feature that it is not easy to recognize the non-set value and therefore the set value, but the longer the consecutive big wins in the high probability mode continue, the more game balls 99 are expected to enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and the more accurately the non-set value (set value) can be guessed, and when 35 or more game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373 in a specified period, the non-set value (set value) can be reliably identified. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, information that allows the setting value to be guessed according to the number of specific conditions that are established in a specified period, that is, the number of game balls that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 in a specified period, is displayed, and in the case of a single big win, the expected value of the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball port 373 is low, so the game has a feature that makes it difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). On the other hand, in the case of consecutive big wins, if the number of consecutive wins is small, it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (setting value), but as the number of consecutive wins increases, the expected number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball port 373 increases, so the difficulty of guessing the non-set value (setting value) decreases. That is, in this embodiment, the setting value can be guessed by identifying or guessing some or all of the multiple non-set values by stacking all or part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. In this way, the gaming machine 10 meets the wishes of the store by suppressing the setting value from being easily identified or guessed (narrowed down), while also meeting the wishes of the player by enabling more accurate guessing of the non-set value (setting value) through consecutive big wins. This provides a gaming machine 10 that meets the wishes of both the store and the player.

In conventional slot machines, images suggesting or indicating the set value may be displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which game performance is performed. Images suggesting or indicating the set value are displayed, for example, on a jackpot confirmation screen, a jackpot start screen, a jackpot end screen, a start screen such as an ART or AT, a continuation screen, and an end screen, and the content of the displayed image is determined by lottery. Specifically, on an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, as a jackpot game end screen, in addition to a default screen that does not suggest or indicate the set value, a screen that suggests or indicates, with a certain probability, that the set value is equal to or higher than a specific set value (for example, equal to or higher than an intermediate set value (set value 4 to 6)), that the set value is high (for example, set value 5 or 6), that the set value is odd (for example, set value 1, 3, or 5), that the set value is even (for example, set value 2, 4, or 6), that the set value is not a specific set value (for example, the negation of set value 1), that the set value is the highest set value (for example, set value 6), etc. are presented.

However, in the case of suggesting or indicating a setting value in a conventional slot machine, the probability of presenting a default screen that does not suggest or indicate a setting value is set high, and the probability of presenting a screen that suggests or indicates a setting value is set low, so that the setting value cannot be easily identified or guessed. In particular, the probability of suggesting or indicating a setting value that is advantageous to the player, or indicating that a specific setting value is set low. In addition, the reliability of suggesting an odd setting value or an even setting value tends to be low, and for example, the reliability is often set to about 60%. Furthermore, in a slot machine, even if a high setting value is suggested or indicated, there is no suggestion or indication that denies a high setting value (e.g., setting value 5 or 6), and in particular no suggestion or indication that denies the highest setting value (e.g., setting value 6). In other words, in a slot machine, information that is disadvantageous to the player, such as denial of a high setting value, is not presented.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, as described above, information (non-set values) that allows the set value to be inferred is displayed as numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39 according to the number of specific conditions that are met in a specified period, i.e., the number of game balls that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 in a specified period. In other words, by displaying the numbers for the non-set values one by one on the seven-segment display unit 39, it is possible to identify or infer some of the non-set values, making it possible to infer the set value, and by displaying the numbers for all of the non-set values, all of the non-set values can be recognized, making it possible to identify the set value.

In this way, this embodiment is fundamentally different from slot machines and other gaming machines that suggest or clearly indicate a set value at a fixed rate, and allows the user to recognize a set value by identifying multiple non-set values based on the numbers displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. In addition, this embodiment clearly indicates or suggests a non-set value (set value) depending on the number of specific conditions (balls 99 entering the special out ball port 373) that are met during a jackpot game in a specified period of time, and in this respect it is also different from conventional gaming machines that suggest or clearly indicate a set value at a fixed rate. Furthermore, this embodiment is also different from slot machines and other gaming machines that suggest or clearly indicate a set value in the sense that the difficulty of identifying or guessing some or all of the multiple non-set values decreases as the number of consecutive jackpots increases.

In this embodiment, numerical information indicating multiple non-set values is presented depending on the number of specific conditions (game balls 99 entering the special out ball port 373) that are met during jackpot play in a specified period of time. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines, the frequency with which information for identifying the set value is presented does not decrease. Instead, as long as the specified period continues (as long as consecutive jackpots continue), the presentation of information for identifying the non-set value (set value) continues, making it even more fun to guess the set value, and increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied for the number of non-set values in a predetermined period, all non-set values can be identified. In other words, regardless of the high or low non-set values, all non-set values, including information disadvantageous to the player, are presented to the player. In this way, in this embodiment, unlike the case where a set value is suggested or clearly indicated in a conventional slot machine, even information disadvantageous to the player is presented so as to deny the highest set value, etc. As a result, the player can obtain not only advantageous information but also disadvantageous information as information for identifying or guessing the set value, and can determine whether or not to continue playing on the gaming machine 10 based on the disadvantageous information. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is considered that a number display order in which the display order of numbers corresponding to a high set value (for example, a set value of 5 or more) is delayed is set so that it is easy to select. Conversely, it is considered that a number display order in which the display order of numbers corresponding to a low set value (for example, a set value of 2 or less) is early is set so that it is easy to select. In this way, the display order of numbers corresponding to a low set value is early and the display order of numbers corresponding to a high set value is late, so that a higher set value is displayed later. This allows the player to anticipate the possibility that the set value will be a high value that is advantageous to the player until the player is aware of the set value, allowing the player to enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while hoping that the set value may be high.

[Ending additional image control processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ending additional image control process executed in step S2215 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 to S2403>
As shown in FIG. 46, in the ending additional image control process, in step S2401, the MPU 51 reads out various information in the already-displayed information storage area updated in step S2306 of FIG. 41, i.e., already-displayed number flag information, currently-displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information updated due to the passage of the current specific period, and determines an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the big win game based on this information (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image showing the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39, and is an image that can specify or estimate a non-set value (see FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C)). Then, the MPU 51 transmits an additional image display command to the display control device 6 to display the additional image determined in step S2402 on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending performance. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 displays an additional image on the symbol display unit 341 as an ending performance.

Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of screen transitions during the ending presentation of a jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A1) is an example of the screen of the pattern display section 341 during the first half of the ending of a sure-variant jackpot game, and FIG. 47 (A2) is an example of the screen of the pattern display section 341 during the first half of the ending of a normal jackpot game. Also, FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C) are example screens (example setting value suggestion screens) of the pattern display section 341 during the second half of the ending.

As shown in FIG. 47 (A1), in the ending of a special jackpot game, an image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the first half of the ending presentation to indicate that a high probability mode and high frequency support mode will be entered after the special jackpot game ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (B1), in the ending of a normal jackpot game, an image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the first half of the ending presentation to indicate that a low probability mode and low frequency support mode (time-saving mode) will be entered after the normal jackpot game ends. In addition, in the first half of the ending presentation, in addition to an image that indicates the game mode to be entered after the jackpot game ends, images that indicate the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of balls dispensed are displayed.

On the other hand, in the latter half of the ending performance of the big win game, an image including an additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control process in FIG. 46 is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as a result of the Kloon game using the Kloon device 37. As shown in FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2) and FIG. 47 (C), the additional image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and includes five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display unit 39 in which numbers corresponding to non-set values can be displayed. Specifically, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43 (A) to the display state shown in FIG. 43 (B), an additional image including an image imitating the display state on the 7-segment display unit 39 as shown in FIG. 47 (B1) is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the latter half of the ending performance. In addition, when the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 44(B) via FIG. 44(C), an additional image including a setting value suggestion image imitating the display state shown in FIG. 44(B) and a setting value suggestion image imitating the display state shown in FIG. 44(C) is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the latter half of the ending performance, as shown in FIG. 47(B2). Furthermore, when all five numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before the end of the predetermined period, an additional image including a setting value suggestion image imitating the state in which each number is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 as shown in FIG. 47(C) is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as the latter half of the ending performance. In the example shown in FIG. 47(C), an image is displayed indicating that the numbers "2" to "6" other than the number "1" are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. In this case, it is possible to specify that the non-set values are "2" to "6", and as a result, it is possible to recognize that the set value is "1".

In this way, in the ending performance of the jackpot game, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period is displayed as an additional image including five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display unit 39 in the second half part. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can check information about the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 up until that jackpot game. This allows the player to recognize the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 again even if the player does not know that information about non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the player misses the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39, or if the player has forgotten the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past during that predetermined period. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set values at the ending and recognize or guess the set values based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for each jackpot game.

In addition, whether or not to display an additional image showing the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period as the ending performance of a jackpot game on the pattern display unit 341 is a design matter, and it is also possible to not display an additional image on the pattern display unit 341 in the ending performance. In this way, if an additional image is not displayed in the ending performance, if there is a number that has been displayed in the past during the predetermined period, it becomes difficult to identify or guess the non-set value based on the number previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and even to guess or recognize the set value. In other words, by not displaying an additional image in the ending performance, it becomes more difficult to identify or guess the non-set value (set value), so that the set value of the gaming machine 10 is recognized early, and at least it is prevented from being recognized as not being a high set value. This makes it possible to prevent the game of the gaming machine 10 from ending early, and suppresses a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 46, in step S2404, the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot. Whether the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be judged based on whether the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. Then, if the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2305, and if the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: No), the MPU 51 ends the ending additional image control process.

<Step S2405>
If the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 initializes the already-displayed information storage area (sets all flags to OFF) and ends the ending additional image control process. That is, if the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of a predetermined period is set, the MPU 51 initializes the already-displayed information storage area.

As described above, in this embodiment, while the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed, in order to specify the non-set value (set value) or to increase the accuracy of the guess, it is necessary to have more game balls 99 enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kluen device 37 in a specified period, and the hurdle until the non-set value (set value) is specified is high. Therefore, for the game hall, there is an advantage that the set value is not easily known to the player. On the other hand, for the player, there is an advantage that the set value can be specified or guessed. In addition, the set value can be specified or guessed by winning the jackpot lottery, and the accuracy of the guess of the set value increases with the continuation of the probability variable jackpot (consecutive jackpots), and in some cases, the set value can be recognized, which can give the gaming machine 10 a gaming feature. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the player.

In addition, when a jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game will be ended in the middle of the jackpot game, and if the game is in the high probability mode, the game will not be ended during the high probability mode. Therefore, by setting the predetermined period to the period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot open/close execution mode, the player is prevented from ending the game before the end of the predetermined period. This prevents a player who does not know the timing (end of the predetermined period) when the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed from ending the game just before the non-set value (set value) becomes specified or guessable, even if the player proceeds with the game and does not know the timing when the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed, the non-set value (set value) can be guessed or recognized. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena behavior of other players who play aiming for the timing when the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed.

In addition, since the start of the specified period is the start of the jackpot game triggered by the first jackpot win in the low probability mode, not only is it necessary to win at least one jackpot before the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed, but even if the specified period has started, the hurdle of being able to specify the non-set value (set value) is high as described above, so a considerable number of game balls 99 will be fired onto the game board 31 and a considerable number of jackpot draws will be taken until the non-set value (set value) is guessed or specified to some extent. Therefore, at the stage where the set value can be guessed or specified with a high degree of accuracy, it is highly likely that the number of unit jackpot draws (ease of receiving a jackpot draw) has also reached a stage where it is possible to sufficiently judge. As a result, when the non-set value (set value) can be guessed or specified with a high degree of accuracy, the player can judge the ball-out performance of the gaming machine 10 during play, including not only the non-set value (set value) but also the number of unit jackpot draws, making it possible to decide whether to continue playing. For example, even if the set value is low, if the number of unit jackpot draws is high, it is possible to make a comprehensive decision to continue playing. On the other hand, even if the set value is high, if the number of unit jackpot draws is low, it is possible to make a comprehensive decision to abandon playing.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, information for identifying or guessing non-set values is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 at the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, at the end of each jackpot game, the player can check the information about the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 up until that jackpot game. This allows the player to recognize the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 again even if the player does not know that information about non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the player misses the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39, or if the player has forgotten the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past during the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set values at the end of each jackpot game based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39, and enjoy the progress of the game by recognizing or guessing the set values.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 at the end of a jackpot game, but the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 may be displayed on a display unit such as the pattern display unit 341 after the end of a jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, the display history for a predetermined period may be made displayable during a special period other than the specified period. For example, in a standby state in which neither variable play nor jackpot play is being performed, it is possible to display the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 on a display unit such as the pattern display unit 341 by a predetermined operation on the gaming machine 10 by the player. In this way, by displaying the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 on the pattern display unit 341 after the end of a jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it becomes possible to check the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39 when they have been forgotten. This makes it possible to identify or guess the non-set value based on the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39. Displaying the display history on the pattern display unit 341 during standby or other times will be described in detail in the fourth embodiment below.

In this way, when the display history can be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in a standby state, etc., there is an advantage that it is possible to check the display contents of the seven-segment display unit 39 in the past when the display contents have been forgotten. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in a standby state, etc., anyone can check the display history by performing a specified operation on an empty gaming machine 10. In other words, it becomes possible to identify or guess a non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others, which allows so-called hyena behavior. In contrast, in this embodiment, it is not permitted to check the display history for a specified period on the seven-segment display unit 39 after the end of a jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. In other words, the display of specific information indicating a non-set value, including the display history for a specified period, is restricted outside of the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the hyena behavior of identifying or guessing a non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the first hit is a special jackpot, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first jackpot game to the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the high probability mode, but the predetermined period may be set for each jackpot regardless of the type of jackpot. In other words, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game regardless of whether it is a first hit or a consecutive hit. In this case, the predetermined period begins at the start of the jackpot game or the open/close execution mode, and ends at the end of the jackpot game or the open/close execution mode.

In this embodiment, numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39. Instead of or in addition to displaying numbers corresponding to non-setting, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, numbers or letters corresponding to non-set values may be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and a non-set value indicating reach effect may be executed in the symbol display unit 341 to indicate the non-set value. As a non-set value indicating reach effect, it is possible to stop and display a decorative pattern with, for example, a repeating number corresponding to a non-set value when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In this way, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a number corresponding to a non-set value is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and a non-set value indicating reach effect is executed in which the non-set value is indicated on the symbol display unit 341, so that the player can enjoy the variable game not only by checking whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in the variable game, but also by focusing on the numbers and the like stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and by focusing on the combination of decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Also, when the non-set value indicating reach effect is executed as one of the reach effects, it is also conceivable that in the reach of the decorative symbols of the numbers corresponding to the set value, the numbers are not displayed as a set of double numbers, but are displayed as a miss. For example, if the setting value is 1, the decorative symbols can stop and be displayed as "222," "333," "444," "555," and "666," but not "111," and a reach with a decorative symbol of 1 is guaranteed to be a miss. In this way, by not displaying the repeated numbers corresponding to the setting value, it is usually desirable for the decorative symbols to stop and be displayed as repeated numbers, but it is also desirable not to display the repeated numbers 5 or 6, which negate the high setting value, so it becomes possible to enjoy the reach performance from a different perspective than before.

It is also conceivable that the display of numbers or the like corresponding to non-set values on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, or the non-set value explicit reach effect, can be executed only at specific timing. In this way, by limiting the display of numbers or the like corresponding to non-set values on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 to specific timing, or by executing the non-set value explicit reach effect, it is possible to enjoy the game by focusing on the variable game executed at the specific timing.

The specific timing may be, for example, a timing when the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and the symbol display unit 341 notify the player that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in a variable game performed in a high probability game state or a time-limited game state. In this way, by clearly indicating or suggesting a non-set value in a variable game in a high probability game state or a time-limited game state, the reserved amount is consumed at high speed by the high frequency support mode, and the player can enjoy a variable game in a high probability game state or a time-limited game state, which tends to be monotonous. In addition, the specific timing may be set when the number of variable games performed after the transition to the high probability game state or the time-limited game state is within a predetermined number of times. For example, the predetermined number of times range may be set when the number of variable games performed after the transition to the high probability game state is small (for example, 1 to 10 times) or large (for example, 100 times or more, 150 times or more, 200 times or more). That is, the non-set value may be indicated or suggested when a jackpot occurs early after transitioning to the guaranteed variable play state, or when a player is stuck in a state where there are many variable play times before a jackpot occurs. In this case, the non-set value is indicated or suggested as a bonus for an early jackpot from the end of the jackpot play, or as a relief from being stuck. The predetermined number of times range may be set when the number of variable play times executed after transitioning to the time-saving play state is small (e.g., 1 to 10 times), or just before the end of the time-saving play state (e.g., 90 to 100 times). In this case, the non-set value is indicated or suggested as a bonus for an early jackpot from the end of the jackpot play, or for a jackpot just before the time-saving play ends.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. In the following other embodiments, the same configurations as those of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as those in the processing procedure will not be described. Note that it is also possible to select and combine the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment and the following other embodiments in any desired combination.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, a specific period (the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening and closing execution mode) is set for each jackpot game executed within a predetermined period (the period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for a normal jackpot), and based on the number of specific conditions satisfied (the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the roon device 37 within the specific period), at the ending of the jackpot game for which the specific period is set, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values (set values) is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39.

Now, as in the first embodiment described above, when a specific period is set for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period, multiple specific periods corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpot games are set within the predetermined period in the jackpot consecutive wins. Therefore, in the jackpot consecutive wins, all or part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of each jackpot game. That is, in the jackpot consecutive wins, all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple parts. However, when all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of a jackpot game, that is, when all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple parts, if the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game executed first is not stored or recorded, it becomes difficult to specify the non-set value (set value) based on the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game executed first. That is, if the specific information presented in the past is not accurately stored or recorded in the 7-segment display unit 39, it is difficult to effectively specify or guess the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), it is necessary to accurately memorize or record the specific information previously presented on the seven-segment display unit 39, which may result in the player giving up on identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). This undermines the significance of increasing the interest of the game by being able to identify or guess the non-set value (set value).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a specific period is not set in a predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above, and specific information for identifying or guessing a non-set value (set value) is presented only once for one predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. In this way, in this embodiment, specific information for identifying or guessing a non-set value (set value) is presented only once for one predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, in this embodiment, the inconvenience of presenting specific information multiple times in a predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above is eliminated. That is, in this embodiment, specific information is presented only once for one predetermined period after the end of the predetermined period, so there is no specific information presented in the past in the predetermined period, and there is no specific information that the player should memorize or record. As a result, the player can identify or guess a non-set value (set value) by focusing on the specific information presented only once for one predetermined period, and is freed from the hassle of accurately memorizing or recording the presented specific information. Therefore, by being able to easily and effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), the player can enjoy playing the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), which increases the player's interest in the game.

In one example of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the specified period is the period from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open/close execution mode of the normal jackpot game for a normal jackpot, and the specific condition is that a game ball enters the special out ball mouth of the Kluen device. Also, in one example of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, but the display timing (specified period) of the specific information is only the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game (after the end of the specified period) in which the end of the specified period is set for one specified period. In other words, the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 only once after the end of the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, some steps of the setting value suggestion process, the 7-segment display unit control process, and the ending additional image control process are different from those of the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the setting value suggestion process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the 7-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48, and FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48. Below, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48 to FIG. 50, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
As shown in FIG. 48, in the setting value suggestion process in this embodiment, when the ending of the jackpot game starts (step S2201: Yes), unlike the setting value suggestion process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 40), on the condition that the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set (step S2501: Yes), the control of the up and down movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 that receives the game ball 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kluen device 37 and the process of counting the number of game balls 99 that are retained in the game ball retention part 38 during the predetermined period are executed (steps S2202 to S2213). As a result, in this embodiment, when the predetermined period ends, in the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the Kluen device 37 during the predetermined period is counted in one go.

In addition, in the setting value suggestion process of this embodiment, on the condition that a 5R normal jackpot game is being played (step S2501: Yes), control of the up and down movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 and a process of counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention portion 38 during a predetermined period are executed (steps S2202 to S2213), and the 7-segment display control process (step S2502) and the ending additional image control process (step S2503) are also executed on the condition that a 5R normal jackpot game is being played (step S2501: Yes) based on the stopper portion down movement flag (step S2203), which is set on the condition that a 5R normal jackpot game is being played, for which the end of the predetermined period is set.

[7-segment display control process]
The seven-segment display control process in this embodiment is executed when the ending starts in the 5R normal jackpot game (when the open/close execution mode (predetermined period) ends) as described above. Also, as shown in FIG. 49, the seven-segment display control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the seven-segment display control process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 41), but when the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), instead of reading the control order of the seven-segment display control information and the already-displayed information (see FIG. 42), only the control order of the seven-segment display control information is read (step S2504). That is, in the seven-segment display control process in this embodiment, the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled (presentation of specific information) only at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot (after the end of the predetermined period) in which the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period, so there is no need to read the already-displayed information to control the seven-segment display unit 39.

[Ending additional image control processing]
As shown in Fig. 50, the ending additional image control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the ending additional image control process in the first embodiment described above (see Fig. 46), but step S2404 in the ending additional image control process in the first embodiment described above is omitted. That is, since the ending additional image control process in this embodiment is executed in response to a 5R normal jackpot (Yes in step S2501 of the setting value suggestion process in Fig. 48), the initialization of the already displayed information storage area is executed in step S2405 without even determining that it is a 5R normal jackpot.

As described above, in this embodiment, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented only once per predetermined period. Therefore, there is no specific information previously presented in that predetermined period, and there is no specific information for the player to memorize or record. This allows the player to identify or guess the non-set value (set value) by focusing on the specific information presented only once per predetermined period, thereby freeing the player from the hassle of accurately memorizing or recording the presented specific information. Therefore, by being able to easily and effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), the player can enjoy playing the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), which increases the fun of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first embodiment described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Third embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which all or part of specific information (numbers) for identifying or guessing a plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the seven-segment display unit 39 after a specific period has elapsed (at the end of a big win game) based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during the specific period. Also, in the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which numbers corresponding to non-set values as specific information are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 according to a number display order (see FIG. 36 ) that is determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when a set value is changed. Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which the number display order is fixed when numbers are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

In the first embodiment described above, when the multiple numbers corresponding to the multiple non-set values as the specific information are displayed in the number display order (see FIG. 36) determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or the set value is changed, the numbers are displayed in the same order unless the gaming machine 10 is turned off or the set value is changed, and the control order of segments A to G when displaying each number on the 7-segment display unit 39 is fixed. Therefore, if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a specified period is less than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding specified period, only a smaller amount of specific information than the already presented information is obtained, and new specific information cannot be obtained. As a result, when it is expected that the number of specific conditions satisfied in a specified number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, there is a concern that interest in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period, the number of specific conditions satisfied, and the specific information presented after the specific period has elapsed will decrease.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the order in which the specific information is presented (the order in which the numbers are displayed and the order in which the segments are displayed) is determined (changed). In this way, by determining the order in which the specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is satisfied, new specific information may be obtained even if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding given period. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a given period and the number of specific conditions satisfied, and it is also possible to make the player interested in the specific information presented after the specific period has elapsed. This makes it possible to more effectively increase the interest of the game by presenting specific information that can identify or guess a non-set value (set value) according to the number of specific conditions satisfied.

Note that the predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order in which the specific information is presented can be, for example, winning a jackpot, the opening of a jackpot game, the opening/closing execution mode, or the ending of a jackpot game. By setting the predetermined conditions in this way, the order in which the specific information is presented is determined (changed) each time a jackpot game is played. This prevents the order in which the specific information is presented from becoming fixed, and prevents the same specific information from being repeatedly presented or the presentation of specific information from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information each time a jackpot game is played. This makes it possible to generate interest in the order in which the specific information is presented in a jackpot game, for example, and thus to increase interest in the jackpot game.

The predetermined condition may be, for example, winning a specific jackpot (e.g., a jackpot in a special jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low probability mode), starting the opening of a specific jackpot game (e.g., a jackpot game for a special jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low probability mode), starting the opening/closing execution mode, or starting the ending of a jackpot game. By setting the predetermined condition in this way, the number of times the order of presentation of the specific information is determined (changed) is reduced compared to when the predetermined condition is not limited to a specific jackpot or jackpot game. Therefore, by reducing the possibility that new information is presented in relation to the specific information presented earlier, it becomes more difficult to identify all non-set values (identify the set values), and it is possible to prevent all non-set values from being identified early (identify the set values). This makes it possible to prevent, for example, a player from ending play on the gaming machine 10 early when the set values are low.

The predetermined condition may be the start or end of a predetermined or specific period. By setting the predetermined condition in this way, the order in which the specific information is presented is determined (changed) for each predetermined or specific period. It is therefore expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information for each predetermined or specific period. This makes it possible to create interest in the order in which the specific information is presented, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, the predetermined condition may be that a specific presentation is determined or executed as a variable game presentation. In this case, the specific presentation may be set to either a non-reach presentation or a reach presentation. Typically, the specific presentation may be a premium presentation in which a jackpot or a guaranteed jackpot is confirmed among the variable game presentations. Furthermore, the specific presentation may be a decorative pattern displayed in a specific combination on the pattern display unit 341, or a provisional stop display (intermediate stop display). For example, the decorative pattern may be displayed as "777" on the pattern display unit 341, or may be displayed as a specific reach-out number such as "767", or may be displayed as a specific non-reach-out number (variable number) such as "367", or may be displayed as a provisional stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that a development presentation will be executed when a development presentation such as a super reach presentation or a special reach presentation is executed as a reach presentation. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed, for example, a "7 Development 7" is displayed in which the left and right decorative symbols are in a reach state and a symbol such as "Development" is temporarily displayed as a center symbol indicating that a development effect will be executed. Even when predetermined conditions are set in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information for each predetermined period or specific period. This makes it possible to create interest in the presentation order of the specific information, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Other possible predetermined conditions include multiple consecutive single jackpots, or multiple consecutive presentations of the same specific information. By setting predetermined conditions in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) when it is difficult to obtain new specific information. This makes it easier to obtain new specific information, reducing the sense of boredom when new specific information is not available, and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if the specified conditions are satisfied before the start of the specified period, the presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) for the specified condition that is satisfied first may be prioritized, or the presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) for the specified condition that is satisfied last may be prioritized.

In one example of this embodiment, the display order of the numbers corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values as specific information and the segment display order when displaying each number are determined on the condition that a jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode is started (a specified period is started, a first jackpot game is started), and in accordance with these display orders, all or part of the numbers for identifying the multiple non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game (after the specified period has elapsed), when the end of the specified period is set.

Here, FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referenced in the procedure of the display order setting process of FIG. 51. Below, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, focusing on the display order setting process, which is a difference from the first embodiment described above.

[Display order setting process]
<Step S2601>
As shown in Fig. 51, in the display order setting process in this embodiment, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the jackpot game presentation start flag is set to ON (step S2601). The jackpot game presentation start flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game presentation is to be started, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination process in Fig. 37. Then, if the jackpot game presentation start flag is ON (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602, and if the jackpot game presentation start flag is OFF (step S2601: No), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Step S2602>
When the jackpot game presentation start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game presentation is a jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot is the first jackpot and whether a predetermined period is to start. Whether the jackpot is in the low probability mode can be judged by, for example, including probability mode information indicating whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game is in the low probability mode or the high probability mode in the jackpot game start command when the jackpot game is started, and by setting a flag indicating that the jackpot is in the low probability mode to on or off based on the probability mode information in the command judgment process of FIG. 37 when the jackpot game start command is transmitted from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, and by checking the flag by the MPU 51. The probability mode information may be set as a command separate from the jackpot game start command.

Then, if the jackpot is in low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot is the first jackpot (the jackpot that starts a specified period), the MPU 51 transitions to step S2603. On the other hand, if the jackpot is not in low probability mode (step S2602: No), i.e., if the jackpot is in high probability mode (step S2602: No), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2603 to S2605>
If the jackpot is in the low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 obtains the setting value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), and further determines the display order of the numbers corresponding to the multiple non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2604), sets the control order of segments A to G for each number (step S2605), and terminates the display order setting process.

The display order of the numbers corresponding to the multiple non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36, similar to step S2015 (see FIG. 35) of the display order setting process in the first embodiment described above. The determined number display order is stored in the RAM 512.

The control order of segments A to G for each number is determined based on a control order determination table for segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 shown in FIG. 52. In this control order determination table, multiple control orders for segments A to G are defined by the value of the control priority type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 35, and the probability of each control order being determined is set to be the same. The control order of segments A to G is determined to be the same for each number from multiple control orders depending on the value of the control priority type counter when the control order of segments A to G for each number is set. The determined control order of segments A to G is stored in RAM 512.

In this embodiment, when numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, segments A to G are controlled in the same order for all numbers, but the control order for each number may be different. In other words, the control order for segments A to G may be determined individually for each of the multiple numbers corresponding to non-set values.

As described above, in this embodiment, the order in which the numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 is determined for each predetermined period. This determines the order in which specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that new specific information may be obtained even if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions satisfied in a given number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period and the number of specific conditions satisfied, and to make the player interested in the specific information presented after the specific period has elapsed. This makes it possible to more effectively increase the interest of the game by presenting specific information according to the number of specific conditions that can identify or infer a non-set value (set value) are satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first and second embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which, based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after a specific period has elapsed (at the end of a jackpot game), all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is presented on the seven-segment display unit 39, and presentation of the specific information on the seven-segment display unit 39 ends with the end of the jackpot game. In other words, in the above-described first embodiment, all or part of the specific information is displayed during a predetermined specified period (after the specific period has elapsed).

However, if a player misses or forgets the presentation of specific information during the specified period, it is expected that the player will wish to reconfirm the specific information in order to identify or infer multiple non-set values by taking into account the specific information displayed in the past. It is also expected that when a player is replaced, the new player will wish to confirm the specific information displayed in the past. However, if the specific information is presented during the specified period, it is not presented outside the specified period, and so the new player will not be able to reconfirm the specific information.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, during a special period other than the prescribed period, all or part of the specific information previously presented can be presented. In this way, by being able to present specific information previously presented during a special period other than the prescribed period, the player can check the specific information previously presented during the special period. That is, if the player misses or forgets the presentation of specific information during the prescribed period, the player can recheck the specific information previously displayed, and when a player is replaced, the new player can check the specific information presented to the previous player. This allows the player to identify or guess multiple non-set values (set values) by taking into account the specific information presented to the previous player, improving the convenience of identifying or guessing non-set values (set values).

Here, an example of a special period is a waiting state (a state of waiting for customers) in which neither variable play nor jackpot play is being performed. By having the special period be a waiting state in this way, it becomes possible to check specific information previously presented in a state in which play is not being performed. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of various effects performed by the pattern display unit 341 and the like as the game progresses, such as variable play effects and jackpot play effects, from being obstructed.

When making it possible to present all or part of the specific information previously presented during the standby state, it is also possible to make it a condition that a specific input operation, such as a password input operation or a command input operation, is performed on a specific display screen to which the player can move during the standby state. The password or command may be made available by displaying it on the pattern display unit 341 at the ending or the like during a jackpot game in which the end of a specific period is set. The password or command may also be made available by displaying a matrix type two-dimensional code or the like on the pattern display unit 341 during the jackpot game, and reading this matrix type two-dimensional code or the like using a mobile device such as a smartphone or mobile phone, thereby transmitting it from an external server to the mobile device, so-called mobile linkage.

In this way, by making it possible to present all or part of the specific information previously presented during the waiting state on the condition that a specific input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed, only players who can enter a password or command, i.e., only players to whom all or part of the specific information has been presented, can check all or part of the specific information previously presented during the waiting state. This makes it possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior and freeloading, whereby all or part of the specific information is checked by other players.

It is also possible to use a mobile device such as a smartphone or mobile phone to read a matrix-type two-dimensional code on a specific display screen that can be accessed in standby mode, thereby causing the mobile device to present all or part of the specific information that has been presented in the past.

The special period may also be set during a jackpot game, for example, during the opening, during the open/close execution mode, or during the ending. By setting the special period during a jackpot game in this way, past specific information is presented without the lottery result of the jackpot lottery being clearly indicated or suggested. This makes it possible to prevent the clear indication or suggestion of the result of the jackpot lottery from being hindered by the presentation of specific information. In addition, since a jackpot game is played after the result of the jackpot lottery is clearly indicated as a jackpot through variable play, player interest tends to decrease, but by presenting specific information that was previously presented during such a jackpot game, interest in the jackpot game is increased.

The special period may also be set during variable play. In this case, the total time during which the game is played (the time during which the power is on in the gaming machine 10 minus the time in standby mode) is theoretically longer than the time during which the jackpot variable play is played. Therefore, by making it possible to present past specific information during variable play, it becomes possible to set many timings at which past specific information can be presented. However, when the special period is set during variable play, it is preferable to limit the presentation of specific information for a certain period before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, for example, during a non-reach state in which a reach presentation is not being performed as a variable play presentation, or when the change time is short. This makes it possible to prevent the visual confirmation of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the stopped display of the decorative pattern from being hindered.

In addition, the presentation of past specific information during the special period may be performed at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, or may be performed at the player's discretion.

When past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, it becomes possible to have past specific information presented at a timing that the player does not expect. This makes it possible to impart an element of surprise to the gaming machine 10. In addition, since past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10 without the player having to perform any operations on the gaming machine 10, even a player with little knowledge of the gaming machine 10 can learn specific information that has been presented in the past. This ensures fairness between players.

Here, examples of the case where the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10 include, for example, presenting the specific information presented in the past as a demonstration screen in a standby state, presenting the specific information presented in the past before the execution of a specific reach performance at a certain rate (including 100%) when the execution of the reach performance is scheduled in a variable game, and determining to present the specific information presented in the past by a lottery performed at a specific timing of a variable game or a big win game. When the specific information presented in the past is presented as a demonstration screen in a standby state, the player can select a gaming machine 10 for executing a game from vacant machines while taking into consideration the past specific information presented on the demonstration screen, so that the degree of freedom and convenience when selecting a gaming machine 10 for executing a game is improved. Also, when the specific information presented in the past is presented before the execution of a specific reach performance when the execution of the reach performance is scheduled in a variable game, the presentation of the past specific information serves as a pre-notification performance for the execution of the specific reach performance, so that the interest in the variable game is improved. It is also conceivable that the presentation of past specific information in variable play can be performed as an expectation suggestion effect (including a confirmation effect indicating a jackpot) that suggests the expectation (reliability) in the case where the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, or as a chance-up effect that increases the expectation (reliability). In this case as well, interest in variable play is increased. Furthermore, when past specific information is presented by a lottery performed at a specific timing in variable play or jackpot play, the past specific information is presented at a specific random timing determined by the gaming machine 10, which can add a special element of surprise to the game. Furthermore, when the player knows the specific timing at which the specific information is presented, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether the specific information is presented at the specific timing, which increases the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when the presentation of past specific information during a special period is executed at the player's will, the player does not have to passively wait for the past specific information to be presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, but can actively check the past specific information at a timing of his/her own preference during the special period. Therefore, when multiple non-set values (set values) are identified or inferred in consideration of past specific information, the timing of the presentation of past specific information reflects the player's will without being restricted by the gaming machine 10, improving convenience.

Here, an example of the presentation of past specific information during a special period being executed at the player's will is the presentation of previously presented specific information when a player performs a specified operation on the operation button 20 or the like during a special period set in standby mode, during variable play, or during a jackpot play.

In one example of this embodiment, at the end of a jackpot game (prescribed period), all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to the multiple non-set values displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed, and during the standby period (special period), by performing a specified operation on the operation button 20 or the selection determination unit 21, all or part of the specific information (numbers) displayed at the end of the last three jackpot games is displayed on the pattern display unit 341. Note that in this example of the embodiment, it is possible to display all or part of the specific information previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 on the pattern display unit 341 without performing an input operation such as a password or command.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 53 to 63.

Here, FIG. 53 is an oblique view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53.

As shown in FIG. 53, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment further includes a selection determination unit 21 provided on the front frame 11.

The selection determination unit 21 is operated by the player and is a push button that, when pressed by the player in a standby state described below, changes the display screen (see FIG. 60) on the symbol display unit 341. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The multiple selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from options (items) on various screens such as the top menu screen during the standby state screen transition process of Figs. 61 and 62 described below (see Fig. 60), and include an up selection button 211, a down selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214. Here, provisional selection means that the provisionally selected content is confirmed (stored in RAM 512) by operating the decision button 21B. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 is equipped with an up selection operation switch 211a, a down selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d that switch the input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 as shown in Fig. 54. These switches 211a to 211d are connected to the input/output I/F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not each selection button 211-214 has been operated based on the input signal of each switch 211a-211d.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has started, it is determined that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed. Of course, it may also be determined that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is continuing or has ended.

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to confirm the provisionally selected item. The decision button 21B also has a decision operation switch 21Ba that switches the input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described below. The decision operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not an operation has been performed on the decision operation switch 21Ba based on the input signal of the decision operation switch 21Ba.

In place of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the decision button 21B, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts player operations on the touch keys may be provided as an operation means. Furthermore, in place of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the decision button 21B, a translucent touch panel that accepts player operations may be provided on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. In place of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214), a jog dial may be provided. Although the selection switches 211a-211d and the decision operation switch 21Ba are contact switches, they may be, for example, piezoelectric elements as long as they can be used to detect the presence or absence of operations by the player.

Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 53.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the secondary timer interrupt process of this embodiment, in addition to the same processes (steps S2000 to S2005) as the secondary timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above, an operation detection process (step S2701) and a standby state screen transition process (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection process]
The operation detection process is a process for detecting whether or not an operation has been performed on the various buttons 20, 21A, and 21B. Here, Fig. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 55.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 executes an operation button operation detection process (step S2801), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), a selection button operation detection process (step S2803), a selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), a decision button operation detection process (step S2805), and a decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806).

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, so that the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 20 is determined at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interruption period of the sub timer interruption process. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG. 57.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. In step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Then, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the third detection flag to the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a, and the operation detection process ends.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, steps S2901 to S2903 are executed, and the operation states of the most recent three operations at 1 msec intervals are stored in RAM 512 as the first detection flag to the third detection flag as the operation history of the operation button 20. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation state two states before that is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 57, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2802 in the operation detection process, an operation pattern flag is set to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. The operation pattern flag is composed of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 38(A)). When only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 38(A)). When only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 38(A)). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has not been performed (see FIG. 38(A)). Here, Fig. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. Also, Fig. 59(A) is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status for the operation button 20. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection process will be described with reference to Figs. 58 and 59(A).

<Step S3001>
58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. If the first operation detection flag is ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3002, and if the first operation detection flag is OFF (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is set to ON. If the second operation detection flag is ON (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3003, and if the second operation detection flag is OFF (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag is set to ON, which indicates the most recent operation state of the operation button 20. If the third operation detection flag is ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3004, and if the third operation detection flag is OFF (step S3003: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59 (A)). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation of the operation button 20 is continuing, and can grasp the time during which the operation button 20 is being continuously operated based on the number of times that the operation button operation continuation command is transmitted in succession. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the time that the operation button 20 has been continuously operated, making it possible to execute an operation button presentation based on a long press operation.

<Step S3005>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3001 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S3001: No), it determines whether or not a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is on (step S3005). If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3006, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag is on, which indicates the most recent operation state of the operation button 20. If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3007, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF. That is, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59 (A)), and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. Then, the second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operation state to an operation state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, if the second operation pattern flag is used to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operation state to an operation state, the operation states of the operation button 20 three times are reflected, so that erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 caused by noise such as radio waves or static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S3008>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3002 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S3002: No), it determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S3008). If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010, whereas if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has ended).

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third operation pattern flags to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). Note that, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operated state.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes an up selection button operation process, a down selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation process>
In the up selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the up selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the up selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the up selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as "up selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

<Down selection button operation process>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the lower selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the left selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the left selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

[Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes an up selection operation detection pattern determination process, a down selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Up Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets an up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the up selection button 211 from the operation history of the up selection button 211 determined based on the first up selection operation detection flag, the second up selection operation detection flag, and the third up selection operation detection flag. Here, the up selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "up selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "up selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58.

As shown in FIG. 59(B), in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the first up selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first up selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the up selection button 211 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the second up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second up selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the up selection button 211 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the third up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the second up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third up selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the up selection button 211 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the up selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the up selection button 211 is in a non-operated state.

<Down Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the lower selection button 212 from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. Here, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "lower selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58.

As shown in FIG. 59(C), in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the lower selection button 212 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third lower selection operation detection flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in a non-operated state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the left selection button 213 from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "left selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58.

As shown in FIG. 59(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the first left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the left selection button 213 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operated state.

<Right Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the right selection button 214 from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "right selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" can be read as the "right selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58.

As shown in FIG. 59(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the first right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the right selection button 214 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operated state.

[Decision button operation detection process]
In the determination button operation detection process (step S2805 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three operations. Since the determination button operation detection process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the determination button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "determination button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57.

[Decision Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process]
In the deciding operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 sets an operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the deciding button 21B from the operation history of the deciding button 21B determined based on the first deciding operation detection flag, the second deciding operation detection flag, and the third deciding operation detection flag. Here, the deciding operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the deciding operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "deciding operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), in the decision operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the first decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The first decision operation pattern flag can then be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the decision button 21B is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The second decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the decision button 21B has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the third decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first decision operation pattern flag and the second decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the decision button 21B has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in a non-operated state.

[Standby state screen transition process]
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 55, in the standby state screen transition process executed at 2702 of the sub timer interrupt process, in the standby state where neither variable play nor big win play is being executed, the screen of the symbol display section 341 is transitioned in response to the operation of the operation button 20, the selection button 21A or the decision button 21B, and a process is executed that enables the player to make various selections and settings. Here, Fig. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition in the symbol display section 341 in the standby state.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the display of the changing decorative symbols is stopped, if the reserved number N and reserved number M are "0" and the game does not transition to a jackpot game state, the change stop screen in which the changing of the decorative symbols has stopped is maintained. Then, if the player operates the operation button 20 after the change stop screen is displayed, the display screen transitions from the change stop screen to the top menu screen. This top menu screen includes multiple screen transition images and a cursor image.

The multiple screen transition images are images for selecting a destination display screen and include multiple selectable items (destination display screens). The multiple screen transition images include a 7-segment display history selection screen transition image for transitioning to a 7-segment display history selection screen displayed as "7-segment display history," a character selection screen transition image for transitioning to a character selection screen displayed as "character selection," a character customization screen transition image for transitioning to a character customization screen displayed as "character customization," and a change stop screen transition image for transitioning to a change stop screen displayed as "back."

The cursor image is an image that indicates which of multiple selectable items is currently tentatively selected, and the item corresponding to the screen transition image to the right of the cursor image among the multiple screen transition images is the tentatively selected item. In the example shown in FIG. 60, it is shown that "7-segment display history" is tentatively selected. Furthermore, the screen transition image corresponding to the tentatively selected item among the multiple screen transition images is displayed in a manner that is distinguishable from the other screen transition images to emphasize that it is tentatively selected. Note that the tentatively selected item can be changed by operating the up selection button 211 or the down selection button 212.

On the top menu screen, the provisionally selected item (destination display screen) is confirmed by operating the decision button 21B, and the display screen corresponding to that item is displayed. For example, when the player selects the 7-segment display history selection screen transition image of "7-segment display history" and the decision button 21B is operated, the display screen is transitioned from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen.

The 7-segment display history selection screen is a screen that can be switched to a history screen on which the contents of the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a specified period are displayed. This history screen shows the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 for any of the last three specified periods, and includes a 1-time-ago history screen on which the contents of the specific information for the specified period one period ago are displayed, a 2-time-ago history screen on which the contents of the specific information for the specified period two periods ago are displayed, and a 3-time-ago history screen on which the contents of the specific information for the specified period three periods ago are displayed. Each history screen includes a history image in the same form as the additional image (see Figures 47 (B1), 47 (B2), and 47 (C)) displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the latter half of the ending of a jackpot game. The history image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one specified period, and includes five setting value suggestion images that imitate the 7-segment display unit 39 on which numbers corresponding to non-set values can be displayed. The example shown in FIG. 60 indicates that the number 2 was displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 after a game ball 99 entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 during the previous specified period, and segments A to C were then lit up.

The 7-segment display history selection screen also includes a cursor image indicating a provisional selection, a 1-back history screen transition image for transitioning to a 1-back history screen displaying "History 1 (1 back)," a 2-back history screen transition image for transitioning to a 2-back history screen displaying "History 2 (2 back)," a 3-back history screen transition image for transitioning to a 3-back history screen displaying "History 3 (3 back)," and a fluctuation stop screen transition image for transitioning to a fluctuation stop screen displaying "End." Then, by operating the decision button 21B on the 7-segment display history selection screen, the provisionally selected item (the destination display screen) is decided, and a transition is made to the display screen corresponding to that item. For example, when the player provisionally selects the 1-back history screen transition image of "History 1 (1 back)," and the decision button 21B is operated, the display screen is transitioned from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 1-back history screen. Furthermore, when "History 2 (2 previous times)" is selected, the screen transitions from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 2 previous history screen, and when "History 3 (3 previous times)" is selected, the screen transitions from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3 previous history screen. Furthermore, when "End" is selected, the screen transitions from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the top menu screen.

In this way, the player can select to move from the 7-segment display history selection screen to either the previous history screen, the previous two history screens, or the previous three history screens. In other words, the player can check the history information he or she desires by moving to the history screen he or she desires. This allows the history to be checked effectively while avoiding checking history information that has been checked previously or information with a small amount of information, thereby making history checking efficient.

In addition, in this embodiment, information for identifying non-set values at the end of a big win game is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, which is different from the pattern display unit 341, where the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, even when information for identifying non-set values is displayed, the visibility of the image effects executed on the pattern display unit 341 is not hindered. On the other hand, in the standby state, history information having the same content as the information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending is displayed on the pattern display unit 341, which is different from the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, since the pattern display unit 341 generally has a large display area, the visibility of the history information is improved by displaying the history information on the pattern display unit 341. In addition, the pattern display unit 341 may be used to set various settings such as effects and characters executed in the gaming machine 10. Therefore, if the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending is displayed on the pattern display unit 341, it becomes possible to check the history information by the same operation as the operation for setting various settings, and the convenience of checking the history information is improved.

In this embodiment, the player can move from multiple history screens to a history screen that is selected by the player, but it is also possible to have multiple pieces of history information displayed simultaneously on one screen. In this case, since a large amount of history can be checked at once, the presented content can also be checked efficiently.

In addition, when the character screen transition image of "character selection" is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen transitions to the character selection screen, and when the character customization screen transition image of "character customization" is selected, the display screen transitions to the character customization screen. In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to select characters that appear in variable game effects, etc., and to customize the costume, accessories, hairstyle, etc., of the character.

In addition, if the "Back" image for transitioning to the stop-change screen is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen will transition to the stop-change screen.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the display history on the seven-segment display unit 39 for the last three predetermined periods can be confirmed by operating the selection/determination unit 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B) in the standby state. This allows the player to reconfirm the past display contents of the seven-segment display unit 39 when the player misses or forgets the display contents of the seven-segment display unit 39 at the ending of a big win game, and also allows the new player to check the past display contents of the seven-segment display unit 39 when a player is replaced. This allows the player to identify or guess multiple non-set values (set values) by taking into account the past display contents of the seven-segment display unit 39, improving the convenience of identifying or guessing non-set values (set values).

Here, Fig. 61 and Fig. 62 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the standby state screen transition process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 55. Below, the procedure for the standby state screen transition process executed in step S2702 of the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 55 will be described with reference to Figs. 61 and 62.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in FIG. 61, in the standby state screen transition process, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not it is in the standby state (steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, the MPU 51 judges that it is in the standby state when the variable game presentation flag, which is set to ON in step S2105 in the command judgment process of FIG. 37, is set to OFF (step S3101: No) and the big win game presentation flag, which is set to ON when the display variable pattern command is sent to the display control device 6 in the big win game presentation process of step S2004 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG. 34, is set to OFF (step S3102: No). On the other hand, the MPU 51 judges that it is not in the standby state when the variable game presentation flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes) or the big win game presentation flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes).

If the MPU 51 is in a standby state (steps S3101 and S3102 are both No), it transitions to step S3103, and if the MPU 51 is not in a standby state (steps S3101 or S3102 are Yes), it terminates the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3103>
If it is in the standby state (steps S3101 and S3102 are both No), the MPU 51 judges whether the variable stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103). The variable stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen in the symbol display unit 341 is a variable stop screen. This variable stop screen flag is set to ON in step S3120 of FIG. 62 described later when the display screen is shifted from the variable game state or the big win game state to the standby state, that is, when all screen flags other than the variable stop screen flag are set to OFF in the standby state. The variable stop screen flag is also set to ON when the display screen other than the variable stop screen is shifted to the variable stop screen. Specifically, the fluctuation stop screen flag is also set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the fluctuation stop screen in the top menu screen processing of step S3109 in Fig. 62 described later, when the display screen is shifted from the one-back history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the one-back history screen processing of step S3113, when the display screen is shifted from the two-back history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the two-back history screen processing of step S3115, and when the display screen is shifted from the three-back history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the three-back history screen processing of step S3117. Note that the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF in step S3107 when the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to OFF when the display of the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate.

If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3104, and if the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3108 in FIG. 62.

<Step S3104>
When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the operation button 20 has been started, and is set to ON in step S3007 in the operation detection pattern judgment process of FIG. 58. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not an operation on the operation button 20 has been performed when the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen. Then, when the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3105, and when the second operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3104: No), the MPU 51 ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Steps S3105 to S3107>
When the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to a top menu screen for performing various selections and settings (step S3105) (see FIG. 60). That is, when the display screen is the fluctuation display screen and the operation button 20 is operated, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag to ON, indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen (step S3106), sets the change-stop screen flag to OFF, indicating that the display screen is the change-stop screen (step S3107), and ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3108>
If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), as shown in Fig. 62, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to ON (step S3108). The top menu screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from various screens such as the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in Fig. 61). If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3109, and if the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3110.

<Step S3109>
If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen process (step S3109). In the top menu screen process, the provisionally selected item is changed in response to an operation of the selection button 21A. In addition, in the top menu screen process, when the decision button 21B is operated, the display screen is shifted to a screen corresponding to the provisionally selected item, specifically, a fluctuation stop screen, a 7-segment display history selection screen, a character selection screen, or a character customization screen. In addition, when the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the shift destination screen to ON, while setting the top menu screen flag to OFF.

<Step S3110>
If the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a 7-segment history selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is a 7-segment display history selection screen is set to ON (step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen in the top menu screen process of step S3109. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3111, and if the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), the process proceeds to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment history selection screen process. The 7-segment history selection screen process is a process that is executed when the 7-segment display history selection screen is displayed. The details of the 7-segment history selection screen process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

<Step S3112>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not a previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen is set to ON (step S3112). The previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen in step S3212 of the 7-segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63 described later. If the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3113, and if the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
If the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the previous history screen process, when "Back" is selected, the display screen transitions from the previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3114>
If the one-back history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not a two-back history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the two-back history screen is set to ON (step S3114). The two-back history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the seven-segment display history selection screen to the two-back history screen in step S3215 of the seven-segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63 described later. If the two-back history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3115, and if the two-back history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3116.

<Step S3115>
If the 2-previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 2-previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the 2-previous history screen process, when "Back" is selected, the display screen transitions from the 2-previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 2-previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3116>
If the 2-previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the 3-previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 3-previous history screen is set to ON (step S3116). The 6-previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3-previous history screen in step S3217 of the 7-segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63 described later. If the 3-previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3117, and if the 3-previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3118.

<Step S3117>
If the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 3rd previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the 3rd previous history screen process, when "Back" is selected, the display screen transitions from the 3rd previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 3rd previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
If the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the other screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to ON (step S3118). The other screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen processing of step S3109. If the other screen flag is set to ON (step S3118: Yes), the other screen processing corresponding to the other screen is executed (step S3119), and the standby state screen shift processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the other screen flag is set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
If the other screen flags are set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the variable stop screen flag to ON (step S3120) and ends the standby state screen transition process. In other words, when the MPU 51 is in the standby state, if all screen flags are OFF, the state transitions from the variable game state or the big win game state to the standby state, and it can be determined that the display screen is the variable stop screen, so the variable stop screen flag is set to ON.

[7-segment history selection screen processing]
In the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in step S3111 of the standby state screen transition process, a process is executed to transition the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to a fluctuation stop screen, a one-time history screen, a two-time history screen, or a three-time history screen in response to the player's operation of the selection decision unit 21 (selection button 21A and decision button 21B) (see FIG. 60). Here, FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG. 62.

<Step S3201>
As shown in Fig. 63, in the 7-segment history selection screen processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second up selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201). The second up selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the up selection button 211 has been started, and is set to ON in the up selection operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing in Fig. 56. If the second up selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3202, and if the second up selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3203.

<Step S3202>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of changing the provisionally selected item (provisional selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the upper side. For example, when "History 2 (2 times back)" is provisionally selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the provisional selection display is changed to "History 1 (1 time back)" (see FIG. 60). Note that when the upper selection button 211 is operated while "History 1 (1 time back)" displayed at the top of the option images is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display may not be changed, or the provisional selection display may be changed to "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3203>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), i.e., when an operation of the upper selection button 211 has not been started, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started, and is set to ON in a lower selection operation detection pattern determination process executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2804 in the operation detection process of Fig. 56. When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3204, and when the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of changing the provisionally selected item (provisional selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the lower side. For example, when "History 2 (2 times back)" is provisionally selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the provisional selection display is changed to "History 3 (3 times back)" (see FIG. 60). Note that when the lower selection button 212 is operated while "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display may not be changed, or the provisional selection display may be changed to "History 1 (1 time back)" displayed at the top of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3205>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205). The second decision operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the decision button 21B has started, and is set to ON in the decision button operation detection pattern judgment process executed in step S2806 in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not an operation on the decision button 21B has been performed when the display screen is the 7-segment display history selection screen. Then, when the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3206, and when the second decision operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), the MPU 51 ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
If the second decision operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to OFF (step S3206), and determines whether the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "End" (step S3207). If the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "End" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3208, and if the item provisionally selected when the decision button 21B is operated is not "End" (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3210.

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
If the provisionally selected item when the decision button 21B is operated is "End" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen (step S3208) (see FIG. 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen to ON (step S3209), and ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3210>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "End" (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210). If the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3211, and if the provisionally selected item is not "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3213.

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
If the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen (step S3211) (see FIG. 60), sets the previous history screen flag to on (step S3212), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Step S3213>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "History 1 (1 previous)" (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the provisionally selected item is "History 2 (2 previous)" (step S3213). If the provisionally selected item is "History 2 (2 previous)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3214, and if the provisionally selected item is not "History 2 (2 previous)" (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
If the provisionally selected item is "History 2 (2 previous times)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 2 previous history screen (step S3214) (see FIG. 60), sets the 2 previous history screen flag to on (step S3215), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
When the decision button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "History 2 (2 times back)" (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the provisionally selected item is "History 3 (3 times back)", and therefore changes the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3 times back history screen (step S3216) (see FIG. 60), sets the 3 times back history screen flag to on (step S3217), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

In this way, in the 7-segment history screen executed in the standby state, the display screen can be switched from the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to any of the 1-back history screen, 2-back history screen, and 3-back history screen, and all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 for the past three predetermined periods can be confirmed (see FIG. 60). Therefore, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 when he/she misses or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the big win game, and when the player is replaced, the new player can confirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to identify or guess multiple non-set values (set values) in consideration of the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past, improving the convenience of identifying or guessing non-set values (set values).

In particular, in the standby state, unless a variable play is executed by shooting the game ball 99, the display screen will not be switched from the history screen (the one-time history screen, the two-time history screen, and the three-time history screen) to another screen such as a variable stop screen, unless the player intentionally performs a screen transition operation. Therefore, the player can carefully and carefully check the specific information that was previously displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 at his own pace by stopping the shooting of the game ball 99 and maintaining the standby state, without being subject to time constraints such as when specific information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 at the end of a big win game. This allows the player to carefully consider at his own pace when identifying or guessing multiple non-set values (set values) based on past specific information, thereby improving the convenience of identifying or guessing multiple non-set values (set values).

In this embodiment, the past specific information that can be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 in the symbol display unit 341 by the player's operation (intention) in the standby state is for the past three predetermined periods, but there is no limit to the number of past specific information that can be displayed. In other words, it may be possible to check the specific information for the past one, two, or four or more predetermined periods.

Furthermore, the display of past specific information is not limited to the symbol display unit 341, and may be performed by other display means as long as it has a display function. For example, past specific information may be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, or on a display unit different from the symbol display unit 341 and the seven-segment display unit 39, such as a display unit provided separately for displaying past specific information. Furthermore, if there is a display unit provided for executing part of a presentation such as a variable game presentation, separate from the symbol display unit 341, it is also conceivable to display past information on that display unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to third embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which, based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after a specific period has elapsed (at the end of a jackpot game), all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of a plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the seven-segment display unit 39, and presentation of the specific information on the seven-segment display unit 39 ends with the end of the jackpot game. In other words, in the first embodiment described above, each time a specific period set in a predetermined period elapses, specific information is displayed during a prescribed period that is set after the specific period has elapsed.

When the seven-segment display unit 39 displays numbers corresponding to multiple non-set values, all segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 become control targets, so that the numbers (non-set values) that are to be displayed can be identified. It is also possible to grasp the numbers that are to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all segments A to G become control targets. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, when segment A, which is the first control target, is turned off, the candidates for the numbers to be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 are "1" and "4". Then, when segment F, which is the sixth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". In other words, the numbers "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, which is the sixth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become control targets. Also, when segment A, the first control target, is turned on, the candidates for the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 are "2", "3", "5", and "6". When segment B, the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined that it is either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined that it is either "5" or "6". When segment C, the third control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "3", and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2". That is, the numbers "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, the third control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control targets. When segment E, the fifth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "6", and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5". That is, the numbers "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, the fifth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control targets. In other words, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when segment C, the third control object, is turned on or off, the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when segment E, the fifth control object, is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, the sixth control object, is turned on or off.

However, in the first embodiment described above, the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G have become the control targets. Therefore, even if the player can recognize the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all the segments A to G have become the control targets, control of the segments A to G to display the next number to be displayed is not started until all the segments A to G have become the control targets. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 before all the segments A to G have become the control targets, information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 to identify the number already recognized by the player until the display of the next number to be displayed is started. In other words, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G have become the control targets, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease during the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the seven-segment display unit 39 is controlled at the end of a jackpot game each time a specific period set for the jackpot game elapses, so that all or part of the numbers (specific information) corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values are dispensed in small amounts each time a specific period elapses. Therefore, if a number corresponding to one of the non-set values is displayed in a specific period that has already elapsed, it is possible that the number will be forgotten. In this case, it becomes difficult to identify or guess the set value from the multiple non-set values.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the non-set value display means (lamp display unit) having a number of information display units (six individual lamp units) equal to or greater than the number of non-set values (five), each information display unit displays information (numbers) that identifies the non-set value. Each information display unit has two modes: a display state (lighted state) in which specific information is presented, and a non-display state (lighted out state) in which specific information is not presented. When the information display unit is in the display state, the non-set value can be identified by the specific information displayed on the information display unit. In this way, when the information display unit is in either of the two modes of the display state and the non-display state, the non-set value can be identified by the specific information presented on the information display unit in the display state. That is, in this embodiment, only information that can identify the non-set value is displayed as the specific information, and information that can infer the non-set value is not displayed. Therefore, after one specific information that can identify a non-set value is presented, specific information for inferring the non-set value is not presented unnecessarily, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information is prevented.

There are no particular limitations on the non-set value display means, but examples include a display device having a group of lamps that can be turned on and off individually, a display device having multiple 7-segment display units, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot matrix display, and a plasma display. Also, as a non-set value display means, it is conceivable to use a display means that displays a variably decorated pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of information display sections corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in a specified period is displayed, and the information display section that was previously displayed in at least the specified period is displayed until the end of the jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. For example, an information display section that was displayed in a specific period earlier in the same specified period is also displayed in a specific period after the specified period. In this way, an information display section that was displayed in a specific period earlier in the same specified period is also displayed in a specific period after the specified period, so that it can be confirmed at any time during at least the specific period in the specified period. Therefore, the specific information displayed in the specific period earlier in the same specified period is not forgotten, and convenience is improved when identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and when identifying or inferring a set value.

The information display section that is in a displayed state during a specific period may be kept in a constantly displayed state for the specified period and until the end of the jackpot game, which is set as the end of the specified period, or may be kept in a displayed state only during the jackpot game, or may be kept in a displayed state only for the specific period.

In one example of this embodiment, in a lamp display unit having six individual lamp units numbered 1 to 6, by winning a lamp lighting lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the special out ball hole of the Kluen device during a specific period, the individual lamp units numbered with a number corresponding to a non-set value are turned on at the point where the lamp lighting lottery is won, without having to wait for the specific period to pass. Then, during the specified period in which the specific period is set, the lighting state is maintained until the end of the jackpot game, which is set as the end of the specified period.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 64 to 71. Note that Figures 69 to 71 are diagrams showing modified examples of this embodiment.

Here, FIG. 64 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 64, and FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of the lighting on and off of the lamp display unit 35.

As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is provided with a special out ball discharge section 38A instead of the gaming ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment described above, and a lamp display section 35 is provided on the gaming board 31 instead of the 7-segment display section 39 of the first embodiment described above.

The special out ball discharge unit 38A discharges the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37 to the back side of the game board 31. This special out ball discharge unit 38A has a configuration in which the stopper unit 383 is omitted in the game ball retention unit 38 of the first embodiment described above, and has the same configuration as the game ball retention unit 38 except that the stopper unit 383 is omitted. In such a special out ball discharge unit 38A, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without being retained (stopped) in the special out ball discharge unit 38A. Therefore, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 is not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 after a specific period has elapsed as in the first embodiment described above, but is detected by the special out ball sensor 384 every time the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 even during the specific period.

The lamp display unit 35 presents specific information that identifies non-set values, and includes multiple (six) individual lamp units (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) that can be turned on and off individually. The first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a row (line) in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 65, the lamp display unit 35 is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. As can be seen from FIG. 66, this allows the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be turned on and off individually.

The first individual lamp unit 351 is marked with the number 1, and when the first individual lamp unit 351 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 1, and game setting value 1 is negated as the set value. The second individual lamp unit 352 is marked with the number 2, and when the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 2, and game setting value 2 is negated as the set value. The third individual lamp unit 353 is marked with the number 3, and when the third individual lamp unit 353 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 3, and game setting value 3 is negated as the set value. The fourth individual lamp unit 354 is marked with the number 4, and when the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game setting value 4, and game setting value 4 is negated as the set value. The fifth individual lamp unit 355 is marked with the number 5, and when the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is the game setting value 5, and the game setting value 5 is negated as the set value. The sixth individual lamp unit 356 is marked with the number 6, and when the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is the game setting value 6, and the game setting value 6 is negated as the set value.

In other words, in the lamp display unit 35, the numbers attached to the individual lamp units 351-356 that are turned on correspond to multiple non-set values, and the game setting value corresponding to the number is denied as the set value. Then, when the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to all (five) non-set values are turned on, one individual lamp unit 351-356 that corresponds to the set value is turned off, and the number corresponding to the one individual lamp unit 351-356 that is turned off corresponds to the set value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(A), when the second to fifth individual lamp units 352-356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned off, the non-set values are identified as 2-6 and the set value is identified as 1. As shown in FIG. 66(B), when the first, third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353-356 are turned on and only the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned off, the non-set values are identified as 1, 3-6 and the set value is identified as 2. As shown in FIG. 66(C), when the first, second, fourth to sixth individual lamp units 351, 352, 354-356 are turned on and only the third individual lamp unit 353 is turned off, the non-set values are identified as 1, 2, 4-6 and the set value is identified as 3. As shown in FIG. 66(D), when the first to third, fifth, and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 353, 355, and 356 are turned on and only the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 3, 5, and 6, and the set value is 4. As shown in FIG. 66(E), when the first to fourth and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 354 and 356 are turned on and only the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 4 and 6, and the set value is 5. As shown in FIG. 66(F), when the first to fifth individual lamp units 351 to 355 are turned on and only the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 5, and the set value is 6. The first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are controlled in the set value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the set value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356), and a set value is suggested by specifying a non-set value depending on the on or off state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggestion process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. In the set value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356), and a set value is suggested by specifying a non-set value depending on the on or off state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. Hereinafter, the procedure of the set value suggestion process will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

<Step S3301>
As shown in Fig. 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the ending performance start flag is set to ON. The ending performance start flag is a flag for starting the ending performance, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command judgment process of Fig. 37. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing for the ending performance to start based on the ending performance start flag. Here, if the ending performance start flag is ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3302, and if the ending performance start flag is OFF (step S3301: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3311.

<Step S3302>
When the ending performance start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the special out ball detection flag is set to on (step S3302). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to on in step S2114 in the command judgment process of Fig. 37. Here, when the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3303, and when the special out ball detection flag is off (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S3303>
When the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), that is, when it is detected that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the Kluen device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp units 351 to 356. That is, every time the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the Kluen device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp units 351 to 356.

In the first embodiment described above, the set value can be recognized by displaying five numbers corresponding to multiple non-set values on the seven-segment display unit 39 before the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. In order to display five numbers on the seven-segment display unit 39, the seven segments A to G must be controlled five times each, so a specific condition must be met 35 times (7 x 5 times) or more. In other words, 35 game balls 99 must enter the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 during the specified period.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 display information corresponding to non-set values, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are controlled in only two modes, the on state and the off state. Therefore, in order to make the lamp display unit 35 display the five non-set values so that the set value can be recognized, it is sufficient that the specific condition is satisfied five or more times. Also, in this embodiment, a crane device 37 similar to that in the first embodiment described above is adopted. Therefore, if the specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 is set in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, it is clear that the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 displaying the non-set values will be lit with a small number of jackpots.

In this embodiment, the specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 is that the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and that the lamp lighting lottery is won. In other words, by adopting the lamp lighting lottery, the difficulty of achieving the specific condition is adjusted, and the difficulty of identifying all of the multiple non-set values is adjusted. This adjusts the difficulty of lighting the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35, and prevents the five non-set values from being easily identified, i.e., the set values from being easily recognized.

The probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery is set so that the degree of difficulty for controlling the lighting of the five individual lamp units 351-356 is the same or approximately the same as the degree of difficulty for displaying five numbers by the seven-segment display unit 39 in the first embodiment described above. In addition, the probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same for the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to multiple non-set values, or the probability of winning for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 may be different from the other individual lamp units 351-356.

If the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value will be lit is stabilized, and a game feature is provided in which the probability is stabilized. When the winning probability is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, for example, the winning probability is set to about 100 x (1/7)% (= 14.3%) (for example, 10% to 20%). This is because in the first embodiment described above, one number is displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37, so that in this embodiment, when seven game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 373, about one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is lit on average. In addition, if the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp sections 351-356 corresponding to multiple non-set values, the winning probability is not limited to 10% to 20% and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if the lottery condition that triggers the lamp lighting lottery to light one of the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to the multiple non-set values is a lottery condition that is different from the game ball 99 entering the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery can be set according to the difficulty of achieving this lottery condition. In other words, if the difficulty of achieving the lottery condition is low, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery can be set low, and the higher the difficulty of achieving the lottery condition, the higher the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery can be set. In this way, by setting the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery according to the difficulty of achieving the lottery condition, the difficulty of achieving a specific condition required to light one individual lamp unit 351-356 can be made uniform regardless of the type of specific condition. This makes it possible to apply various conditions as specific conditions (more precisely, as a lottery trigger).

On the other hand, if the winning probability for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 is made different from the other individual lamp units 351-356, a game feature is provided in which there is variation in the probability that the individual lamp unit 351-356 corresponding to the non-set value will be lit. When the winning probability for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 is made different from the other individual lamp units 351-356, it is possible to set the winning probability lower for the individual lamp unit 351-356 that is later in the control order. As an example, the winning probabilities are set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5% for the individual lamp unit 351-356 that is earlier in the control order.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lamp lighting lottery has been won. If the lamp lighting lottery has been won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3305. If the lamp lighting lottery has not been won (step S3304: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value process.

<Step S3305>
If the lamp lighting lottery has been won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 reads out already-lit lamp information (step S3305).

Here, the already-lit lamp information is information related to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are currently lit, and includes already-lit lamp flag information, as shown in FIG. 68(B) and FIG. 68(C). The already-lit lamp flag information is composed of a first already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the first individual lamp unit 351 is lit or not, a second already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit or not, a third already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the third individual lamp unit 353 is lit or not, a fourth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is lit or not, a fifth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is lit or not, and a sixth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is lit or not. Each already-lit lamp flag is set to ON when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, and set to OFF when they are not lit. In the example shown in FIG. 68(B), all already-lit lamp flags are set to OFF (initial state), indicating that all of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned off. In the example shown in FIG. 68(C), the second already-lit lamp flag is set to ON, and the first, third to sixth already-lit lamp flags are set to OFF, indicating that the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on, and the first, third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353 to 356 are turned off.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 judges whether all the already-lit lamp flags are set to ON in the already-lit lamp information. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether all the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are lit. Then, when all the already-lit lamp flags are set to ON in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process. That is, when all the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are lit, there are no other individual lamp units 351 to 356 that should be lit, so the setting value suggestion process ends. On the other hand, when there is an already-lit lamp flag that is set to OFF in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the process proceeds to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
If the already-lit lamp information includes an already-lit lamp flag that is set to OFF (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads out the control order of the individual lamps (lamp control order) (step S3307).

Here, the lamp control sequence is set by a procedure similar to that of the display sequence setting process (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above. That is, when the power is turned on or the setting value is changed, the lamp control sequence is determined by referring to the lamp control sequence determination table based on the setting value stored in RAM 412. This lamp control sequence determination table is similar to the number display sequence determination table (see FIG. 36) of the first embodiment described above, and the numbers in the number display sequence determination table can be thought of as numbers assigned to individual lamps. The number 1 in the number display sequence determination table of the first embodiment described above corresponds to the first individual lamp unit 351, and similarly, the numbers 2 to 6 in the number display sequence determination table of the first embodiment described above correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 68(A), when the setting value is 1 and display sequence A1 is determined, the control sequence of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is second individual lamp unit 352 → third individual lamp unit 353 → fourth individual lamp unit 354 → fifth individual lamp unit 355 → sixth individual lamp unit 356. Furthermore, in the number display sequence determination table in the first embodiment described above, the probability that each display sequence will be selected is the same, and in the lamp control sequence determination table in this embodiment, the probability that each lamp control sequence will be selected is also the same.

The lamp control order may be set when the power is turned on or when the setting value is changed, but may also be set when a specified period begins. Also, the lamp control order does not need to have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308 to S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be controlled based on the lamp control order read out in step S3305 and the already-lit lamp information read out in step S3307 (step S3308), and lights up the individual lamp units 351 to 356 (step S3309). That is, a lamp lighting lottery is executed every time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and when the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit to present specific information indicating a non-set value. Then, the MPU 51 updates the already-lit lamp information (step S3310), and ends the setting value suggestion process. For example, when the already-lit lamp information is set to OFF (initial state) for all already-lit lamp flags as in the example shown in FIG. 68(B), if the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit up, the second already-lit lamp flag corresponding to the second individual lamp unit 352 is set to ON as shown in FIG. 68(C).

In this way, in this embodiment, a lamp lighting lottery is executed every time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and if the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, making it possible to identify a non-set value. In other words, in this embodiment, even before the specific period has elapsed, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, making it possible to identify a non-set value. In this way, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set to one of two states, a lit state and an unlit state, making it possible to identify a non-set value by the number attached to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in the lit state. In other words, in this embodiment, only information that can identify a non-set value is presented by the lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356, and information that can infer a non-set value is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that can identify one non-set value is presented, specific information for inferring the non-set value is not unnecessarily presented, so that a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information is prevented.

<Step S3311>
If the ending presentation start flag is off (step S3301: No), it is determined whether the big win game presentation end flag is on (step S3311). The big win game presentation end flag is a flag that ends the big win game presentation (ending presentation), and is set to on in step S2118 of the command determination process in Fig. 37. Then, if the big win game presentation end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3312, and if the big win game presentation end flag is off (step S3311: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S3312>
When the jackpot game presentation end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the jackpot type to be ended is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312). Whether the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be judged based on whether the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to on in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is on. Then, when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3313, and when the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
If the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 if any of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit (step S3313), and further clears (initializes) the already lit lamp information, and ends the setting value suggestion process. That is, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are turned off in the case of a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of a predetermined period is set. As a result, the lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 are maintained in a lit state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it is possible to confirm that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit at any time, that is, specific information that specifies a non-set value. As a result, there is no risk of forgetting previously presented specific information during the same specified period, and convenience is improved when identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and ultimately when identifying or inferring set values.

In this embodiment, when the player wins the lamp lighting lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set values in the lamp display unit 35 are turned on. However, the lamp lighting lottery is optional, and the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set values may be turned on when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 without performing the lamp lighting lottery as in the first embodiment described above. In this way, when the lamp lighting lottery is not performed, it is possible to adjust the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on by increasing the difficulty of the game ball 99 entering the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, or by dividing the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 into a route detected by the special out ball sensor 384 and a route not detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

As described above, in this embodiment, the individual lamp units 351-356 of the lamp display unit 35 that present non-set values are in one of two states, a lit state or an unlit state, and information identifying the non-set value is presented based on the type (number) of the individual lamp units 351-356 that are lit. That is, in this embodiment, only information that can identify the non-set value is presented by the lighting of the individual lamp units 351-356, and information that can infer the non-set value is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that can identify one non-set value is presented, specific information for inferring the non-set value is not presented unnecessarily, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information is prevented.

The individual lamp units 351-356 that are lit are immediately lit by winning the lamp lighting lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, and the lit individual lamp units 351-356 are maintained in a lit state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period, the specific information that identifies the non-set value can be confirmed at any time based on whether the individual lamp units 351-356 are lit. Therefore, the specific information presented in the previous specific period in the same specified period will not be forgotten, and the convenience of identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and therefore identifying or guessing the set value, is improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 include winning the lamp lighting lottery in addition to the game ball 99 entering the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37. This adjusts the difficulty of achieving the specific conditions according to the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery, and adjusts the difficulty of identifying all of the multiple non-set values. Therefore, the difficulty of lighting each of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, preventing the five non-set values from being easily identified, i.e., preventing the set values from being easily recognized.

The lamps are immediately lit by winning the lamp lighting lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37, but the fact that the lamp lighting lottery is executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball port 373) and the result of the lamp lighting lottery may be clearly displayed to the player on a display means other than the lamp display unit 35. For example, as shown in FIG. 69(A), the fact that the lamp lighting lottery is executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kluen device 37) is clearly displayed to the player, the result of the lamp lighting lottery is clearly displayed to the player as shown in FIG. 69(B1) or FIG. 69(B2), and further, information regarding the lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 is clearly displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as shown in FIG. 69(C1) or FIG. 69(C2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(A), when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 may be lit, that is, an image is displayed to draw attention to the lamp display unit 35 (roulette). In this way, by clearly indicating that the lamp lighting lottery is being executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373) by the pattern display unit 341, even if the game ball 99 has been missed entering the special out ball opening 373, the image displayed on the pattern display unit 341 allows the player to understand that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373, that is, that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 may be lit.

If the lamp lighting lottery is won, information regarding the individual lamp units 351-356 that will be turned on is displayed, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1). In the example shown, it is displayed that the second individual lamp unit 352 will be turned on. In this way, by displaying the result of the lamp lighting lottery in the pattern display unit 341, it becomes possible to know whether the individual lamp units 351-356 will be turned on not only in the lamp display unit 35 but also in the pattern display unit 341, thereby improving convenience.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), in the pattern display section 341, during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the execution of the open/close execution mode), information regarding the individual lamp sections 351-356 that are lit is continuously displayed. That is, the individual lamp sections 351-356 of the individual lamp sections 35 that are lit are displayed in the pattern display section 341. Note that, for example, information regarding the individual lamp sections 351-356 that are lit during the jackpot game (at least during the open/close execution mode) may be displayed until the end of the 5R normal jackpot, for which the end of the specified period is set.

On the other hand, if the result of the lamp lighting lottery is a non-win, an image is displayed indicating that the result of the lamp lighting lottery is a non-win, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1). In this way, while a jackpot game is being played (at least while the open/close execution mode is being played), information regarding the lit individual lamp units 351-356 is continuously displayed by the pattern display unit 341, so that the lit individual lamp units 351-356 can be confirmed on the pattern display unit 341 without having to check the lamp display unit 35, improving convenience.

The specific information indicating the non-set value may be presented only in the pattern display unit 341, rather than in the lamp display unit 35 provided separately from the pattern display unit 341. In other words, the specific information may be presented to the player only by the presentation in the pattern display unit 341 related to the lamp lighting lottery during the jackpot game (open/close execution mode) described with reference to FIG. 69.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, an ending additional image for identifying a non-set value may be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the ending performance of the jackpot game. For example, as shown in FIG. 70, an image imitating the lamp display unit 35 is displayed as an ending additional image on the pattern display unit 341 in the ending of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 70(A), it is clearly indicated that only the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit on the lamp display unit 35, and in the example shown in FIG. 70(B), it is clearly indicated that the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are lit on the lamp display unit 35, and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned off. In this way, the pattern display unit 341 displays the on/off state of the lamp display unit 35 in the ending of the jackpot game, so that the on/off state of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that were lit up until the jackpot game can be confirmed, improving convenience.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lamp display unit 35 is configured with the individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a row (line), but the lamp display unit 35 is not limited to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a row, and other configurations can also be used. For example, it is possible to use a lamp display unit 35 in which the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a ring as shown in FIG. 71(A), or a lamp display unit 35 in which the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a matrix as shown in FIG. 71(B). Furthermore, the lamp display unit 35 may be configured with the individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a staggered pattern.

In addition, instead of the lamp display unit 35, a display device in which multiple seven-segment display devices are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, staggered pattern, etc. may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fourth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

Sixth embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which, based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after a specific period has elapsed (the ending of a jackpot game), all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of a plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the seven-segment display unit 39, and presentation of the specific information on the seven-segment display unit 39 ends with the end of the jackpot game. In other words, in the first embodiment described above, each time a specific period set in a predetermined period elapses, specific information is displayed during a prescribed period that is set after the specific period has elapsed.

Some gaming machines reserve the right to play a game with a first special symbol (first special symbol game) triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into a first winning slot. In some of these gaming machines, when a predetermined hold occurs (for example, a hold that results in a jackpot lottery result being a jackpot or a hold with a long variable display time), the same, similar, or similar presentation (continuous hold presentation) that clearly indicates or suggests the expectation (jackpot expectation) that the jackpot lottery result for the predetermined hold will be a jackpot is played consecutively for a predetermined number of first special symbol games for a predetermined number of holds at the time the predetermined hold occurs.

Some gaming machines are equipped with a second winning port into which a gaming ball can enter by opening an electric device such as an electric tulip, and a game based on a second special symbol triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning port (the second special symbol game) is executed in priority over the first special symbol game for the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning port. Here, the reason that the second special symbol game is executed in priority over the first special symbol game is that the second special symbol game can give the player a greater advantage than the first special symbol game (for example, a higher probability of a special bonus, a larger average number of rounds played), while the first special symbol game can cause disadvantages not present in the second special symbol game (for example, a fall back to the normal game state).

Some of these gaming machines execute a special effect (second special effect) that clearly indicates or suggests that a special bonus (for example, the execution of a guaranteed jackpot game after the end of the second special game) will be awarded when a jackpot symbol stops or a reach occurs during the second special game.

However, in a gaming machine in which the second special chart game is executed with priority over the first special chart game and the second special chart special effect is executed in the second special chart game, when the reserved continuous effect is scheduled to be executed in succession for multiple first special chart games (Special 1 relevant change + Special 1 reserve 1 + Special 1 reserve 2) as shown in FIG. 72(A), if a game ball enters the second winning slot during the execution of Special 1 relevant change as shown in FIG. 72(B), the second special chart game is executed after the end of the change (Special 1 relevant change) during which the reserved continuous effect is being executed as shown in FIG. 72(C), and the second special chart special effect is executed in the second special chart game, causing the reserved continuous effect to be interrupted midway.

As shown in FIG. 72(D), if the first special symbol game is played after the second special symbol game is finished, and the reserved continuous performance for the first special symbol game is not performed as planned (Pattern 1), if the player remembers that the reserved continuous performance was performed before the second special symbol special performance was performed, the player will feel uncomfortable that the reserved continuous performance was not performed, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease. In particular, if the number of times the second special symbol game (second special symbol special performance) is played is small, the player is more likely to remember that the reserved continuous performance was performed before the second special symbol special performance was performed, and therefore the player is more likely to feel uncomfortable that the reserved continuous performance is not performed after the second special symbol game (second special symbol special performance) is finished.

As shown in FIG. 72(E), when the first special symbol game is played after the second special symbol game is finished, if the reserved continuous performance is resumed (Pattern 2), if the player forgets that the reserved continuous performance was played before the second special symbol special performance is played, the player may feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being played, and interest in the game may decrease. In particular, if the second special symbol game (second special symbol special performance) is played many times, the time until the reserved continuous performance is resumed is long, so the player is more likely to have forgotten that the reserved continuous performance was played before the second special symbol special performance was played, and the player is more likely to feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being resumed after the second special symbol game (second special symbol special performance) is finished.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the opening mode of the second winning opening by the electric device is set to a first opening which is a first time (short opening where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning opening) and a second opening which is a second time in which the opening time of the second winning opening by the electric device is longer than the first time (long opening where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second winning opening).

In this embodiment, when the continuous hold performance is being executed in the first special chart game as the variation, if it is scheduled to be executed consecutively in the next first special chart game that is on hold (for example, Special 1 of the variation + Special 1 hold 1 + Special 1 hold 2 (see Figure 72 (A))), when a game ball enters the second winning hole due to a short opening of the second winning hole, as shown in Figure 73 (A), the continuous hold performance that was executed in the first special chart game will continue to be executed in the second special chart game that is executed after the end of the first special chart game as the variation. That is, in this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the next reserved first special symbol game, even if a game ball enters the second winning port due to the short opening of the second winning port, the reserved continuous performance is not executed in the second special symbol game by the game ball entering the second winning port when the second winning port is short opened, and the reserved continuous performance is continued. Therefore, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the next reserved first special symbol game, the player does not feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance not being executed after the end of the second special symbol game that is executed in response to the game ball entering the second winning port at the time of the short opening of the second winning port. This prevents a decrease in the interest of the game caused by the reserved continuous performance not being executed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of the second special symbol game.

In particular, when the second winning opening is short-opened, it is more difficult for game balls to enter the second winning opening (fewer balls enter) than when the second winning opening is long-opened, and it is more likely that the player will remember that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the second special symbol game was executed. Therefore, when the second winning opening is short-opened, the effect of the reserved continuous performance continuing to be executed without the second special symbol special performance being executed in the second special symbol game due to the game ball entering the second winning opening is high.

In addition, in a short opening where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second winning port, it is expected that the number of game balls entering the second winning port will be small. Therefore, even if the continuous reserved performance is continuously executed in the second special chart game due to a game ball entering the second winning port when the second winning port is short-opened, the number of continuous executions of the continuous reserved performance will not increase significantly, so it is unlikely that the player will feel uncomfortable about the continuous execution of the continuous reserved performance in the second special chart game. On the contrary, by continuously executing the continuous reserved performance in the second special chart game, the continuous reserved performance can be effectively utilized in the second special chart game.

In this embodiment, if the second special symbol special effect is not executed in the second special symbol game due to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole when the second winning hole is partially open, and the reserved continuous effect continues to be executed, the reserved continuous effect is resumed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of the second special symbol game, but it is not necessary to resume the reserved continuous effect in the first special symbol game.

The reserved continuous performance may be executed as a performance indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. For example, when a predetermined reserved continuous performance is executed in a predetermined number of special game (for example, four times), the result of the jackpot lottery for the predetermined number of special game may be indicated as a jackpot. On the other hand, when the second winning port is short-opened and the reserved continuous performance is executed continuously without the second special special performance being executed in the second special game by the entry of a game ball into the second winning port, the reserved continuous performance may be executed in the special game more than the predetermined number of times. Therefore, when the reserved continuous performance is executed continuously without the second special special performance being executed in the second special game by the entry of a game ball into the second winning port when the second winning port is short-opened, if the reserved continuous performance corresponds to a predetermined reserved continuous performance, the predetermined reserved continuous performance will be executed more than the predetermined number of times. In other words, if a predetermined continuous hold effect is scheduled to be executed consecutively in multiple first special game plays, and the predetermined continuous hold effect is executed continuously in the second special game play, there is a possibility that a contradiction will occur between the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the predetermined continuous hold effect (that it is a jackpot) and the actual result of the jackpot lottery.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, if a situation arises in which there is a discrepancy between the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the predetermined continuous pending performance (that it is a jackpot) and the actual result of the jackpot lottery, a process is executed in which the number of consecutive plays in which the predetermined continuous pending performance is executed does not reach a predetermined number. For example, in a special game before the number of consecutive plays in which the predetermined continuous pending performance is executed reaches a predetermined number, or in a special game in which the predetermined number of plays has been reached, the predetermined continuous pending performance is not executed, and is changed to a continuous pending performance other than the predetermined continuous pending performance and executed.

In this way, in this embodiment, if a situation arises in which a contradiction occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the specified continuous pending performance (that it is a jackpot) and the actual result of the jackpot lottery, the type of continuous pending performance is changed and executed so that the number of consecutive special chart plays in which the specified continuous pending performance is executed does not reach the specified number, thereby preventing a contradiction from occurring between the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the specified continuous pending performance (that it is a jackpot) and the actual result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in a plurality of first special chart games in succession (for example, special 1 corresponding change + special 1 reserved 1 + special 1 reserved 2 (see FIG. 72 (A))), when a game ball enters the second winning port by the long opening of the second winning port, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the second special chart special performance is executed in the second special chart game executed after the end of the first special chart game (special 1 corresponding change), but when this second special chart special performance is executed, it is clearly indicated or suggested that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special chart special performance. For example, in the image display means in which the second special chart special performance is displayed as an image, the type of reserved continuous performance executed before the execution of the second special chart special performance is displayed as a capture image or the like. Of course, the clear indication or suggestion that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special chart special performance at the time of execution of the second special chart special performance is not limited to the display of a capture image of the reserved continuous performance on the image display means, and may be another method as described later.

In this way, in this embodiment, by explicitly or implying that the reserved continuous performance was being performed before the execution of the second special performance when the second special performance is executed, the player is prevented from forgetting that the reserved continuous performance was being performed before the execution of the second special performance, and the player can understand that the reserved continuous performance will be resumed after the end of the second special performance. Therefore, even if the reserved continuous performance is resumed after the end of the second special performance, the player is significantly less likely to feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being performed after the end of the second special performance. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the reserved continuous performance being resumed after the end of the second special performance.

In particular, when the second winning port is long-opened in a long-opening regular game, the player is preoccupied for a long time with whether or not the game ball will enter the second winning port, compared to when the second winning port is short-opened in a short-opening regular game. Therefore, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was being performed before the second special game. Also, when the second winning port is long-opened in a long-opening regular game, the game ball is more likely to enter the second winning port (the number of balls entering is large) compared to when the second winning port is short-opened in a short-opening regular game, so the number of second special games in which the second special performance is performed is greater (the performance time of the second special performance is longer). Therefore, the time from the end of the reserved continuous performance before the execution of the second special performance (the start of the second special performance) to the restart of the reserved continuous performance due to the end of the second special performance is longer, and the player pays more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special performance in which the second special performance is executed is a jackpot, compared to when the first special performance is executed. In this way, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a long-open normal performance, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special performance, compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a short-open normal performance, so the effect of clearly indicating or suggesting that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special performance before the execution of the second special performance during the execution of the second special performance is high.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 74 to 100.

[Configuration of gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 74. Here, Fig. 74 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 74, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that not only is a through gate 317 provided in the right area of the gaming board 31, but also a through gate 317L is provided in the left area of the gaming board 31. The left through gate 317L, like the right through gate 317, has a ball entry sensor (not shown) connected to the main control device 4 via the input/output I/F 42, and the ball entry sensor determines whether or not a gaming ball 99 has passed through the through gate 317L.

In this way, by providing the through gate 317L on the left side of the game board 31, the game ball 99 shot into the left area of the game board 31 can pass through the through gate 317L. As a result, even if the game ball 99 is shot into the left area of the game board 31, the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317L, and a normal winning lottery is executed. Then, if the lottery result of the normal winning lottery is a winning lottery, the game ball 99 can enter the second winning hole 315 by opening the electric role 315b. That is, in this embodiment, not only in the probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), but also in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), it is possible to make the game ball 99 enter the second winning hole 315 by shooting the game ball 99 into the left area of the game board 31.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 75 to 77.

Here, FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing an example of the memory area of the main control unit 4, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing an example of the electric role reservation area of the memory area of the main control unit 4 shown in FIG. 75.

The system configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is basically the same as that of the first embodiment described above, but part of the configuration of the lottery counter 412a is different from that of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75, in addition to the normal win initial value counter CIN2 and the normal win random number counter C4, a normal win type random number counter C5 is set as a counter related to the normal win lottery. This normal win type random number counter C5 is a counter that assigns the normal win to either a short opening normal win or a long opening normal win when the lottery result in the normal win lottery is a win. The short opening normal win is a normal win in which the electric role 315b is opened so that the game ball 99 can enter the second winning hole 315, but the opening time of the second winning hole 315 is short (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the game ball 99 is difficult to enter the second winning hole 315. On the other hand, in the long-opening regular win, the electric device 315b opens, allowing the game ball 99 to enter the second winning hole 315, but the opening time of the second winning hole 315 is longer than in the short-opening regular win (for example, 6 seconds), and this is a regular win in which a long-opening regular win game is executed in which the game ball 99 is more likely to enter the second winning hole 315.

When the game ball passes through the left through gate 317L or the right through gate 317, the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5 obtained at that time are stored in the electric role reserve area 412c. The value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process executed in the main control unit 4 in FIG. 20, just like the normal win random number counter C4.

As shown in FIG. 76, the electric role reserve area 412c includes a regular game first reserve area SE1, a regular game second reserve area SE2, a regular game third reserve area SE3, a regular game fourth reserve area SE4, a regular game variable reserve number memory area SNA, and a regular game execution area SAE.

The first regular game reserve area SE1 to the fourth regular game reserve area SE4 are memory areas that store the regular win random number counter C4 and the regular win type random number counter C5, which are obtained as win/lose information used in the regular win lottery when the game ball passes through the through gates 317 and 317L.

The regular game reserve number storage area SNA stores the number of regular game reserve areas SE1 to SE4 in which win/loss information is stored. In other words, the regular game reserve number storage area SNA is a storage area that stores the number of reserved rights to play regular games.

The normal game execution area SAE is a memory area used to move the win/loss information of the normal game first reserve area SE1 when the display of the pattern change is started in the normal pattern display unit 361. Then, at the start of one normal game, the MPU 41 performs a lottery for a normal win using the normal win/loss table (Figures 77(A) and 77(B)) and the normal win type allocation table (Figures 77(C) and 77(D)) described below, based on the numerical information (the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5) stored in the normal game execution area SAE as the win/loss information. At this time, if the win/loss information stored in the first regular game holding area SE1 is moved to the regular game execution area SAE, the win/loss information stored in the second regular game holding area SE2 is shifted to the first regular game holding area SE1, the win/loss information stored in the third regular game holding area SE3 is shifted to the second regular game holding area SE2, and the win/loss information stored in the fourth regular game holding area SE4 is shifted to the third regular game holding area SE3.

[Normal winning/losing table]
In this embodiment, two types of tables are set as the winning or losing table of the normal map: the winning or losing table of the low-frequency support mode normal map shown in Fig. 77(A) and the winning or losing table of the high-frequency support mode normal map shown in Fig. 77(B). That is, in this embodiment, as described later, the winning probability of the normal map is different between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, and the winning probability of the normal map is set higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

The low-frequency support mode normal winning probability table shown in FIG. 77(A) is a table used in the normal winning lottery in the normal game mode, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 77(A), in the low-frequency support mode normal winning probability table, a normal winning probability is set when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0, and a loss probability is set when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is between 1 and 299. In other words, in the normal game mode (low-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal winning probability is set to 1/300, making it difficult for the second winning slot 315 to open.

The high-frequency support mode normal winning/losing table shown in FIG. 77(B) is a table used in the normal winning lottery in the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-frequency support mode, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning is set to 299/300, which is higher than the probability of winning in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), and the second winning hole 315 is made easier to open. As shown in FIG. 77(B), the high-frequency support mode normal winning/losing table is set in such a way that, unlike the high-frequency support mode normal winning/losing table, a normal winning random number counter C4 with a value of 0 results in a loss, and a normal winning random number counter C4 with a value of 1 to 299 results in a win. In other words, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-time game state (high-frequency support mode), the probability of winning is set to 299/300, which is higher than the probability of winning in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), and the second winning hole 315 is made easier to open.

Note that the probability of winning the low-frequency support mode normal map and the probability of winning the high-frequency support mode normal map are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 77(A) and 77(B), and can be changed as appropriate.

[Regular map type allocation table]
In this embodiment, two types of regular map type allocation tables are set as the regular map type allocation table: a low-frequency support mode regular map type allocation table shown in Fig. 77 (C) and a high-frequency support mode regular map type allocation table shown in Fig. 77 (D). That is, in this embodiment, as described later, the allocation probability of regular map type (short open regular map and long open regular map) is different between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode.

Here, in the case of a short-opening normal winning game, the electric device 315b opens for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds), and a short-opening normal winning game is executed in which the game ball 99 can enter the second winning hole 315 for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds). In this short-opening normal winning game, the short opening time of the electric device 315b makes it difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning hole 315, and the maximum number of game balls 99 that can enter the second winning hole 315 is about two, and it is possible that the game ball 99 will not enter the second winning hole 315.

On the other hand, in the case of a long-opening regular winning game, the electric device 315b is opened for a longer period of time (e.g., six seconds) than in a short-opening regular winning game, and a long-opening regular winning game is executed in which the game ball 99 can enter the second winning hole 315 for a longer period of time (e.g., six seconds) than in a short-opening regular winning game. In this long-opening regular winning game, the long opening time of the electric device 315b makes it easier for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning hole 315, and it is possible to reserve the right to execute the second special game up to an upper limit (e.g., four balls).

The low-frequency support mode normal winning type allocation table shown in FIG. 77(C) is a table used in the normal winning lottery in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 77(C), in the low-frequency support mode normal winning type allocation table, when the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 is 0 to 99, it is set to a short opening normal winning, and when the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 is 100 to 199, it is set to a long opening normal winning. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the allocation ratio between the short opening normal winning and the long opening normal winning is set to 1:1. Of course, the allocation ratio between the short opening normal winning and the long opening normal winning in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) does not necessarily have to be 1:1, and can be changed as appropriate.

The high-frequency support mode normal winning type allocation table shown in FIG. 77(D) is a table used in the normal winning lottery in the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-frequency support mode, the probability change play state and the time-saving play state. As shown in FIG. 77(D), in the high-frequency support mode normal winning type allocation table, when the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 is 0, it is set to a short opening normal winning, and when the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 is 1 to 199, it is set to a long opening normal winning. In other words, in the probability change play state and the time-saving play state (high-frequency support mode), it is set to be more likely to be allocated to a long opening normal winning than a short opening normal winning. Of course, the allocation rate between the short opening normal winning and the long opening normal winning in the probability change play state and the time-saving play state (high-frequency support mode) is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 77(D) and can be changed as appropriate.

[Big Win Type Allocation Table]
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above is configured as a so-called loop probability machine, but the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as an ST machine. Therefore, in this embodiment, the distribution table of the jackpot type is different from that of the first embodiment described above.

Here, Figure 77 (E) shows an example of an allocation table for allocating the jackpot type when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot.

In the example shown in FIG. 77(E), when the type of special game is a first special game triggered by winning the first winning slot 314, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R special jackpot is 10 numbers from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that will result in a 16R special jackpot is 5 numbers from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of special game is a second special game triggered by winning the second winning slot 315, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R special jackpot is 10 numbers from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that will result in a 16R special jackpot is 10 numbers from 10 to 19, and there is no random number that will result in a 5R normal jackpot. In other words, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a special jackpot in the first special game is 75%, while the probability of a special jackpot in the second special game is 100%. Therefore, in the case where the second winning hole 315 is long-opened due to a long-open regular winning, in the second special winning game for the ball 99 entering the second winning hole 315, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it will be a 100% guaranteed jackpot. In other words, if a jackpot is announced during the reserved charge release described below (see Figures 87(B) and 87(C)), when the reserved charge for the second special winning game for the long-open regular winning is released, it will be a guaranteed jackpot.

In either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a guaranteed jackpot, the game will transition to a guaranteed jackpot game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, an upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special symbol games (ST number) that can be played in the guaranteed jackpot game state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of the number of special symbol games, the game will transition to a normal game state after the upper limit of the number of special symbol games is played. Note that the number of special symbol games in the guaranteed jackpot game state is not limited to 100 times, and may be another number.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the game will transition to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, an upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special chart games (time-saving times) that can be played in the time-saving game state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of the number of special chart games, the game will transition to a normal game state after the upper limit of special chart games has been played. Note that the number of special chart games in the time-saving game state is not limited to 100 times, and may be another number.

The transition from the special game state to the normal game state is not limited to when a special game with an upper limit value is executed, but may be executed, for example, when a state transition lottery (fall lottery) is won.

[Processing of main control device 4]
In this embodiment, the main timer interruption process and the main process are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the following, with reference to Figures 78 to 83, the through gate process executed in the main timer interruption process briefly described in the first embodiment, and the normal game control process and the normal winning game control process executed in the main process whose description was omitted in the first embodiment will be described in detail.

[Through gate processing]
In the through gate processing of this embodiment, when the game ball 99 passes through the left through gate 317L or the right through gate 317 (see Figure 74), the MPU 41 executes a process to update the information stored in the electric role holding area 412c of the RAM 412.

Here, FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for through gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing. Below, the through gate processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 78.

<Step S3401>
78, in the through gate process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first judges whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S3401). If the MPU 41 judges that the game ball 99 has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S3401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3403, and if the MPU 41 judges that the game ball 99 has not passed through the left through gate 317L (step S3401: No), the process proceeds to step S3402.

<Step S3402>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball 99 has not passed through the left through gate 317L (step S3401: No), it determines whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the right through gate 317 (step S3402). When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball 99 has passed through the right through gate 317 (step S3402: Yes), it shifts the process to step S3403, and when it determines that the game ball 99 has not passed through the right through gate 317 (step S3402: No), it ends the through gate process.

<Step S3403>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball 99 has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S3401: Yes), or when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball 99 has passed through the right through gate 317 (step S3402: Yes), it determines whether the normal map change reserve number X stored in the normal map change reserve number storage area SNA set in the electric role reserve area 412c of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment) (step S3403). When the normal map change reserve number X is the maximum reserved number (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate processing, and when the normal map change reserve number X is not the maximum reserved number (step S3403: No), the processing proceeds to step S3404.

<Steps S3404 and S3405>
If the normal game variation reserve number X is not the maximum reserve number (step S3402: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the normal game variation reserve number X (step S3404), obtains the counter values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing executed in the main control unit 4 of FIG. 20, and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the normal game first reserve area SE1 to the normal game fourth reserve area SE4 of the electric role reserve area 412c in the RAM 412 (step S3405), and terminates the through gate processing.

[Main Processing of Main Control Device 4]
In the main processing of the main control device 4, although the description has been omitted in the first embodiment described above, a normal game control processing (step S3501 in FIG. 79) and a normal winning game control processing (step S3502 in FIG. 79) are executed.

[General game control processing]
In the normal symbol game control process, processes related to the variable display and stop display of the normal symbol display section 361 in the main display section 36 are executed.

Here, FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal game control process executed in step S3501 in the main process of FIG. 79. Below, the normal game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 80.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 80, in the normal game control processing, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is playing a jackpot game (step S3601). If the gaming machine 10 is playing a jackpot game (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the variable game control processing. If the gaming machine 10 is not playing a jackpot game (step S3601: No), the MPU 41 transitions to step S3602.

Whether or not a jackpot game is being played is determined based on the jackpot game flag, which is set to ON when transitioning to a jackpot game state and is set to OFF when transitioning from the jackpot game state to another game state, for example, in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 79.

<Step S3602>
If the jackpot game is not being played (step S3601: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the normal map variation display flag is on (step S3602), and if the normal map variation display flag is on (step S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3607. If the normal map variation display flag is off (step S3602: No), the process proceeds to step S3603. The normal map variation display flag is a flag indicating that a normal map game in which the normal pattern is displayed is being played. This normal map variation display flag is set to on when the normal map variation display is started in step S3811 in the normal map variation start processing in FIG. 82 described later, and is set to off when the normal map variation is stopped and displayed in step S3609 in the normal map game control processing.

<Step S3603>
If the normal map variation display flag is off (step S3602: No), that is, if the normal map game is not being played, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the normal map winning game is being played (step S3603). If the normal map winning game is being played (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the normal map game control process, and if the normal map winning game is not being played (step S3603: No), the process proceeds to step S3604.

Whether or not a normal winning game is being played is determined by, for example, whether or not an electric device open flag, which indicates that the electric device 315b is open, is set. This electric device open flag is set to ON when the electric device 315b is opened in step S3910 in the normal winning game control process in FIG. 83 described below, and is set to ON when the electric device 315b is closed in step S3917.

<Step S3604>
If the normal winning game is not being executed (step S3603: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the normal variable reserve number X stored in the normal variable reserve number storage area SNA set in the electric role reserve area 412c of the RAM 412 is 0 or not (step S3604). If the normal variable reserve number X is 0 (step S3604: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process, and if the normal variable reserve number X is not 0 (step S3604: No), the process proceeds to step S3605.

<Step S3605>
If the number of reserved normal map variations X is not 0 (step S3604: No), the MPU 41 executes the normal map data setting process for the winning/losing information stored in the electric role reserved area 412c (step S3605), and ends the normal map game control process. When the MPU 41 ends the process of step S3605, the process proceeds to step S3606. Details of the normal map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3606>
In step S3606, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol variation start process for causing the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to execute a variation display based on the information stored in the electric role reserve area 412c, and ends the normal symbol game control process. Details of the normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3607>
If the normal map change display in progress flag is on (step S3602: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal map change display time has elapsed since the start of the normal map change display (step S3607), and if it determines that the normal map change display time has elapsed (step S3607: Yes), it transitions to step S3608, and if it determines that the normal map change display time has not elapsed (step S3607: No), it terminates the normal map game control processing.

<Steps S3608 to S3610>
When the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed (step S3607: Yes), the MPU 41 stops and displays the symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol winning lottery corresponding to the normal symbol game in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S3608), and sets the normal symbol variation display in progress flag to OFF (step S3609). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variation stop display flag to ON (step S3610), which indicates that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed, that is, that the normal symbol game has ended, and ends the normal symbol game control process.

The normal map fluctuation stop display flag is referenced in step S3901 of the normal map winning game control process in FIG. 83 described below to determine whether it is time to start playing a normal map winning game.

[General map data setting process]
Here, Fig. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the general map data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3605 of Fig. 80. Hereinafter, the general map data setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 81.

<Steps S3701 to S3703>
As shown in FIG. 81, in the normal map data setting process, first, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the normal map change reserve number X stored in the normal map change reserve number storage area SNA (step S3701), and moves the winning/losing information from the normal map game first reserve area SE1 to the normal map game execution area SAE (step S3702). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the winning/losing information stored in the normal map game second reserve area SE2 to the normal map game fourth reserve area SE4 one by one (step S3703). Specifically, in step S3702, the winning/losing information of the normal map game second reserve area SE2 is moved to the normal map game first reserve area SE1, the winning/losing information of the normal map game third reserve area SE3 is moved to the normal map game second reserve area SE2, and the winning/losing information of the normal map game fourth reserve area SE4 is moved to the normal map game third reserve area SE3.

[Regular map change start processing]
Here, Fig. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal map fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S3606 in Fig. 80. Hereinafter, the normal map fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to Fig. 82.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 82, in the normal game variation start process, the MPU 41 judges whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S3801). Whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode is judged based on whether or not the high frequency support mode, which is set to ON when the game state is transferred to the probability game state or the time-saving game state in the game state transfer process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 79, is set to ON. If it is in the high frequency support mode (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 transfers the process to step S3802, and if it is not in the high frequency support mode (step S3801: No), that is, if it is in the low frequency support mode, the process transfers to step S3803.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
If the mode is high frequency support mode (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a win/loss judgment based on the high frequency support mode normal winning hit table (see FIG. 77 (B)) to determine whether the values of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the winning/loss information stored in the normal playing area SAE of the electric role holding area 412c are values corresponding to a normal winning (step S3802). On the other hand, if the mode is not high frequency support mode (step S3801: No), that is, if the mode is low frequency support mode, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss judgment based on the low frequency support mode normal winning hit table (see FIG. 77 (A)) to determine whether the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the winning/loss information stored in the normal playing area SAE of the electric role holding area 412c are values corresponding to a normal winning (step S3803).

<Steps S3804 and S3805>
When the MPU 41 judges whether or not the winning/losing is a normal winning (step S3802 or S3803), it judges whether or not the result of the winning/losing judgment is a long-opening normal winning in which the second winning port 315 is long-opened (step S3804). When the result of the winning/losing judgment is a long-opening normal winning (step S3804: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a long-opening normal winning flag indicating that the result of the winning/losing judgment is a long-opening normal winning (step S3805) to ON, and the process proceeds to step S3808. On the other hand, when the result of the winning/losing judgment is not a long-opening normal winning (step S3804: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3806.

<Steps S3806 and S3807>
If the result of the winning/losing judgment is not a long opening regular winning (step S3804: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the winning/losing judgment is a short opening regular winning in which the second winning port 315 is short opening (step S3806). If the result of the winning/losing judgment is a short opening regular winning (step S3806: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a short opening regular winning flag indicating that the result of the winning/losing judgment is a short opening regular winning (step S3807) to on, and the process proceeds to step S3808. On the other hand, if the result of the winning/losing judgment is not a short opening regular winning (step S3806: No), that is, if the result of the winning/losing judgment is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3808.

<Steps S3808 and S3809>
If the long-opening regular winning flag is set to on (step S3805), if the short-opening regular winning flag is set to on (step S3807), or if the result of the win/lose judgment is a miss (step S3806: No), the MPU 41 executes a regular winning pattern setting process to set the regular pattern variable display time in the regular pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 during regular winning game, the lottery result in the regular winning lottery, and the type of support mode (high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode) in the RAM 412 (step S3808), and sets a regular pattern variable pattern command to transmit the regular pattern variable display time in the regular pattern display section 361 during regular winning game, the lottery result in the regular winning lottery, and the type of support mode (high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode) to the voice lamp control device 5 (step S3809), and then the process proceeds to step S3810.

In the above-mentioned normal pattern variation pattern setting process, the normal pattern variation display time is set by, for example, setting the value of the normal pattern variation display time counter to a counter value corresponding to the normal pattern variation display time in the normal pattern game.

The normal pattern change pattern command is also sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 79) executed by the MPU 41, and the voice lamp control device 5 executes a display corresponding to a normal pattern game in the pattern display unit 341 based on the normal pattern change pattern command, and if the result of the normal pattern winning lottery is a long-open normal pattern winning, the long-open flag is set to ON in step S4006 of the command determination process in FIG. 84 described below.

The type of support mode does not necessarily have to be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 by the normal pattern change command. For example, when there is a support mode transition between high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode, for example, when there is a transition of the game state between the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) and the special game state or the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) in the game state transition process of step S1306 of the main process of FIG. 79, the type of support mode may be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of support mode after the transition of the support mode.

<Steps S3810 and S3811>
In step S3810, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S3810). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol is being variably displayed, that is, that the normal symbol game is being executed, to ON (step S3811), and ends the normal symbol variable start process.

[Regular winning game control processing]
In the normal winning game control process, when the result of the normal winning lottery is a winning one, a process is executed to switch between an allowable state that allows the game ball 99 to enter the second winning port 315 and a restricted state that restricts it by controlling the opening and closing of the electric device 315b.

Here, FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control process executed in step S3502 in the main process of FIG. 79. Below, the normal winning game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 83.

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 83, in the normal winning game control process, the MPU 41 first judges whether or not the normal winning game stop display flag, which indicates that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed (the normal winning game has ended), is on (step S3901). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not it is time to start the normal winning game. If the normal winning game stop display flag is on (step S3901: Yes), that is, it is time to start the normal winning game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3902. On the other hand, if the normal winning game stop display flag is off (step S3901: No), that is, it is not time to start the normal winning game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3912.

<Step S3902>
When the normal map variation stop display flag is on (step S3901: Yes), that is, when it is the timing when the normal map winning game can be started, the MPU 41 judges whether the long open normal map winning flag is set to on (step S3902). The long open normal map winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the normal map winning lottery is a long open normal map winning, and when the result of the normal map winning lottery is a long open normal map winning, it is set to on in step S3805 of the normal map variation start processing of FIG. 82. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the normal map winning lottery for the finished normal map game is a long open normal map winning. When the long open normal map winning flag is set to on (step S3902: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the processing to step S3903, and when the long open normal map winning flag is set to off (step S3902: No), the MPU 41 moves the processing to step S3905.

<Steps S3903 and S3904>
If the long open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S3902: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the value of the opening counter to a value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric role 315b in the long open normal winning game (the time during which the game ball 99 can enter the second winning hole 315) (step S3903). Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open normal winning flag to OFF (step S3904), and the process proceeds to step S3908.

<Step S3905>
When the long open normal winning flag is set to OFF (step S3902: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the short open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S3905). The short open normal winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the normal winning lottery is a short open normal winning, and when the result of the normal winning lottery is a short open normal winning, it is set to ON in step S3807 of the normal variation start processing of FIG. 82. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a short open normal winning. When the short open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the processing to step S3906, and when the short open normal winning flag is set to OFF (step S3902: No), that is, when the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a miss, the MPU 41 moves the processing to step S3911.

<Steps S3906 and S3907>
If the short open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the value of the opening counter to a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric device 315b in the short open normal winning game (the time during which the game ball 99 can enter the second winning hole 315) (step S3906). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open normal winning flag to OFF (step S3907), and the process proceeds to step S3908.

<Steps S3908 to S3910>
When the result of the regular winning lottery is a win, if the flag indicating the type of regular winning (long open regular winning flag or short open regular winning flag) is set to OFF (step S3904 or S3907), the MPU 41 opens the electric role 315b to allow the game ball 99 to enter the second winning hole 315 (step S3908). Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role opening command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric role 315b is open (step S3909), and sets the electric role opening flag indicating that the electric role 315b is open to ON (step S3910), and proceeds to step S3911.

The electric reel opening command is sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 79) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, when the sound lamp control device 5 receives the electric reel opening command, if the result of the lottery in the regular winning lottery is a long opening regular winning, a process is executed to start the electric reel long opening effect (see FIG. 87(A)) in the pattern display unit 341 based on the electric reel opening command in step S4010 of the command determination process in FIG. 84 described later. This electric reel long opening effect is an effect that clearly indicates or suggests to the player that the electric reel 315b has been long opened by the execution of a long opening regular winning game.

<Step S3911>
When the result of the regular winning lottery is a winning one and a process such as opening the electric device 315b is executed (steps S3908 to S3910), or when the result of the regular winning lottery is a winning one (when the long opening regular winning flag and the short opening regular winning flag are set to off (when the result of the regular winning lottery is a losing one) (steps S3902 and S3905 are both No)), the MPU 41 sets to off the regular winning pattern change stop display flag, which indicates that the regular pattern has been stopped and displayed (the regular winning game has ended) (step S3911), and terminates the regular winning game control process.

<Step S3912>
When the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S3901: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the electric role open flag, which is set to on when the electric role 315b is opened in step S3910 of the normal map winning game control processing, is set to on (step S3912). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the normal map winning game is being executed. When the electric role open flag is set to on (step S3912: Yes), that is, when the normal map winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3913. On the other hand, when the electric role open flag is set to off (step S3912: No), that is, when the normal map winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 ends the normal map winning game control processing.

<Steps S3913 and S3914>
When the electric role open flag is set to ON (step S3912: Yes), that is, when a normal winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening counter set in step S3903 or S3906 of the normal winning game control process (step S3913), and judges whether the value of the opening counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S3914). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is the timing to close the electric role 315b. When the value of the opening counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3914: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to close the electric role 315b, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3915. On the other hand, when the value of the opening counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3914: No), that is, when it is not the timing to close the electric role 315b, the MPU 41 ends the normal winning game control process.

<Step S3915>
If the value of the opening counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3914: Yes), that is, if it is time to close the electric role 315b, the MPU 41 closes the electric role 315b to restrict the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 (step S3915). Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role closing command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric role 315b has been closed (step S3916), and sets the electric role open flag indicating that the electric role 315b is open to OFF (step S3917), and ends the game control process for the normal winning.

The electric reel close command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 79) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, in the voice lamp control device 5 that has received the electric reel close command, if the lottery result in the regular winning lottery is a long-open regular winning lottery, based on the electric reel close command, in step S4023 of the command determination process in FIG. 86 described below, a process is executed to end the electric reel long-open performance in the pattern display unit 341.

[Processing of voice and lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 5 executes the sub timer interrupt process and the like in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, but the command determination process of this embodiment differs in part from that of the first embodiment described above. In the following, the command determination process of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 84 to 100, focusing on the differences from the command determination process in the first embodiment described above.

[Command Judgment Process]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, a process is executed to control the performance to be performed in the symbol display unit 341 or the like depending on the type of the received command.

Here, Figures 84 to 86 are flowcharts showing an example of the command determination process procedure of this embodiment.

<Step S4001>
84, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received (step S4001). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S4001: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4002. If the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S4001: No), the command determination process ends.

<Step S4002>
When a command is received (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S4002). When the MPU 51 receives a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4003, and when the received command is not a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S4002: No), the process proceeds to step S4007.

The normal pattern variation pattern command includes information regarding the normal pattern variation display time in the normal pattern display section 361, the lottery result in the normal pattern winning lottery, and the type of support mode (high frequency support mode, low frequency support mode).

<Step S4003>
When a normal map fluctuation pattern command is received (step S4002: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode based on information regarding the type of support mode (high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode) contained in the received normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S4003).

If the MPU 51 is in the high frequency support mode (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. If the MPU 51 is in the high frequency support mode (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 may set a high frequency support mode flag, which indicates that the MPU 51 is in the high frequency support mode, to on and then end the command determination process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode (step S4003: No), i.e., if the MPU 41 is in the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S4004. Note that if the MPU 51 is in the low-frequency support mode (step S4003: No) and the high-frequency support mode flag is set to on, the MPU 51 may set the high-frequency support mode flag to off and then terminate the command determination process.

<Step S4004>
If the high frequency support mode is not selected (step S4003: No), that is, if the low frequency support mode is selected, the MPU 51 judges whether or not a jackpot game is being played (step S4004). Whether or not a jackpot game is being played is judged based on a jackpot game flag that is set to ON when a jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes in FIG. 37) and set to OFF when a jackpot game end command is received (step S2117: Yes in FIG. 37). If the jackpot game is being played (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the command judgment process. On the other hand, if the jackpot game is not being played (step S4004: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4005.

<Step S4005>
If the game is not a big win (step S4004: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the result of the lottery for the regular game to be started this time is a long opening win or not based on the information on the result of the lottery for the regular game to be started this time contained in the regular game variation pattern command (step S4005). If the result of the lottery for the regular game to be started this time is a long opening win (step S4005: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4006. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the regular game to be started this time is not a long opening win (step S4005: No), that is, if the result of the lottery for the regular game to be started this time is a short opening win or a miss, the MPU 51 ends the command judgment process.

<Step S4006>
If the result of the regular winning lottery for the regular game to be started this time is a long opening win (step S4005: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the long opening flag to ON (S4006) and ends the command judgment process. That is, the long opening flag is a flag indicating that the result of the regular winning lottery for the regular game in the regular game state (low frequency support mode) that is not a jackpot game or a high frequency support mode (probability game state, time-saving game state) is a long opening win in which a long opening regular game is executed by allowing the game ball 99 to enter the second winning hole 315 by the long opening of the electric role 315b. This long opening flag is referenced in step S4008 described later when determining whether the opening mode of the second winning hole 315 in the regular winning game in the regular game state is a long opening.

<Step S4007>
If the received command is not a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S4002: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an electric role opening command indicating that the opening of the electric role 315b allows the game ball 99 to enter the second winning hole 315 (the normal map winning game is started) (step S4007). If the received command is a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S4007: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4008, and if the received command is not a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S4007: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4012 in FIG.

<Step S4008>
If the received command is a normal map variation pattern command (step S4007: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the long opening flag, which indicates that the lottery result in the normal map winning lottery is a long opening win, is set to ON (step S4008). If the long opening flag is set to ON (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4009, and if the long opening flag is set to OFF (step S4008: No), that is, if the lottery result in the normal map winning lottery is a short win, the command judgment process is terminated.

<Steps S4009 and S4010>
If the long opening flag is set on (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the long opening flag off (step S4009), executes processing to start the long opening performance of the electric role device (step S4010), and transitions to step S4011.

The long electric role performance is a performance that clearly indicates to the player on the pattern display unit 341 that the electric role 315b is long open. Here, FIG. 87(A) is a diagram showing an example of a screen on the pattern display unit 341 during the long electric role performance. In the example of FIG. 87(A), during the long electric role performance, the pattern display unit 341 displays a text image of "Reserved charge chance in progress" indicating that the second winning hole 315 is long open, and a text image of "Put the ball in the tulip below" encouraging the player to shoot the game ball 99 toward the second winning hole 315. Of course, the long electric role performance is not limited to the example of FIG. 87(A) and may be in other forms. For example, the long electric role performance may display other images such as character images instead of or in addition to the text images, and may execute audio performance by the speaker 26 instead of or in addition to the performance on the pattern display unit 341.

The electric device long opening performance start process is executed when the long opening flag is set to on, but as described above, the long opening flag is not set to on in the jackpot game state, the high probability game state, or the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode). In other words, the electric device long opening performance is executed when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and is not executed in the jackpot game state, the high frequency support mode, or the high probability game state, or the time-saving game state, when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). Of course, the electric device long opening performance may be executed in the high probability game state or the time-saving game state when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

<Step S4011>
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 84, in step S4011, the MPU 51 sets the electric device long opening flag, which indicates that the electric device 315b is long open, to ON, and ends the command judgment process. Note that, when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315, the electric device long opening flag is referred to in step S4017 of Fig. 85 described later in order to determine whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

<Step S4012>
If the received command is not a normal pattern command (step S4007: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a first reserved command (step S4012), as shown in Fig. 85. The first reserved command includes information indicating that the first reserved number N for the first special pattern increases, information on the reserved number N after the increase, and information on the variation pattern (variable display time and the result of the big win lottery) for the increased reserved number.

If the received command is the first pending command (step S4012: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4013; if the received command is not the first pending command (step S4012: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4015.

<Steps S4013 and S4014>
If the received command is the first hold command (step S4012: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the hold information (variation pattern of each hold and jackpot lottery result, number of holds N) related to the first special chart game stored in the RAM 512 (step S4013), executes a hold continuous performance setting process (step S4014), and terminates the command determination process.

The hold continuous performance setting process is a process for setting hold continuous performances that are the same, of the same type, or of the same system, etc., that clearly indicate or suggest the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, for a predetermined hold in the first special pattern hold, in a predetermined number of first special pattern games up to the first special pattern game in which the predetermined hold changes, or in a second special pattern game for a predetermined number of holds that are executed prior to the predetermined hold. Details of the hold continuous performance setting process will be described with reference to Figures 88 to 91.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a reserved continuous performance is executed in succession for a predetermined number of first special pattern games, the performance executed in each first special pattern game is executed in one first special pattern game for one reserved game executed prior to the predetermined reserved game, and this is not strictly speaking a "continuous performance," but for convenience it will be included in the reserved continuous performance.

<Step S4015>
If the received command is not the first reservation command (step S4012: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is the second reservation command (step S4015). The second reservation command includes information indicating that the second reservation number M for the second special game increases, information on the reservation number M after the increase, and information on the fluctuation pattern (variation display time and the result of the big win lottery) for the increased reservation.

If the received command is the second pending command (step S4015: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4016. If the received command is not the second pending command (step S4015: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4021 in FIG. 86.

<Step S4016>
If the received command is the second hold command (step S4015: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the hold information (variation pattern of each hold and jackpot lottery result, number of holds M) related to the second special chart game stored in the RAM 512 (step S4016), and transitions to step S4017.

<Step S4017>
In step S4017, the MPU 51 judges whether the electric role long open flag is set to ON. The electric role long open flag is a flag indicating that the second winning port 315 is long open (long open normal game is being played). Therefore, when the electric role long open flag is set to ON when the MPU 51 receives the second reserved command, it can be judged that the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is triggered by the long opening of the second winning port 315 (execution of the long open normal game). On the other hand, when the electric role long open flag is set to OFF when the MPU 51 receives the second reserved command, it can be judged that the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is not triggered by the long opening of the second winning port 315 (execution of the long open normal game), that is, it is triggered by the short opening of the second winning port 315 (execution of the short open normal game).

If the electric reel length open flag is set to on (step S4017: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4018, and if the electric reel length open flag is set to off (step S4017: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4020.

<Step S4018>
When the long open flag of the electric role is set to ON (step S4017: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the long open winning counter (step S4018) and moves the process to step S4019. In this way, the value of the long open winning counter is added by 1 when the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 while the second winning port 315 is long open (a game with a long open normal pattern is being played) and the reserved number M for the second special pattern game has not reached the upper limit number. On the other hand, the value of the long open winning counter is subtracted by 1 when the second special pattern game is played triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is long open, as described later (step S4349 in FIG. 96). In other words, the value of the long opening winning counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special chart games among the second special chart games triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 while the second winning port 315 is long open (while a long opening normal chart winning game is being executed).

<Step S4019>
In step S4019, the MPU 51 executes a second special chart special effect setting process for executing a second special chart special effect in a second special chart game.

Here, the second special chart special effect is executed on the condition that the electric role long opening flag is set to ON. On the other hand, as described above, the electric role long opening flag is not set to ON in the jackpot game state, the probability game state, or the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), but is set to ON when the result of the regular chart winning lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) is a long opening win. In other words, the second special chart special effect is executed when the game ball 99 is placed in the second winning port 315 in the long opening regular chart winning game, which is executed based on the result of the regular chart winning lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) being a long opening win.

Of course, the performance during the long opening of the electric device may be executed based on the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 during the short opening of the second winning opening 315 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), during the opening of the second winning opening 315 in the probability game state or the time-limited game state.

Here, Fig. 87(B) and Fig. 87(C) are diagrams showing example screens in the pattern display unit 341 during execution of the second special chart special performance. Specifically, Fig. 87(B) is an example screen in the pattern display unit 341 during execution of the second special chart special performance when the reserved continuous performance is not executed after execution of the second special chart special performance, and Fig. 87(C) is an example screen in the pattern display unit 341 during execution of the second special chart special performance when the reserved continuous performance is executed before execution of the second special chart special performance and the reserved continuous performance is executed after execution of the second special chart special performance (see Fig. 73(B)).

In the examples of Figures 87(B) and 87(C), during the execution of the second special chart special performance, the symbol display section 341 displays a text image saying "Reserved charge being released" and a text image saying "If you hit the jackpot while the reserved charge is being released, you will enter a special bonus!".

The text image "Reserved charge open" indicates to the player that the variable display is being executed as a result of the game ball 99 entering the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is long-opened during a long-open normal winning game in normal game mode. This text image "Reserved charge open" is displayed in an area of the pattern display section 341 adjacent to the top of the variable display image 75 and reserved display image 76 described below, which does not obstruct the variable display of the decorative pattern. This makes it possible to clearly indicate or suggest to the player that the second special pattern game corresponding to the variable display image 75 and reserved display image 76 is a second special pattern game for the game ball 99 entering the second winning port 315 during long opening, without obstructing the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The text image "If you hit a jackpot while the reserved charge is open, you will enter a special bonus!" is displayed on the condition that the decorative pattern in the variable display stops and displays a jackpot pattern (for example, a repeating number), and clearly indicates to the player that the type of jackpot that will occur when this condition is met is a special bonus. This text image "If you hit a jackpot while the reserved charge is open, you will enter a special bonus!" is displayed in an area adjacent to the top of the pattern display section 341, which does not obstruct the variable display of the decorative pattern.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the jackpot lottery that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315, if the lottery result is a jackpot, there is no allocation of a normal jackpot, and it will always be a special jackpot (see FIG. 77 (E)). Therefore, in this embodiment, as the second special chart special effect that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 315 in a long-open normal chart winning game in a normal game state, it is possible to clearly indicate that the jackpot type is a special jackpot without interfering with the display of the changing decorative patterns when the lottery result in the jackpot game is a jackpot.

In the example shown in FIG. 87(B) and FIG. 87(C), when the second special pattern special performance is executed, the variable display image 75 and the reserved display image 76 are displayed in the pattern display section 341. The variable display image 75 indicates that it is a variable display for the second special pattern, and the reserved display image 76 indicates that the right to execute the second special pattern is reserved. The variable display image 75 and the reserved display image 76 can be displayed in a manner different from the variable display image and the reserved display image (not shown) when the second special pattern special performance is not executed. In other words, the variable display image 75 and the reserved image 76 when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 during the long opening can be displayed in a manner different from the variable display image and the reserved display image (not shown) when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 during the short opening. In this case, not only is the second special chart special performance executed, but the display mode of the variable display image 75 and the hold display image 76 also makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player that the variable display and hold are for the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 during a long opening, making it easy to distinguish between the variable display and hold for the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 during a short opening.

In addition, the second special chart special effect shown in FIG. 87(C) differs from the second special chart special effect shown in FIG. 87(B) in that a capture image 77 is displayed in the lower left area (area adjacent to the decorative pattern changing display area) that does not obstruct the changing display of the decorative pattern in the pattern display section 341.

The capture image 77 is a display screen of the reserved continuous performance that was executed in the pattern display unit 341 in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the display screen is displayed as an image in which the display screen is reduced (an image with a changed size) while maintaining the appearance of the display screen. This capture image 77 is displayed when the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and the reserved continuous performance is executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance (see FIG. 73 (B)). In other words, the capture image 77 clearly indicates or suggests during the execution of the second special symbol special performance that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance.

In this embodiment, the capture image 77 clearly indicates or suggests that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance. This significantly reduces the possibility that the player will forget that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance, and the player can understand that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance. Therefore, even if the reserved continuous performance is resumed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance, the player is significantly reduced from feeling uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance. This prevents a decrease in the interest of the game caused by the reserved continuous performance being resumed after the end of the second special chart special performance.

In particular, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a long-open regular game, the player is preoccupied for a long time with whether or not the game ball 99 will enter the second winning port 315, compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a short-open regular game. Therefore, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was being performed before the second special game. Also, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a long-open regular game, the game ball 99 is more likely to enter the second winning port 315 (the number of balls entering is large) compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a short-open regular game, so the number of second special games in which the second special performance is performed is larger (the execution time of the second special performance is longer). Therefore, the time from the end of the reserved continuous performance before the execution of the second special performance (the start of the second special performance) to the restart of the reserved continuous performance due to the end of the second special performance is longer, and the player pays more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special performance in which the second special performance is executed is a jackpot, compared to when the first special performance is executed. In this way, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a long-open normal performance, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special performance, compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a short-open normal performance, so the effect of clearly indicating or suggesting that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special performance before the execution of the second special performance during the execution of the second special performance is high.

In addition, since the screen of the reserved continuous performance executed in the pattern display unit 341 in the first special pattern game before the execution of the second special pattern special performance is a reduced image, the type of reserved continuous performance executed in the first special pattern game before the execution of the second special pattern special performance is clearly indicated or suggested, and the type of reserved continuous performance executed in the first special pattern game after the end of the second special pattern special performance is clearly indicated or suggested. For example, in this embodiment, although details will be described later, four types of reserved continuous performances are set as the types of same color pattern performance, chance eye performance, mini character performance, and zone performance (mode performance) (see Figures 90 and 91), but in the capture image 77 shown in Figure 87 (C), it is clearly indicated or suggested that a chance eye performance in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the chance eye "113" (see Figure 91 (B)) was executed as a reserved continuous performance in the first special pattern game before the execution of the second special pattern special performance. This allows the player to not only understand that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance, but also to understand the type of reserved continuous performance. Therefore, the player's sense of discomfort about the reserved continuous performance being resumed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance is further reduced, and the decrease in interest in the game caused by the reserved continuous performance being performed before the execution of the second special chart special performance being resumed after the end of the second special chart special performance is further prevented.

In this embodiment, the capture image 77 is displayed in a reduced size in the lower left area of the pattern display section 341, but it is preferable to display the capture image on the entire pattern display section 341 for a certain period of time at either or both the end of the second special pattern special effect and the start of the reserved continuous effect executed after the end of the second special pattern special effect. For example, the capture image may be displayed as a so-called stage change effect in which the stage effect (background effect) in the previous special pattern game is changed in the current special pattern game. In this way, by displaying the capture image on the entire pattern display section 341 for a certain period of time at either or both the end of the second special pattern special effect and the start of the reserved continuous effect executed after the end of the second special pattern special effect, the reserved continuous effect in the first special pattern game can be executed smoothly and without any discomfort.

In this embodiment, the capture image 77 is displayed as a reduced image in the lower left area of the pattern display section 341, but it may be displayed in other areas, for example outside the area where the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner other than the lower left area. In this way, by displaying the capture image 77 as a reduced image outside the area where the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to prevent the display of the capture image 77 from impeding the visibility of the variable display of the decorative patterns.

Also, the capture image 77 may be displayed as it is, without being displayed as a reduced image, so long as the visibility of the changing display of the decorative pattern is not hindered. For example, as described below, when the reserved continuous performance is executed by the stop display of a specific complete miss (same color pattern) or a predetermined complete miss (chance pattern), the specific complete miss (same color pattern) or the predetermined complete miss (chance pattern) is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern, so that the visibility of the changing display of the decorative pattern is prevented from being hindered even if the capture image 77 is displayed as it is, without being reduced. And, when the capture image 77 is displayed as it is, without being reduced, the size of the capture image 77 is set large, so that the player can easily understand that the capture image 77 is being displayed.

In addition, the capture image 77 may be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the second special pattern game as an image with a lower density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) than the image of the first special pattern continuous performance, for example, as an image with a lower density than the decorative pattern, preferably with a density that allows the image of a lower layer than the capture image 77 to be visible, or an image with a density that allows the back side of the capture image 77 to be visible. That is, the capture image 77 may be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as a modified image of the reserved continuous performance executed in the first special pattern game, similar to when it is displayed as a reduced image. In this way, by displaying the capture image 77 as an image with a lower density than the image of the first special pattern continuous performance, that is, by displaying it as a modified image of the reserved continuous performance executed in the first special pattern game, it becomes possible to display the capture image 77 without being restricted by the variable display area of the decorative pattern on the pattern display unit 341. This makes it possible to display the decorative pattern variably displayed on the pattern display unit 341 and the capture image 77 superimposed on it during the second special symbol game, not just outside the variable area of the decorative pattern variably displayed on the pattern display unit 341. By displaying the decorative pattern variably displayed on the pattern display unit 341 and the capture image 77 superimposed on it, it becomes possible for the player to easily view the capture image 77 even when the player is focusing on the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, by displaying the capture image 77 on the pattern display section 341 in the second special pattern game with a density that allows images in layers below the capture image 77 to be visible, or an image with a density that allows the back side of the capture image 77 to be visible, it becomes possible to view the changing display of the decorative pattern even if the capture image 77 is displayed on the front or back side of the decorative pattern. This makes it possible for the player to easily view the capture image 77, even when the player is focusing on the changing display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, since the captured image 77 can be displayed without being restricted by the decorative pattern changing display area in the pattern display section 341, it becomes possible to visually recognize the changing display of the decorative pattern even if the reduction ratio of the captured image 77 is set high, and it becomes possible to visually recognize the changing display of the decorative pattern even when the captured image 77 is displayed as is without being reduced. As a result, even when the captured image 77 is displayed as an image with a lower density than the image of the first special pattern continuous performance, the size of the captured image 77 can be set large, making it possible to ensure sufficient visibility of the captured image 77.

When the capture image 77 is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the second special pattern game with a density that allows images in layers below the capture image 77 to be seen, or with a density that allows the back side of the capture image 77 to be seen, it is also possible to display only the outline of the capture image 77. For example, when the first special pattern continuous performance is displayed by a combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed, such as a chance eye performance or a same color pattern performance (see FIG. 91 (B)), the capture image 77 may be displayed with only the outline that allows the type of decorative pattern to be recognized (only the outline of the number). In this way, when the capture image 77 is displayed as an outline that allows the type of decorative pattern to be recognized, even if the capture image 77 is displayed on the front side or back side of the decorative pattern, the changing display of the decorative pattern can be seen. This makes it possible for the player to easily see the capture image 77, even if the player is focusing on the changing display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the capture image 77 only needs to clearly indicate or suggest that a reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special symbol game before the second special symbol special performance was performed, and that a reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special symbol game after the second special symbol special performance is performed, and there are no particular restrictions on the capture timing in the reserved continuous performance. For example, the capture timing in the reserved continuous performance may be at the start of the reserved continuous performance (when the decorative pattern starts to change), during its execution (while the decorative pattern is changing and being displayed), or at the end (when the decorative pattern stops changing).

In addition, the explicit indication or suggestion that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance, is not limited to the display of the capture image 77, and may be any other method as long as the display of the change in the decorative pattern is visible. For example, the explicit indication or suggestion may be displayed as a specific image different from the capture image 77, such as a text image, an icon image, a character image, or an image combining two or more of these, to indicate that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance. In other words, the explicit indication or suggestion may be displayed as an image that has been changed to an image different from the performance image of the reserved continuous performance performed in the first special symbol game. In this way, the explicit or suggested information is displayed as an image that is changed to a different image from the presentation image of the pending continuous presentation that was being executed in the first special symbol game, making it possible to display the information in various positions on the symbol display unit 341 without impeding the visibility of the changing display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341.

The type of the specific image may also be associated with the type of the reserved continuous performance. In this way, by associating the type of specific image with the type of reserved continuous performance, not only is it possible to know that a reserved continuous performance was being performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance, but it is also possible to know the type of reserved continuous performance that was being performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance from the type of the displayed specific image.

Even when a specific image is displayed to clearly indicate or suggest that a reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special pattern game before the second special pattern special performance is performed, and that a reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special pattern game after the second special pattern special performance is performed, the specific image may be displayed as an image with a lower density than the decorative pattern, preferably an image with a density that allows the image in a layer lower than the capture image 77 to be visible, or an image with a density that allows the back side of the capture image 77 to be visible, or an image with only the outline, and further, even when the specific image is displayed in these display modes, the specific image may be displayed on the front or back of the decorative pattern that is displayed in a variable manner in the second special pattern game, superimposed thereon, or may be displayed outside the variable area of the decorative pattern.

The capture image 77 and the specific image may be displayed during the entire period during which the second special symbol game is being played, or may be displayed during a portion of the period during which the second special symbol game is being played, for example, only for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game, only for a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game, or both for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game and a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game, and there is no particular limitation on the display period of the capture image 77 and the specific image. In addition, the capture image 77 and the specific image do not need to be displayed during all second special symbol games when the second special symbol game is played multiple times in succession, and may be displayed, for example, only for the first second special symbol game, only for the last second special symbol game, or both for the first and last second special symbol games, and the number of second special symbol games in which the capture image 77 and the specific image are displayed may be different from the number of second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special performance is played.

The second special symbol special effect is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 87(B) and 87(C) and may take other forms. For example, the second special symbol special effect may display other images, such as character images, instead of or in addition to text images, and may execute a specified audio effect through the speaker 26 instead of or in addition to the effect on the pattern display unit 341.

The second special effect may be any effect that clearly indicates or suggests that a special privilege will be given to the player when a certain condition is met, and does not necessarily have to be an effect in which the type of the jackpot when the condition is met is that the decorative pattern stops and displays a jackpot pattern (e.g., a repeating number). Examples of the certain condition include the decorative pattern being a reach, or a specific effect being executed. In other words, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines other than those in which the type of the jackpot when the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning port 315 is a jackpot is always a jackpot. For example, the present invention can be applied to ST machines such as V-ST machines and type 1/2 mixed machines, in which the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a gaming ball 99 into the second winning port 315 includes a win other than a jackpot.

<Step S4020>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 85, if the electric role long opening flag is set to OFF (step S4017: No), that is, if the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is triggered by a short opening (execution of a game with a short opening normal figure), the value of the short opening winning counter is incremented by 1 (step S4020), and the command determination process is terminated. In this way, the value of the short opening winning counter is incremented by 1 when the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 in a state where the reserved number M for the second special figure game has not reached the upper limit number when the second winning port 315 is short opening (execution of a game with a short opening normal figure). On the other hand, the value of the short-open winning counter, as will be described in detail later, is used in a performance type setting process for setting the type of performance to be executed in a special chart game when the number of special chart games in which a continuous pending performance is executed is increased by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 during a short opening, in order to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the chance eye performance being executed consecutively as a continuous pending performance in four or more special chart games (wherein a confirmed jackpot performance is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss), in which case the value will be described in detail later (see step S4355 in FIG. 97 and step S4364 in FIG. 98).

<Step S4021>
If the received command is not the second reserved command (step S4015: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an electric role closing command as shown in Fig. 86. The electric role closing command is a command indicating that the electric role 315b is closed, and is set in step S3916 of the normal winning game control process in Fig. 83 executed by the main control device 4 when the electric role 315b is closed.

If the received command is an electric reel close command (step S4021: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4022. If the received command is not an electric reel close command (step S4021: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4026.

<Step S4022>
If the received command is an electric role closing command (step S4021: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the electric role long open flag is set to ON (step S4022). The electric role long open flag indicates that the electric role 315b is long open due to the execution of a long open normal game, and is set to ON in step S4011 of the command judgment process when the electric role open command is received.

If the electric reel length open flag is set to on (step S4022: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4023, and if the electric reel length open flag is set to off (step S4022: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4025.

<Steps S4023 and S4024>
If the electric reel long opening flag is set on (step S4022: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process to end the electric reel long opening presentation (see Figure 87 (A)) which clearly indicates or suggests to the player that the electric reel 315b has been long opened due to the execution of a long opening normal winning game (step S4023), and sets the electric reel long opening flag to off (step S4024), and ends the command judgment process.

<Step S4025>
If the long electric role open flag is set to OFF (step S4022: No), the MPU 51 sets the short open close flag to ON (step S4025) and ends the command determination process. The short open close flag is a flag indicating that the electric role 315b that was short open in the short open normal winning game has been closed. This short open close flag is used to determine whether or not the chance eye performance is executed consecutively for four or more special game plays in steps S4355 and 4356 of the performance type setting process in FIG. 97 by the short opening of the electric role 315b causing the game ball 99 to enter the second winning hole 315.

<Step S4026>
If the received command is not a command to close the electric role object (step S4021: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a variation pattern command. If the received command is a variation pattern command (step S4026: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4027. On the other hand, if the received command is not a variation pattern command (step S4026: No), the MPU 51 executes a process based on other commands (steps S2106 to S2122) and ends the command judgment process.

<Step S4027>
If the received command is a variation pattern command (step S4026: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a performance type setting process for setting a performance type to be executed in the special game (step S4027), and proceeds to step S4028. Details of the performance type setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 93 to 98.

<Step S4028>
In step S4028, the MPU 51 executes a stop symbol combination setting process for setting a stop display combination of decorative symbols in the special symbol game, and proceeds to step S4029. Details of the stop symbol combination setting process will be described later with reference to Figs. 99 and 100.

<Step S4029>
In step S4029, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter, and proceeds to step S4030. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the variable pattern command. The variable display counter is decremented by one in the counter update process in step S2001 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the pattern variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, and the like, based on the variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variable display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S4030>
In step S4030, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for identifying the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 and the content of the performance type (performance pattern type) to the display control device 6, and ends the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the variation type (performance pattern type) set in step S4027 and the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns set in step S4028. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores performance images and decorative pattern variation images corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and performance display in the pattern display section 341 according to the stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns, the variation type, and the performance type corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., three) until a preset variable display time has elapsed, and sequentially stops the variable display of the multiple decorative symbols. During the variable display of the decorative symbols, various types of effects corresponding to the content of the variable type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variable pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc.

[Hold continuous performance setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the hold continuous performance setting process executed in step S4014 of the command determination process in Fig. 85 will be described with reference to Figs. 88 to 91. The hold continuous performance setting process is a process for setting the type of hold continuous performance in a situation where it is possible to start the hold continuous performance. Here, Figs. 88 and 89 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the hold continuous performance setting process.

<Step S4101>
In the reserved continuous performance setting process, in step S4101, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not a jackpot game is being played, that is, whether or not the first special symbol game is executable. Whether or not a jackpot game is being played is judged based on a jackpot game flag that is set to ON when a jackpot game start command is received (step S2106 in FIG. 37: Yes) and set to OFF when a jackpot game end command is received (step S2117 in FIG. 37: Yes). If the MPU 51 is playing a jackpot game (step S4101: Yes), it ends the reserved continuous performance setting process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not playing a jackpot game (step S4101: No), it moves the process to step S4102.

<Step S4102>
If the jackpot is not being played (step S4101: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the high-frequency support mode is active (step S4102). The high-frequency support mode is judged based on a high-frequency support mode flag that is set to ON when the high-frequency support mode is judged to be active when a normal pattern variation command is received, for example.

The reason for determining whether or not the mode is high-frequency support mode in step S4102 is to set the reserved continuous performance to be executed in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, and not executed in the high-frequency support mode, which is the special probability game state or the time-limited game state. Of course, the reserved continuous performance may be executed in either or both of the high-frequency support mode, which is the special probability game state or the time-limited game state.

If the MPU 51 is in the high frequency support mode (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the pending continuous performance setting process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the high frequency support mode (step S4102: No), i.e., if the MPU 51 is in the low frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S4103.

<Step S4103>
If the high frequency support mode is not selected (step S4102: No), that is, if the low frequency support mode is selected, the MPU 51 judges whether the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S4103). The pending continuous performance execution flag is a flag indicating that the pending continuous performance has started, and is set to ON in step S4311 of the performance type setting process in FIG. 94 described later when the pending continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the first special symbol game that is executed next to the first special symbol game in which the pending continuous performance is started.

When the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S4103: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the pending continuous performance setting process since there is no need to set a pending continuous performance since a pending continuous performance is being executed. On the other hand, when the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S4103: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4104.

<Step S4104>
When the reserved continuous effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S4103: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S4104). The special effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the second special effect has started, and is set to ON in step S4336 of the effect type setting process in FIG. 96 described later when the second special effect is scheduled to be executed in the second special effect game executed consecutively after the second special effect game in which the second special effect starts.

When the special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S4104: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the pending continuous effect setting process since there is no need to set the pending continuous effect since the second special chart special effect is being executed. On the other hand, when the special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S4104: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4105.

<Step S4105>
When the special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S4104: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the first reserved number N after the increase is 2 or more when the reserved number of rights to execute the first special symbol game is increased by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314. That is, the MPU 51 sets the reserved continuous effect, with one of the conditions being that there is at least one reserved right for the first special symbol game when the game ball 99 enters the first winning port 314.

If the increased first reserved number N is 2 or more (step S4105: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4106. In other words, the continuous reserved performance can be triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 when the first reserved number N is 1 to 3.

On the other hand, if the first reserved number N after the increase due to the game ball 99 entering the first winning opening 314 is not 2 or more (step S4104: No), the MPU 51 ends the reserved continuous performance setting process. In other words, the reserved continuous performance is not started as a result of the game ball 99 entering the first winning opening 314 when the reserved number N is 0.

<Step S4106>
If the first reserved number N after the increase is 2 or more (step S4105: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the variable display time of the reserved first special symbol game is 30 seconds or more based on the information on the variable pattern (variable display time and the result of the big win lottery) for the increased reserved included in the first reserved command. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the reserved which may be the opportunity to start the reserved continuous performance is the first special symbol game in which a performance with a reach should be executed.

If the variable display time of the first special game corresponding to the increased hold is 30 seconds or more (step S4106: Yes), that is, if the first special game corresponding to the increased hold is one in which a performance involving a reach should be executed, the MPU 51 transitions to step S4107.

On the other hand, if the variable display time of the first special game corresponding to the increased hold is not 30 seconds or more (step S4106: Yes), that is, if the first special game corresponding to the increased hold is one that should be executed as a complete miss without a reach, the MPU 51 transitions to step S4110.

<Steps S4107 to S4109>
If the variable display time of the first special chart game corresponding to the increased hold is 30 seconds or more (step S4106: Yes), that is, if the first special chart game corresponding to the increased hold is one in which a performance involving a reach should be executed, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special chart game corresponding to the increased hold is a jackpot or not based on information regarding the variable pattern for the increased hold (variable display time and result of the jackpot lottery) contained in the first hold command (step S4107).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game corresponding to the increased number of reserved balls is a jackpot (step S4107: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a reserved continuous performance setting process based on the reserved continuous performance pattern type setting table for the jackpot performance (see FIG. 90) described below according to the first reserved number N (step S4108), and transitions the process to step S4111 in FIG. 89.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game corresponding to the increased number of holds is not a jackpot (step S4107: No), i.e., if a miss reach performance should be executed, the MPU 51 executes a hold continuous performance setting process based on the hold continuous performance pattern type setting table for miss reach (see FIG. 90) described below according to the first hold number N (step S4109), and transitions to step S4111 in FIG. 89.

<Step S4110>
If the variable display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is not 30 seconds or more (step S4106: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is one in which a complete miss performance without a reach should be executed, the MPU 51 executes a hold continuous performance setting process based on the hold continuous performance pattern type setting table for a complete miss reach described below (see Figure 90) according to the first hold number N (step S4110), and transitions to step S4111 of Figure 89.

Here, Fig. 90(A) to Fig. 90(C) are diagrams showing an example of a continuous hold performance pattern type setting table. Specifically, Fig. 90(A) is a continuous hold performance pattern type setting table used when the first hold number N after the increase is 4, Fig. 90(B) is a continuous hold performance pattern type setting table used when the first hold number N after the increase is 3, and Fig. 90(C) is a continuous hold performance pattern type setting table used when the first hold number N after the increase is 2.

As shown in Fig. 90(A) to Fig. 90(C), there are four types of reserved continuous performance patterns: same-color pattern performance, chance eye performance, mini character performance, and zone performance (mode performance). In Fig. 90(A) to Fig. 90(C), "same-color pattern three times" means that the same-color pattern performance is executed in three consecutive first special pattern games, "same-color pattern two times" means that the same-color pattern performance is executed in two consecutive first special pattern games, and "same-color pattern one time" means that the same-color pattern performance is executed only in one first special pattern game. Similarly, "chance eye X times" (X is an integer from 1 to 4), "mini character performance X times" (X is an integer from 1 to 3), and "zone performance X times" (X is an integer from 1 to 3) mean that the chance eye performance, mini character performance, or zone performance is executed in X first special pattern games. In other words, "XX times" means that a single type of reserved continuous performance is executed in succession in a predetermined number of first special game plays. Of course, the reserved continuous performance is not limited to a single type of reserved continuous performance being executed in succession in a predetermined number of first special game plays, and multiple types of reserved continuous performances (for example, a mini character performance and a zone performance) may be executed simultaneously in one first special game play, as long as the combination is executable as a performance.

Regarding the number of first reserved balls N, the chance eye effect is set to be the most likely to be set compared to other reserved consecutive effects such as the same color pattern effect. On the other hand, the zone effect (mode effect) is set to be the least likely to be set among the reserved consecutive effects.

In addition, in Figures 90(A) to 90(C), "-" means that the continuous hold performance is not set. The "-" where the continuous hold performance is not set accounts for the majority of the random number allocation, regardless of the first hold number N. Therefore, the frequency (probability) of the continuous hold performance being executed is lower than the frequency (probability) of the continuous hold performance not being executed. Furthermore, the "-" where the continuous hold performance is not set is set with more random number allocation the smaller the first hold number N. In other words, the smaller the first hold number N, the lower the frequency (probability) of the continuous hold performance being executed, and the higher the first hold number N, the higher the frequency (probability) of the continuous hold performance being executed.

Here, the same color pattern effect, chance eye effect, mini character effect, and zone effect (mode effect) are effects that clearly indicate or suggest the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special pattern game for the hold that triggered the start of the hold continuous effect will be a jackpot. For example, the "chance eye 4 times" in which the chance eye effect is executed consecutively in four first special pattern games can be set only when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot when the first hold number N is 4 (see FIG. 90 (A)). Since it is not set when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss (miss reach or complete miss), "chance eye 4 times" is a jackpot confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. On the other hand, all hold continuous effects other than "chance eye 4 times" are effects that suggest the expectation of a jackpot. In other words, the same color pattern effect, mini character effect, and zone effect (mode effect), which are hold continuous effects other than "chance eye 4 times", even if they are executed four or more times, do not become a jackpot confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

In this way, the effect clearly indicates or suggests the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special game for the hold that triggered the start of the continuous hold effect will be a jackpot, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the continuous hold effect will be displayed, and when the continuous hold effect is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the jackpot lottery will transition to a special game state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, except for the "4 chances" that indicate a big win, when the number of first special pattern games in which the consecutive reserved effects are executed is the same, the chance of a big win for the consecutive reserved effects is set to, for example, the lowest for the mini character effect, the same color pattern effect and the chance effect are set to the same level (the same or nearly the same), and the highest for the zone effect (mode effect).

In this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be performed consecutively in multiple first special symbol games, in the second special symbol game that is performed based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 by the execution of a short-open normal symbol winning game, the reserved continuous performance continues to be performed without the second special symbol special performance being performed. In this case, if the number of first special symbol games in which the reserved continuous performance is performed and the number of second special symbol games in which the reserved continuous performance is performed are added together, the number of special symbol games in which the reserved continuous performance is performed may be four or more.

Here, if a chance eye effect is being executed as the reserved continuous effect, when the number of times the special chart game in which the reserved continuous effect is executed reaches four or more times, as described above, the reserved continuous effect becomes a jackpot confirmed effect that indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Therefore, if the results of the jackpot lottery for the special chart game executed from the fourth time onwards after the chance eye effect as a specified reserved continuous effect has started do not include a jackpot, if the chance eye effect is executed four or more times in succession, an inconsistency will occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the reserved continuous effect.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a chance eye effect is being executed as the reserved continuous effect, if the number of special symbol games in which the reserved continuous effect is executed is four or more, before the chance eye effect is executed in four consecutive special symbol games, the reserved continuous effect is changed to an effect other than a chance eye effect, for example, a same-color pattern effect that does not become a jackpot confirmation effect indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, even if it is executed four or more times. This prevents inconsistencies from occurring between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the reserved continuous effect.

As mentioned above, if a reserved continuous performance other than the chance eye performance is executed in four or more consecutive first special game plays, it will not be a guaranteed big win performance, but will be executed as a performance suggesting the likelihood of a big win. Therefore, even if the number of special game plays in which a reserved continuous performance is executed is four or more, if a performance other than the chance eye performance is executed as a reserved continuous performance, the same type of reserved continuous performance will continue to be executed without changing the type of reserved continuous performance. Of course, even if the type of reserved continuous performance is one that will not cause any inconvenience if executed in succession in a predetermined number of special game plays (for example, four times) or more, the type of reserved continuous performance may be changed before the scheduled number of special game plays are executed.

Here, the jackpot expectation rate of the chance eye effect, which is the predetermined reserved continuous effect before the change, and the same-color pattern effect, which is the specific reserved continuous effect after the change, is set to be the same or approximately the same. For example, the difference in jackpot expectation rate between the chance eye effect and the same-color pattern effect is set to be -5% or more and +5% or less, and the difference in jackpot expectation rate between the chance eye effect and the same-color pattern effect is set to be -2.5% or more and +2.5% or less. In other words, in this embodiment, the jackpot expectation rate of the predetermined reserved continuous effect before the change and the specific reserved continuous effect after the change is set to be the same or approximately the same.

In this way, the jackpot expectation rate of the specified reserved continuous performance before the change and the specific reserved continuous performance after the change are set to be the same or nearly the same. Therefore, when the type of reserved continuous performance is changed, for example when it is changed from a chance eye performance to a same color pattern performance, the jackpot expectation rate of the reserved continuous performance after the change does not decrease significantly. This prevents a decrease in the player's interest due to a decrease in the jackpot expectation rate caused by the change in the reserved continuous performance, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

As described above, the selection rate of the chance eye effect, which is a predetermined consecutive hold effect, is set higher than the selection rate of the same color pattern effect, which is a specific consecutive hold effect. That is, in this embodiment, the selection rate of the predetermined consecutive hold effect before the change is set higher than the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold effect after the change. In this way, by setting the selection rate of the predetermined consecutive hold effect before the change higher than the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold effect after the change, inconveniences caused by the consecutive display of predetermined consecutive hold effects (e.g. chance eye effects) which have a high probability of causing inconveniences are appropriately avoided.

In addition, when changing the type of the reserved continuous performance, not only to prevent inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the reserved continuous performance, but also when changing the type of the reserved continuous performance, if the variable display time for the reserved first special game that triggered the start of the reserved continuous performance is long, that is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the reserved is a jackpot or a reach performance with a high jackpot expectation is executed, the type of the reserved continuous performance may be changed so that the specific reserved continuous performance type after the change has a higher jackpot expectation than the type of the predetermined reserved continuous performance before the change. For example, if the predetermined reserved continuous performance before the change is a mini character performance with the lowest jackpot expectation, the specific reserved continuous performance after the change may be set to a chance eye performance, same color pattern performance, or zone performance (mode performance) with a higher jackpot expectation than the mini character performance, and if the predetermined reserved continuous performance before the change is a chance eye performance or same color pattern performance, the specific reserved continuous performance after the change may be set to a zone performance (mode performance) with a higher jackpot expectation than the chance eye performance and same color pattern performance. In this case, the difference in the probability of winning between the specific consecutive reserved performance after the change and the specific consecutive reserved performance before the change is set to, for example, 10% or more, and preferably 25% or more.

In this way, by changing the type of the continuous hold performance so that the specific continuous hold performance after the change has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the predetermined continuous hold performance before the change, the expectation of a jackpot suggested to the player by changing the type of the continuous hold performance is improved. As a result, when a predetermined continuous hold performance is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the type of the specific continuous hold performance will be changed, and when the type of the continuous hold performance is changed from the predetermined continuous hold performance to a specific continuous hold performance, in the special game in which the changed specific continuous hold performance is executed, the player can enjoy the progress of the special game while having high hopes that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the zone effect (mode effect) with the highest jackpot expectation has the lowest selection rate among the consecutive hold effects. In other words, in this embodiment, when the type of consecutive hold effects is changed to a specific consecutive hold effect with a high jackpot expectation, such as when the type of consecutive hold effects is changed from a chance eye effect or same color pattern effect, which is a specific consecutive hold effect, to a zone effect (mode effect), which is a specific consecutive hold effect, the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold effects with a low jackpot expectation before the change is high, and the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold effects with a high jackpot expectation after the change is set high.

By setting the selection rate of the predetermined consecutive hold performance with a low expectation of a jackpot before the change high and the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold performance with a high expectation of a jackpot after the change high, the selection rate of the predetermined consecutive hold performance before the change is set high, so that the frequency with which the predetermined consecutive hold performance before the change is executed increases, and the player has more opportunities to expect that the consecutive hold performance will be changed to the specific consecutive hold performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, further improving the interest of the game, and by setting the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold performance after the change low, the frequency with which the specific consecutive hold performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed decreases, and the player's joy when the consecutive hold performance is changed to the specific consecutive hold performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is further increased, and the interest of the game is further improved.

The timing for changing the type of the reserved continuous performance may be any timing that does not cause an inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the predetermined reserved continuous performance, for example, between the special game played next to the special game played at the stage when it is determined that an inconsistency may occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the reserved continuous performance, and the special game in which an inconsistency occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the reserved continuous performance (for example, the special game played for the fourth time from the start of the predetermined reserved continuous performance). In other words, the timing for changing the type of the reserved continuous performance may be either the first special game or the second special game, as long as an inconsistency does not occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the reserved continuous performance.

Here, if the timing for changing the type of the reserved continuous performance is the first special symbol game, by continuously executing the reserved continuous performance, the occurrence of any inconvenience that may occur in the first special symbol game that is resumed after the second special symbol game ends can be avoided.

In addition, by changing the type of the reserved continuous performance in the first special symbol game that is resumed after the end of the second special symbol game, in the event that an inconvenience would arise from continuing to execute the reserved continuous performance before the change, the number of special symbol games in which the reserved continuous performance before the change is displayed consecutively is ensured to be as large as possible. In this way, by ensuring the maximum number of special symbol games in which the reserved continuous performance before the change is displayed consecutively, even in the event that an inconvenience would arise from continuing to execute the reserved continuous performance before the change, the player can enjoy the reserved continuous performance before the change to the maximum extent.

On the other hand, if the timing for changing the type of reserved continuous performance is the second special chart game, and if an inconvenience occurs due to the consecutive execution of the predetermined reserved continuous performance before the change, the inconvenience is avoided when the inconvenience occurs in the second special chart game, and even if an inconvenience occurs in the first special chart game that is resumed after the second special chart game ends, the inconvenience is avoided in advance before the first special chart game is resumed.

In addition, if the timing for changing the type of reserved continuous performance is the next special game to be executed after the special game being executed at the stage where it is determined that an inconsistency may occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the specified reserved continuous performance, the inconvenience is immediately avoided from occurring as soon as it is understood that an inconvenience will occur by executing the specified reserved continuous performance in succession.

On the other hand, in the case of a special game in which the timing of the change in the type of the consecutive reserved performance causes a mismatch between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the specified consecutive reserved performance, the player's expectations can be maintained to the maximum extent by the consecutive display of the specified consecutive reserved performance. Therefore, the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the change of the specified consecutive reserved performance to a specific consecutive reserved performance is reduced, and a decrease in the interest in the game is prevented.

Of course, the type of the continuous reserved performance may be changed even if the number of special game plays in which the continuous reserved performance is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, four times) when a continuous reserved performance other than a chance eye performance is being executed. In other words, the type of the continuous reserved performance may be changed even if no inconvenience occurs when a single type of continuous reserved performance is executed in succession more than a predetermined number of times. In this way, by changing the type of the continuous reserved performance when no inconvenience occurs when a single type of continuous reserved performance is executed in succession more than a predetermined number of times, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored when a single type of continuous reserved performance is executed in succession in many special game plays, and therefore to prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by a single type of continuous reserved performance being executed in succession in many special game plays.

In addition, there are no restrictions on the combination of the type of reserved continuous performance before the change and the type of reserved continuous performance after the change, but it should be determined within a range that does not cause inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the reserved continuous performance. For example, if a same-color pattern performance is set as the reserved continuous performance, and the number of special game plays in which the reserved continuous performance is executed reaches a predetermined number of four or more times, the reserved continuous performance may be changed to a performance other than a same-color pattern performance, such as a chance eye performance.

In addition, the change in the continuous hold effect is not limited to one time, but may be made multiple times.

In this case, the same-color pattern effect is an effect in which all decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed are the same color, and the decorative pattern combinations displayed are specific complete misses other than jackpot pattern combinations (for example, double numbers where all decorative patterns are the same) and miss reach patterns (for example, pattern combinations where the left and right patterns are the same and only the center pattern is different).

For example, as shown in FIG. 91(A), when the decorative symbols of "3" and "7" are set to red, the decorative symbols of "1", "5" and "9" that are odd numbers other than "3" and "7" are set to green, and the decorative symbols of "2", "4", "6" and "8" that are even numbers are set to blue, there are many combinations of same-color symbols that are completely out of alignment, but it is preferable that the combination of same-color symbols as a specific completely out of alignment that is stopped and displayed in the same-color symbol performance is a distinctive combination of symbols. For example, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a combination of same-color symbols as a specific completely out of alignment that is stopped and displayed in the same-color symbol performance is a combination of symbols in which the left and center symbols are the same number, and the right symbol is different from the left and center symbols. In this way, the specific completely out of alignment as a combination of same-color symbols that is stopped and displayed in the same-color symbol performance is a distinctive combination, so that the player can easily understand that the same-color symbol performance has been executed. In addition, in the same-color pattern presentation, when a specific combination of same-color patterns is displayed as a complete miss, a specific special sound unique to the execution of the same-color pattern presentation may be output from the speaker 26. This also allows the player to easily understand that the same-color pattern presentation has been executed.

The chance eye effect is an effect in which a chance eye is displayed as a decorative pattern that is a predetermined complete miss that is not the same color. The predetermined complete miss (chance eye) displayed in the chance eye effect is preferably a distinctive pattern combination for the same reason as in the same color pattern effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a predetermined complete miss (chance eye) displayed in the chance eye effect may be a pattern combination in which all decorative patterns are odd numbers, the left pattern and the center pattern are the same number, and the right pattern is different from the left pattern and the center pattern. Also, in the chance eye effect, when a predetermined complete miss (chance eye) is displayed, a specific special sound may be output from the speaker 26 when the chance eye effect is executed so that the player can easily understand that the chance eye effect has been executed.

The mini-character performance is a performance in which a mini-character (mini character) is displayed on the pattern display unit 341. The mini-character is, for example, a mini-character that appears in the performance of the gaming machine 10, or a character that has a larger head, such as by making the character two-headed. In the mini-character performance, there is no particular restriction on the display mode of the mini-character, but when the mini-character performance is executed in a performance other than the continuous hold performance, it is preferable that the mini-character is displayed in a manner that can be distinguished from other mini-character performances. Examples of the mini-character performance in the continuous hold performance include a performance in which the mini-character crosses the pattern display unit 341 to the left and right, up and down, or diagonally. In addition, when a hold display image is displayed for the first hold of the first special chart game, a mini-character may be displayed near the hold display image to suggest that the mini-character performance is a performance related to the first hold for the first special chart game.

A zone effect (mode effect) is an effect that indicates that a reach effect or an effect with a high probability of winning will be executed by executing a special background effect (for example, a background effect including a text image such as "XX Zone" ("XX Mode")) executed in the zone effect (mode effect) as a background effect of a decorative pattern.

In this embodiment, the reserved continuous performance includes a same-color pattern performance and a chance eye performance. The same-color pattern performance and the chance eye performance are performances in which decorative patterns (e.g. numbers) are stopped and displayed at specific completely different numbers as same-color patterns or at specific different numbers as chance eyes, and the player can easily understand that the reserved continuous performance is being performed by the combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed. Therefore, when a reserved continuous performance is performed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the reserved continuous performance will be performed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, when the reserved continuous performance is executed by stopping and displaying a specific complete miss or a predetermined complete miss, as described above, if the display of the capture image 77 clearly indicates or suggests that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, it becomes possible to display the capture image 77 in various forms without impeding the visibility of the change in the decorative pattern in the second special symbol game. For example, as the capture image 77, the image of the reserved continuous performance in the first special symbol game can be displayed in its original form, and it is also possible to display the image of the reserved continuous performance in the first special symbol game as a reduced image, an image with reduced density, an image with outlines, etc. As a result, it is possible to clearly indicate or suggest that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance by various effects, which increases the player's interest in the game and improves the excitement of the game.

<Step S4111>
Returning to the explanation of the procedure of the hold continuous performance setting process, when any of the setting processes of steps S4108 to S4110 is completed, as shown in Fig. 89, the MPU 51 judges whether or not a setting for executing the hold continuous performance is made in the setting process (step S4111). If a setting for executing the hold continuous performance is made (step S4111: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4112, and if a setting for executing the hold continuous performance is not made (step S4111: No), the MPU 51 ends the hold continuous performance setting process.

<Step S4112>
When the setting for executing the reserved continuous performance is made (step S4111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the reserved continuous performance setting flag indicating that the setting for executing the reserved continuous performance is made to ON (step S4112), and proceeds to step S4113. The reserved continuous performance setting flag is referenced in step S4302 of the performance type setting process in FIG. 93 to determine whether or not this is the first special game that starts the reserved continuous performance.

<Step S4113>
In step S4113, the MPU 51 sets a reserved continuous performance execution count counter that indicates the remaining number of first special symbol games for executing the reserved continuous performance. For example, when "X chances" (X is a positive integer from 1 to 4) is set as the reserved continuous performance, the MPU 51 sets "X" as the value of the reserved continuous performance execution count counter.

<Steps S4114 and S4115>
When the reserved continuous performance execution counter is set, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the chance eye performance is set as the reserved continuous performance (step S4114). When the chance eye performance is set as the reserved continuous performance (step S4114: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance eye flag indicating that the chance eye performance is set as the reserved continuous performance to ON (step S4115), and ends the reserved continuous performance setting process. On the other hand, when the chance eye performance is not set as the reserved continuous performance (step S4114: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4116.

<Steps S4116 and S4117>
If the chance eye effect is not set as the reserved continuous effect (step S4114: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the same color pattern effect is set as the reserved continuous effect (step S4116). If the same color pattern effect is set as the reserved continuous effect (step S4116: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a same color pattern flag indicating that the same color pattern effect is set as the reserved continuous effect on (step S4117), and ends the reserved continuous effect setting process. On the other hand, if the same color pattern effect is not set as the reserved continuous effect (step S4116: No), that is, if the mini character effect or zone effect (mode effect) is set as the reserved continuous effect, the MPU 51 ends the reserved continuous effect setting process.

[Second special chart special effect setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the second special symbol special effect setting process executed in step S4019 of the command determination process in Fig. 85 will be described with reference to Fig. 92. The second special symbol special effect setting process is a process for enabling the second special symbol special effect to be started in the second special symbol game executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 by the long opening of the electric role object 315b in the long opening normal symbol game in the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode. Here, Fig. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special symbol special effect setting process.

<Step S4201>
In the second special effect setting process, in step S4201, the MPU 51 first judges whether the second special effect setting flag is set to ON. The second special effect setting flag is a flag for enabling the second special effect to be started in the second special effect game, and is set to ON in step S4203 described later. In addition, the second special effect setting flag is referenced in step S4335 of the effect type setting process in FIG. 96 described later to judge whether the second special effect is to be started in the second special effect game.

If the second special effect setting flag is set to on (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the second special effect setting process, and if the second special effect setting flag is set to off (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4202.

<Steps S4202 and S4203>
When the second special chart special effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the second special chart special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S4202). The second special chart special effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the second special chart special effect is started, and is set to ON in step S4311 of the effect type setting process in FIG. 94 described later when the second special chart special effect is executed in the next second special chart game. In addition, the second special chart special effect execution flag is referred to in step S4303 of the effect type setting process in FIG. 93 described later to judge whether the second special chart special effect is executed in the second special chart game.

When the second special effect execution flag is set to on (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the second special effect setting process. On the other hand, when the second special effect execution flag is set to off (step S4202: No), the MPU 51 sets the second special effect setting flag to on (step S4203) and ends the second special effect setting process. In this way, by setting the second special effect setting flag to on, in the effect type setting process of FIG. 94 described later, it becomes possible to start the second special effect in the second special effect game that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 by the electric role 315b being long-opened in the long-open normal game in the normal game state.

[Performance type setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the effect type setting process executed in step S4027 of the command determination process in Fig. 86 will be described with reference to Figs. 93 to 98. The effect type setting process is a process for setting the effect type for the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game executed when a variable pattern command is received. Here, Figs. 93 to 98 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the effect type setting process.

<Step S4301>
In the effect type setting process, in step S4301, the MPU 51 first judges whether the second reserved number M for the second special symbol game is 0 or not. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when there is a reservation for the second special symbol game, the second special symbol game is executed in priority to the first special symbol game. That is, by judging whether the second reserved number M for the second special symbol game is 0 or not, it is judged whether to execute the second special symbol game or the first special symbol game as the change. Then, when the second reserved number M for the second special symbol game is 0 (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4302 and executes the process of setting the effect for the first special symbol game. On the other hand, when the second reserved number M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S4301: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4335 of FIG. 96 and executes the process of setting the effect for the second special symbol game.

<Step S4302>
When the second reserved number M for the second special symbol game is 0 (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the reserved continuous performance setting flag is set to ON (step S4302). The reserved continuous performance setting flag is a flag indicating that the reserved continuous performance is set to be executed, and is set to ON in step S4112 when the reserved continuous performance is set to be executed in the reserved continuous performance setting process of FIG. 89 executed when the first reserved command is received.

Then, if the reserved continuous performance setting flag is set to on (step S4302: Yes), i.e., if the first reserved continuous performance is to be executed in the first special symbol game that is executed by changing, the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4305 in FIG. 94. On the other hand, if the reserved continuous performance setting flag is set to off (step S4302: No), i.e., if the first reserved continuous performance is not to be executed in the first special symbol game that is executed by changing, the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4303.

<Step S4303>
If the reserved continuous performance setting flag is set to OFF (step S4302: No), that is, if the first reserved continuous performance is not executed in the first special symbol game executed by the change, the MPU 51 judges whether the reserved continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S4303). The reserved continuous performance execution flag is a flag indicating that the reserved continuous performance has started, and is set to ON in step S4311 of the performance type setting process in FIG. 94 described later when the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the first special symbol game executed next to the first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous performance is started.

Then, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to on (step S4302: Yes), i.e., if a pending continuous performance is executed in the first special symbol game executed as the corresponding change, the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4320 in FIG. 95. On the other hand, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to off (step S4302: No), i.e., if a pending continuous performance is not executed in the first special symbol game executed as the corresponding change, the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4304.

<Step S4304>
If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to off (step S4303: No), i.e., if a pending continuous performance is executed in the first special chart game executed as the change, a normal performance is set, i.e., the performance type (performance pattern type) is set similar to that of the first embodiment described above, and the performance type setting process is terminated.

<Steps S4305 to S4308>
When the reserved continuous performance setting flag is set to ON (step S4302: Yes), that is, when the first reserved continuous performance is executed in the first special symbol game executed by the change, as shown in FIG. 94, the MPU 51 sets the reserved continuous performance setting flag to OFF (step S4305), and sets the reserved continuous performance set in any of steps S4108 to S4110 of FIG. 88 as the reserved continuous performance for the first special symbol game executed as the change (step S4306). Then, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining execution count of the reserved continuous performance (step S4307), and judges whether the value of the reserved continuous performance execution count counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S4308). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the first special symbol game executed as the change is the last first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed.

Then, if the value of the reserved continuous performance execution counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4308: Yes), i.e., if the first special chart game executed as the corresponding variation is the last first special chart game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4314. On the other hand, if the value of the reserved continuous performance execution counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4308: No), i.e., if the first special chart game executed as the corresponding variation is not the last first special chart game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4309.

<Steps S4309 and S4310>
If the value of the reserved continuous performance execution counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4308: No), that is, if the first special symbol game executed as the change is not the last first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the change is a jackpot or not (step S4309). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether a jackpot game will be executed or the reserved first special symbol game will be executed after the change ends.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the change is a jackpot (step S4309: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is executed after the change ends, the MPU 51 clears the reserved continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining number of times the reserved continuous performance is executed (step S4310) to make the first special symbol game executed as the change the last first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed, and transitions to step S4314. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the change is not a jackpot (step S4309: No), i.e., if the reserved first special symbol game is executed after the change ends, the MPU 51 transitions to step S4311.

<Step S4311>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special chart game executed as the change is not a jackpot (step S4309: No), that is, if the first special chart game that was reserved is executed after the end of the change, the MPU 51 sets the reserved continuous performance execution flag to on (step S4311), indicating that a reserved continuous performance has started, and transitions to step S4312.

<Steps S4312 and S4313>
When the reserved continuous performance execution flag indicating that the reserved continuous performance has started is set to ON, it is determined whether or not the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S4312). The chance eye flag is a flag indicating that the chance eye performance is set as the reserved continuous performance, and is set to ON when the chance eye performance is set as the reserved continuous performance in step S4115 of the reserved continuous performance setting process in FIG. 89 which is executed when the first reserved command is received.

Then, if the chance eye flag is set to on (step S4312: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the chance eye count counter, which indicates the number of times the first special chart play of the chance eye effect was executed as the pending continuous effect (step S4313), and ends the effect type setting process.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of first special symbol games in which the chance eye effect is executed consecutively is four times if the result of the reserved jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the execution of the reserved continuous effect is a jackpot, and three times if it is a miss (see FIG. 90). Therefore, by referencing the value of the chance eye count counter, inconsistencies are prevented between the result of the reserved jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the execution of the reserved continuous effect and the number of first special symbol games in which the chance eye effect is executed as the reserved continuous effect.

On the other hand, if the chance eye flag is set to off (step S4312: No), the MPU 51 ends the effect type setting process.

<Steps S4314 to S4316>
If the first special chart game executed as the variation is the last first special chart game in which the pending continuous performance is executed (step S4308 or step S4309 is Yes), that is, if the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining number of times the pending continuous performance is executed is 0, it is determined whether or not the chance eye flag, which indicates that a chance eye performance is set as the pending continuous performance, is set on (step S4314).

If the chance eye flag is set to on (step S4314: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance eye flag to off (step S4315), and sets the final chance eye flag to on (step S4316), indicating that the chance eye effect executed as the pending continuous effect in the variation is the last chance eye effect, and ends the effect type setting process. The final chance eye flag is referenced to determine whether or not to set a chance eye as the stopping symbol combination in step S4402 in the stopping symbol combination setting process in Figure 99 described below.

On the other hand, if the chance flag is set to off (step S4314: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4317.

<Steps S4317 to S4319>
If the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S4314: No), it is determined whether or not the same color pattern flag, which indicates that the same color pattern effect is set as the reserved continuous effect, is set to ON (step S4317). If the same color pattern flag is set to ON (step S4317: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same color pattern flag to OFF (step S4318), and sets the final same color pattern flag, which indicates that the same color pattern effect executed as the reserved continuous effect in the variation is the last same color pattern effect, to ON (step S4319), and ends the effect type setting process. The final same color pattern flag is referenced to determine whether or not to set the same color pattern as the stop pattern combination in step S4406 in the stop pattern combination setting process of FIG. 99 described later.

On the other hand, if the same-color pattern flag is set to off (step S4317: No), i.e., if the last pending continuous effect executed in the variation is not a chance eye effect or a same-color pattern effect, the MPU 51 ends the effect type setting process.

<Step S4320>
If the pending continuous performance execution flag, indicating that the pending continuous performance has started, is set to on (step S4302: Yes), that is, if the pending continuous performance is executed in the first special chart game executed as the corresponding variation, as shown in FIG. 95, the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous performance for the corresponding variation (step S4320) and transitions to step S4321.

The reserved continuous performance for the variable play is set to the reserved continuous performance set in any of steps S4108 to S4110 of the reserved continuous performance setting process in FIG. 88. However, as described below, if a fourth chance eye performance executed as a jackpot confirmation performance can be set even if the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable play is a miss, a process is executed to change the reserved continuous performance executed for the variable play from the chance eye performance to the same color pattern performance in order to prevent inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the reserved continuous performance (step S4362 in FIG. 98).

<Step S4321>
When a pending continuous performance for the variation is set (step S4320), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a chance eye flag, indicating that a chance eye performance is set as the pending continuous performance, is set on (step S4321), and if the chance eye flag is set on (step S4321: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S4322, and if the chance eye flag is set off (step S4321: No), the processing proceeds to step S4325.

<Steps S4322 to S4324>
When the chance eye flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect is set to ON (step S4321: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the chance eye count counter indicating the number of first special symbol games in which the chance eye effect is executed as the reserved continuous effect (step S4322), and judges whether the value of the chance eye count counter after the increment is 4 or not (step S4323). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the change is the first special symbol game in which the fourth chance eye effect is executed as the reserved continuous effect.

If the value of the chance eye count counter after the increment is 4 (step S4323: Yes), the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S4324), and the process proceeds to step S4328. On the other hand, if the value of the chance eye count counter after the increment is not 4 (step S4323: No), the process proceeds to step S4325.

Here, as described above, the upper limit of the value of the chance eye count counter (the number of first special symbol games in which the chance eye effect is executed continuously as the reserved continuous effect) is four times when the result of the reserved jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the execution of the chance eye effect as the reserved continuous effect is a jackpot. On the other hand, the upper limit of the reservation for the first special symbol game is four, and the number of first special symbol games in which the reserved continuous effect is executed continuously is also four. And, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, all the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed as a double number, which is the same, and the chance eye cannot be stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to execute the chance eye in four consecutive first special symbol games, for example, in the high-speed variable game before the reach effect is executed, in the fourth first special symbol game that notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the double number is stopped and displayed via the reach effect. Thus, in this embodiment, when the result of the reserved jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the execution of the reserved continuous performance is a jackpot, and the chance eye performance as the reserved continuous performance is executed in four consecutive first special symbol games, the chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a double number in the fourth first special symbol game. Therefore, in this step S4324, the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to ON in order to temporarily stop and display the chance eye before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a double number. This chance eye temporary stop flag is referenced in step S4409 of FIG. 100 when setting the stop display combination of the decorative symbol for the fourth first special symbol game when the chance eye performance as the reserved continuous performance is executed in four consecutive first special symbol games.

<Step S4325>
When the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S4321: No), or when the value of the chance eye counter after the increment is not 4 (step S4323: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the result of the big win lottery for the first special symbol game, which is the change, is a big win or not (step S4325). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the big win game is executed or the reserved first special symbol game is executed after the change ends, similarly to the above-mentioned step S4309.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the change is a jackpot (step S4325: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game will be executed after the change ends, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4328. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the change is not a jackpot (step S4325: No), i.e., if the reserved first special symbol game will be executed after the change ends, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4326.

<Steps S4326 and S4327>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the change is not a jackpot (step S4325: No), that is, if the reserved first special symbol game is executed after the end of the change, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining execution count of the reserved continuous performance (step S4326). Then, the MPU 51 judges whether the value of the reserved continuous performance execution count counter after subtraction is 0 or not, that is, whether the first special symbol game executed as the game is the last first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed (step S4327).

Then, if the value of the reserved continuous performance execution counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4327: Yes), i.e., if the first special chart game executed as the game is the last first special chart game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4329. On the other hand, if the value of the reserved continuous performance execution counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4327: No), i.e., if the first special chart game executed as the game is not the last first special chart game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 ends the performance type setting process.

<Step S4328>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special chart game executed as the variation is a jackpot (step S4325: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is executed after the end of the variation, the MPU 51 clears the pending continuous performance execution count counter, which indicates the remaining number of times the pending continuous performance is executed (step S4328), so that the first special chart game executed as the variation is the last first special chart game in which the pending continuous performance is executed, and transitions to step S4329.

<Step S4329>
If the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4327: Yes), or if the pending continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining number of times the pending continuous performance is executed is cleared (step S4328), that is, if the first special chart game executed as the game is the last first special chart game in which the pending continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 sets off the pending continuous performance execution flag indicating that the pending continuous performance has started (step S4329), and transitions to processing at step S4330.

<Step S4330>
In step S4330, the MPU 51 judges whether or not a chance eye flag indicating that a chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect is set to ON. If the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S4330: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4331, and if the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S4330: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4333.

<Steps S4331 and S4332>
If the chance eye flag is set on (step S4330: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance eye flag to off (step S4331), clears the chance eye count counter (step S4332), and terminates the performance type setting process.

<Steps S4333 and S4334>
If the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S4330: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the same color pattern flag, which indicates that the same color pattern effect is set as the reserved continuous effect, is set to ON (step S4333). If the same color pattern flag is set to ON (step S4333: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same color pattern flag to OFF (step S4334), and ends the effect type setting process.

On the other hand, if the same-color pattern flag is set to off (step S4330: No), i.e., if the pending continuous effect is not a chance eye effect or a same-color pattern effect, but a mini-character effect or a zone effect (mode effect), the MPU 51 ends the effect type setting process.

<Step S4335>
In step S4301 of FIG. 93, if it is determined that the second reserved number M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S4301: No), when there is a reserved number for the second special symbol game, as shown in FIG. 96, the MPU 51 determines whether the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S4335). The second special symbol special effect setting flag is a flag for starting the second special symbol special effect (see FIG. 87 (B) and FIG. 87 (C)) in the second special symbol executed as the change. This second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to ON in step S4203 of the second special symbol special effect setting process in FIG. 92 when the second reserved command transmitted in response to the game ball 99 entering the second winning hole 315 by the long opening of the second winning hole 315 in the long opening normal symbol game is received.

If the second special effect setting flag is set to on (step S4335: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4336; if the second special effect setting flag is set to off (step S4335: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4341.

<Steps S4336 and S4337>
If the second special chart special effect setting flag is set on (step S4335: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second special chart special effect execution flag to on, indicating that the second special chart special effect has started (step S4336), and sets the second special chart special effect setting flag to off (step S4337), and transitions to step S4338.

<Step S4338>
In step S4338, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the electric device long opening flag indicating that the second winning port 315 is long opening (long opening normal winning game is being executed) is set to ON. If the electric device long opening flag is set to ON (step S4338: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4339, and if the electric device long opening flag is set to OFF (step S4338: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4342.

<Steps S4339 and S4340>
If the electric reel length open flag is set to ON (step S4338: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process to end the electric reel length open performance (see FIG. 87(A)) (step S4339), sets the electric reel length open flag to OFF (step S4340), and moves the process to step S4342. That is, the electric reel length open performance (see FIG. 87(A)) is ended when either the start of the second special chart special performance (see FIG. 87(A)) or the chain of the electric reel 315b is satisfied. That is, the second special chart special performance is executed with priority over the electric reel length open performance.

<Step S4341>
If it is determined in step S4335 that the second special chart special effect setting flag is set to off (step S4335: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second special chart special effect execution flag, which is set to on in step S4336 when the second special chart special effect is started, is set to on (step S4341).

If the second special chart special effect execution flag is set to on (step S4341: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4342, and if the second special chart special effect execution flag is set to off (step S4341: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4352 in FIG. 97.

<Steps S4342 and S4343>
In step S4342, the MPU 51 sets the second special symbol game performance for the second special symbol game executed as the change. Then, the MPU 51 judges whether the reserved continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S4343). The reserved continuous performance execution flag is a flag indicating that the reserved continuous performance has started, and is set to ON in step S4311 of FIG. 94 when the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the first special symbol game executed next to the first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous performance was executed. That is, in this step S4343, it is judged whether the reserved continuous performance is resumed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of all the second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special performance is executed.

If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to on (step S4343: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4344, and if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to off (step S4343: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4345.

<Step S4344>
When the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S4343: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the capture image display information in the display change pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 5 to the display control device 6 in order to display a capture image 77 (see FIG. 87(C)) indicating or suggesting that the pending continuous performance will be resumed in the first special chart game executed after the end of all second special chart games in which the second special chart special performance is executed on the pattern display unit 341 in the second special chart game performance (step S4344), and the process proceeds to step S4345. As a result, the capture image 77 is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the second special chart game performance (see FIG. 87(C)).

When the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S4343: No), that is, when the pending continuous performance is not executed in the first special chart game executed after the end of all second special chart games in which the second special chart special performance is executed, the processing of step S4344 is skipped. Therefore, when the pending continuous performance is not executed in the first special chart game executed after the end of all second special chart games in which the second special chart special performance is executed, the capture image 77 is not displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the second special chart game performance (see FIG. 87 (B)).

Here, the capture image is displayed as a reduced image of the screen of the reserved continuous performance that was being executed on the pattern display unit 341 in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance. This capture image 77 is displayed when the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and the reserved continuous performance is executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance (see FIG. 73 (B)). In other words, the capture image 77 clearly indicates or suggests during the execution of the second special symbol special performance that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance.

In this embodiment, the capture image 77 clearly indicates or suggests that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance. This significantly reduces the possibility that the player will forget that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance, and the player can understand that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance. Therefore, even if the reserved continuous performance is resumed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance, the player will be significantly less likely to feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance. This prevents a decrease in the interest of the game caused by the reserved continuous performance being resumed after the end of the second special chart special performance.

In particular, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a long-open regular game, the player is preoccupied for a long time with whether or not the game ball 99 will enter the second winning port 315, compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a short-open regular game. Therefore, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was being performed before the second special game. Also, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a long-open regular game, the game ball 99 is more likely to enter the second winning port 315 (the number of balls entering is large) compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a short-open regular game, so the number of second special games in which the second special performance is performed is larger (the execution time of the second special performance is longer). Therefore, the time from the end of the reserved continuous performance before the execution of the second special performance (the start of the second special performance) to the restart of the reserved continuous performance due to the end of the second special performance is longer, and the player pays more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special performance in which the second special performance is executed is a jackpot, compared to when the first special performance is executed. In this way, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a long-open normal performance, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special performance, compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a short-open normal performance, so the effect of clearly indicating or suggesting that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special performance before the execution of the second special performance during the execution of the second special performance is high.

In addition, the capture image 77 is displayed as a reduced image of the screen of the reserved continuous performance executed in the pattern display unit 341 in the first special pattern game before the execution of the second special pattern special performance, so that the type of reserved continuous performance executed in the first special pattern game before the execution of the second special pattern special performance is clearly indicated or suggested, and the type of reserved continuous performance executed in the first special pattern game after the end of the second special pattern special performance is clearly indicated or suggested. For example, in this embodiment, four types of reserved continuous performance are set (see Figures 90 and 91), namely, same color pattern performance, chance eye performance, mini character performance, and zone performance (mode performance) (see Figures 90 and 91), but the capture image 77 shown in Figure 87 (C) clearly indicates or suggests that a chance eye performance in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the chance eye "113" (see Figure 91 (B)) was executed as a reserved continuous performance in the first special pattern game before the execution of the second special pattern special performance. This allows the player to not only understand that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance, but also to understand the type of reserved continuous performance. Therefore, the player's sense of discomfort about the reserved continuous performance being resumed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance is further reduced, and the decrease in interest in the game caused by the reserved continuous performance being performed before the execution of the second special chart special performance being resumed after the end of the second special chart special performance is further prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, the capture image 77 is displayed in a reduced size in the lower left area of the pattern display section 341, but the capture image may be displayed on the entire pattern display section 341 for a certain period of time at either or both the end of the second special pattern special effect and the start of the reserved continuous effect executed after the end of the second special pattern special effect. For example, the capture image may be displayed as a so-called stage change effect in which the stage effect (background effect) in the previous special pattern game is changed in the current special pattern game. In this way, by displaying the capture image on the entire pattern display section 341 for a certain period of time at either or both the end of the second special pattern special effect and the start of the reserved continuous effect executed after the end of the second special pattern special effect, the reserved continuous effect in the first special pattern game can be executed smoothly and without discomfort from the execution of the second special pattern special effect in the second special pattern game.

<Step S4345>
When the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S4343: No), or when the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S4343: Yes), and capture image display information is set in the display change pattern command (step S4344), the MPU 51 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the change is a jackpot or not (step S4345). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether a jackpot game is executed after the execution of the second special symbol game executed as the change.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the variation is a jackpot (step S4345: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game will be executed after the end of the second special symbol game, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4346. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the variation is not a jackpot (step S4345: No), i.e., if a jackpot game will not be executed after the end of the second special symbol game, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4349.

<Step S4346>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the variation is a jackpot (step S4345: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the long opening winning counter (step S4346) and moves the process to step S4347. Here, the value of the long opening winning counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 while the second winning hole 315 is long open (during the execution of the long opening normal symbol winning game). That is, when a jackpot game is executed after the end of the second special symbol game executed as the variation, the MPU 51 sets the number of unexecuted second special symbol games to 0.

<Steps S4347 and S4348>
In step S4347, the MPU 51 judges whether or not a pending continuous performance execution flag indicating that pending continuous performance has started is set to ON (step S4347). If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S4347: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous performance execution flag to OFF (step S4348) and shifts the process to step S4351, and if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S4348: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4351.

<Steps S4349 and S4350>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game executed as the change is not a jackpot (step S4345: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the long opening winning counter (step S4349) and determines whether the value of the long opening winning counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4350). If the value of the long opening winning counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4350: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4351, and if the value of the long opening winning counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4350: No), the effect setting process is terminated.

Here, if the value of the long opening winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4350: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol game as the change in question is the last second special symbol game in which the second special symbol special effect is executed, the processing of steps S4347 and S4348 is not executed, and the processing proceeds to step S4351, so that if the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to on, the pending continuous effect execution flag is not set to off. As a result, the pending continuous effect is resumed in the first special symbol game executed following the last second special symbol game in which the second special symbol special effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the reserved continuous performance is resumed in the first special game that is executed after the last second special game in which the second special performance is executed. However, if the value of the long open winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4350: Yes), the process may be shifted to step S4347 so that the reserved continuous performance is not resumed in the first special game that is executed after the last second special game in which the second special performance is executed.

<Step S4351>
In step S4351, the MPU 51 sets the special effect execution flag indicating that the second special effect has started to OFF (step S4349), and ends the effect type setting process. As a result, the second special effect executed in the second special effect game executed as the change is executed as the last second special effect.

<Steps S4352 and S4353>
When it is determined in step S4341 that the second special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S4341: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the short opening closing flag, which indicates that the electric role 315b that was short-opened in the short opening normal winning game has been closed, is set to ON (step S4352), as shown in Fig. 97. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is restricted by the end of the short opening normal winning game, and the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning hole 315 does not increase.

If the short open/close flag is set to on (step S4352: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the short open/close flag to off (step S4353) and proceeds to step S4354. On the other hand, if the short open/close flag is set to off (step S4352: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4358 in FIG. 98.

<Step S4354>
When the short open closing flag is set to ON (step S4352: Yes), when the short open closing flag is set to OFF (step S4353), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S4354). The chance eye flag is a flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect at the time when the electric role object 315b that was short-opened in the short open normal winning game is closed, thereby judging whether or not the chance eye effect is executed as the reserved continuous effect in the second special game that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 in the short open normal winning game.

If the chance eye flag is set to on (step S4354: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4355, and if the chance eye flag is set to off (step S4354: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4358 in FIG. 98.

<Steps S4355 and S4356>
If the chance eye flag is set on (step S4354: Yes), the MPU 51 adds up the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the pending continuous performance count counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter (step S4355), and determines whether the added value is 4 or greater (step S4356).

Here, the value of the chance eye count counter is the number of first special symbol games in which the chance eye effect was executed as the reserved continuous effect, and the value of the reserved continuous effect count counter is the number of remaining first special symbol games in which the reserved continuous effect is executed. Therefore, the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter and the value of the reserved continuous effect count counter is the number of first special symbol games in which the initially set reserved continuous effect is executed. Also, the value of the short opening winning counter is the number of second special symbol games executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 in a short opening normal symbol winning game, and is the number of second special symbol games in which the reserved continuous effect is executed. Therefore, the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the reserved continuous effect count counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter is the maximum number of special symbol games (first special symbol games, second special symbol games) in which the chance eye effect is executed consecutively as the reserved continuous effect.

On the other hand, as mentioned above, if the chance eye effect is executed as the reserved continuous effect in four or more consecutive special pattern games, it becomes a jackpot confirmed effect that clearly indicates a jackpot. Therefore, when the chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect, if the second special pattern game is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 in the short-opening normal pattern winning game, if the result of the jackpot lottery for each special pattern game in which the chance eye effect is executed is a miss, an inconsistency may occur between the result clearly indicated by the chance eye effect being executed consecutively as the reserved continuous effect and the result of the jackpot lottery.

When a chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect, by determining whether the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the reserved continuous effect count counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter is 4 or more, it becomes possible to determine in advance whether an inconsistency may occur between the result indicated by the consecutive execution of the chance eye effect as the reserved continuous effect and the result of the jackpot lottery.

Then, if the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the pending continuous performance count counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter is 4 or more (step S4356: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4357, and if the sum is not 4 or more (step S4356: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4358 in FIG. 98.

<Step S4357>
If the sum of the chance eye counter value, the reserved continuous performance counter value, and the short opening winning counter value is 4 or more (step S4356: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the results of the jackpot lottery for all the special symbol games executed thereafter, including the second special symbol game executed as the change, are misses (step S4357). In other words, the MPU 51 judges whether the results of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol games executed thereafter, including the second special symbol game executed as the change, include a jackpot.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for all special chart games executed thereafter, including the second special chart game executed as the variation, is a miss (step S4357: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4360 in FIG. 98. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for all special chart games executed thereafter, including the second special chart game executed as the variation, is not a miss (step S4357: No), and if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special chart games executed thereafter, including the second special chart game executed as the variation, includes a jackpot, the MPU 51 transitions to step S4358 in FIG. 98.

<Steps S4358 and S4359>
When the short opening and closing flag is set to OFF (step S4352: No), when the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S4354: No), when the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the reserved continuous performance count counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter is not 4 or more (step S4356: No), or when the result of the jackpot lottery for all the special chart games executed thereafter, including the second special chart game executed as the variation, includes a jackpot (step S4357: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the process of step S4358. That is, when there is no inconvenience that the chance eye performance is executed as the reserved continuous performance in four or more consecutive special chart games, the MPU 51 judges in step S4358 whether the reserved continuous performance execution flag indicating that the reserved continuous performance has started is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether to set the reserved continuous performance as the performance for the second special chart game executed as the variation.

Then, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to on (step S4358: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous performance as the performance for the second special chart game executed as the corresponding change (step S4359), and executes the processing of steps S4325 to S4334 in FIG. 95 described above.

On the other hand, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to off (step S4358: No), i.e., if the pending continuous performance is not set as the performance for the second special chart game executed as the change, the MPU 51 transitions to step S4304 in FIG. 93 described above, sets a normal performance as the performance for the second special chart game executed as the change (setting the performance in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above), and ends the performance type setting.

In this way, when the pending continuous performance execution flag is set on (step S4358: Yes), by setting the pending continuous performance as the performance for the second special chart game executed as the corresponding variation (step S4359), when the pending continuous performance is being executed in the first special chart game as the corresponding variation, if it is scheduled that the pending continuous performance will be executed consecutively in the next first special chart game that has been put on hold, even if the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 due to a short opening of the second winning opening 315, in the second special chart game in which the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is short opened, the second special chart special performance will not be executed and the pending continuous performance will continue to be executed. For this reason, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the next reserved first special symbol game, the player will not feel uncomfortable that the reserved continuous performance is not executed after the end of the second special symbol game, which is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 when the second winning hole 315 is short-opened. This prevents a decrease in the interest of the game due to the reserved continuous performance not being executed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of the second special symbol game.

In particular, when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened, it is more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315 (the number of balls entering is smaller) than when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened, and it is more likely that the player will remember that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the second special chart game was executed. Therefore, when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened, the effect of the reserved continuous performance being executed without the second special chart special performance being executed in the second special chart game due to the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 is high.

In addition, in a short opening where it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315, it is expected that the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning opening 315 will be small. Therefore, even if the reserved continuous performance continues to be executed in the second special chart game due to the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened, the number of consecutive executions of the reserved continuous performance does not increase significantly, so the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being executed continuously in the second special chart game. On the contrary, by continuously executing the reserved continuous performance in the second special chart game, the reserved continuous performance can be effectively utilized in the second special chart game.

<Steps S4360 and S4361>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for all special chart games executed thereafter, including the second special chart game executed as the relevant variation, is a miss (step S4357: Yes), in other words, if there is a possibility of an inconsistency occurring between the result indicated by the successive execution of chance eye effects as a pending continuous effect and the result of the jackpot lottery, the MPU 51 sets the chance eye flag to off (step S4360) and clears the value of the chance eye count counter (step S4361), thereby restricting the continued execution of the chance eye effects.

<Steps S4362 and S4363>
When the process for restricting the chance eye effect from being continuously executed is executed (steps S4360 and S4361), the MPU 51 sets the same color pattern effect as the reserved continuous effect for the second special symbol game executed as the change (step S4362), sets the same color pattern indicating that the same color pattern is set as the reserved continuous effect to ON (step S4363), and proceeds to step S4364. That is, the MPU 51 changes the reserved continuous effect for the second special symbol game executed as the change from the chance eye effect to the same color pattern effect.

Here, the chance eye effect becomes a big win confirmation effect when it is executed in four or more special symbol games in succession, as described above. Therefore, by changing the reserved continuous effect for the second special symbol game executed as the variation from a chance eye effect to a same color pattern effect, it is possible to avoid the chance eye effect being executed in four or more special symbol games in succession. This makes it possible to prevent inconsistency between the result indicated by the chance eye effect being executed in succession as the reserved continuous effect and the result of the big win lottery. On the other hand, as described above, the same color pattern effect is an effect that suggests the expectation of a big win, and even if it is executed in four or more special symbol games in succession, it does not become a big win confirmation effect. Therefore, by changing the reserved continuous effect for the second special symbol game executed as the variation from a chance eye effect to a same color pattern effect, even if the same color pattern effect is executed in four or more special symbol games in succession, the reserved continuous effect does not indicate that the result of the big win lottery is a big win, so there is no inconsistency between the reserved continuous effect and the result of the big win lottery.

In this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is changed from the chance eye performance to the same color pattern performance, the reserved continuous performance is executed continuously for multiple special pattern games, but the reserved continuous performance may be interrupted by executing a special pattern game in which an image of a completely out-of-match eye other than the chance eye and the same color pattern is displayed before the chance eye performance is changed to the same color pattern performance. In this case, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being executed continuously in four or more special pattern games. In addition, by interrupting the reserved continuous performance, the player can be given the illusion that a same color pattern performance has started as a new reserved continuous performance after the chance eye performance as the reserved continuous performance ends. This allows the change from the chance eye performance to the same color pattern performance to be executed smoothly without any discomfort, and also allows the chance eye performance to be disguised as if the change to the same color pattern performance had not been performed. And by disguising the change from the chance eye performance to the same color pattern performance as if the change had not been performed, the inconvenience caused by the chance eye performance being executed continuously can be avoided without the player realizing it. However, if a change is made from the chance eye effect to the same color pattern effect to avoid inconvenience when the chance eye effect is executed consecutively in four or more special symbol games, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same color pattern effect is executed is a miss. Therefore, when a change is made from the chance eye effect to the same color pattern effect, there is a concern that the player will realize that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same color pattern effect is executed is a miss. Therefore, by disguising it as if the change from the chance eye effect to the same color pattern effect was not made, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same color pattern effect is executed is a miss.

<Step S4364>
If the pending continuous performance for the second special symbol game executed as the change is changed from a chance eye performance to a same-color pattern performance, the MPU 51 adds the value of the short-open winning counter to the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter (step S4364).

Here, the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter indicates the number of remaining special game plays in which the pending continuous performance will be executed. The value of the short opening winning counter is the number of game balls 99 that enter the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is short-open (a game with a short opening regular game is being executed) and the number of reserved balls M for the second special game has not reached the upper limit. Therefore, the MPU 51 adds the value of the short opening winning counter to the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter, thereby resetting the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter, which indicates the number of remaining special game plays in which the pending continuous performance will be executed, to a value that includes the number of pending continuous performances executed in the second special game.

<Steps S4365 and S4366>
If the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter is reset (step S4364), the MPU 51 clears the value of the short opening winning counter (step S4365), sets the short opening closed flag to off (step S4366), executes the processing of steps S4325 to S4334 in Figure 95 described above, and terminates the performance type setting process.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S4028 of the command determination process in Fig. 86 will be described with reference to Fig. 99 and Fig. 100. The stop symbol combination setting process is a process for setting a symbol combination when the decorative symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game are displayed in a stopped state. Here, Fig. 99 and Fig. 100 are a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process.

<Step S4401>
In the stop symbol combination setting process, in step S4401, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not a chance eye flag indicating that a chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not a chance eye (see FIG. 91(B)) is set as the stop symbol combination.

If the chance eye flag is set to on (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4404, and if the chance eye flag is set to off (step S4401: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4402.

<Steps S4402 and S4403>
If the chance eye flag is set to off (step S4401: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the final chance eye flag, which indicates that the chance eye performance executed as a pending continuous performance in the fluctuation is the last chance eye performance, is set to on (step S4402).

If the final chance eye flag is set to on (step S4402: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the final chance eye flag to off (step S4403) and proceeds to step S4404. On the other hand, if the final chance eye flag is set to off (step S4402: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4405.

<Step S4404>
If the chance eye flag is set on (step S4401: Yes), or if the final chance eye flag that was set on is set to off (step S4403), the MPU 51 sets a chance eye (see Figure 91 (B)) as the combination of decorative patterns to be displayed as stopped, and terminates the stopping pattern combination setting process.

The type of chance eye to be displayed when the symbol changes can be determined by, for example, setting a chance eye type selection table that associates a chance eye type counter with an individual chance eye, and then setting the chance eye from the chance eye type selection table based on the value of the chance eye type counter when the stop symbol combination is set.

<Step S4405>
When the chance symbol flag and the final chance symbol flag are set to OFF (step S4402: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the same color symbol flag, which indicates that the same color symbol effect is set as the reserved continuous effect, is set to ON (step S4405). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not to set the same color symbol (see FIG. 91(B)) as the stop symbol combination.

If the same-color pattern flag is set to on (step S4405: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4408; if the same-color pattern flag is set to off (step S4405: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4406.

<Steps S4406 and S4407>
If the same-color pattern flag is set to off (step S4405: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the final same-color pattern flag, which indicates that the same-color pattern performance executed as the pending continuous performance in the fluctuation is the last same-color pattern performance, is set to on (step S4406).

If the final same-color pattern flag is set to on (step S4406: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the final same-color pattern flag to off (step S4407) and proceeds to step S4408. On the other hand, if the final same-color pattern flag is set to off (step S4406: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4409 in FIG. 100.

<Step S4408>
If the same-color pattern flag is set on (step S4405: Yes), or if the final same-color pattern flag that was set on is set to off (step S4407), the MPU 51 sets the same-color pattern (see Figure 91 (B)) as the combination of decorative patterns to be displayed in a stopped state (step S4408), and terminates the stopped pattern combination setting process.

The type of same-color pattern to be stopped during the variation may be determined by, for example, setting a same-color pattern type selection table that associates same-color pattern type counters with individual same-color patterns, and setting the same-color pattern from the same-color pattern type selection table based on the value of the same-color pattern type counter when the stopped pattern combination is set.

<Step S4409>
When the chance symbol and the same color symbol are not set as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S4409), as shown in Fig. 100. The chance symbol temporary stop flag is a flag for temporarily displaying the chance symbol before the decorative symbols are stopped (for example, when the decorative symbols are changing at high speed before a reach is reached) when the result of the big win lottery for the corresponding variation is a big win and the fourth chance symbol effect is executed as a reserved continuous effect in the corresponding variation.

Then, if the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S4409: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4410, and if the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to OFF (step S4409: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4413.

<Steps S4410 to S4412>
If the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S4409: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance symbol as the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped (step S4410), and sets the double number as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped (step S4411).Then, the MPU 51 sets the chance symbol temporary stop flag to OFF (step S4412), and ends the stop symbol combination setting process.

The chance numbers to be displayed as temporary stops can be set in the same manner as in step S4404 described above. The repeat numbers to be displayed as stop stops can be set in the same manner as in step S2103 of the command determination process in FIG. 37 in the first embodiment described above.

<Step S4413>
If chance symbols and same-color symbols are not set as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped, and chance symbols are not set as the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped, the MPU 51 sets the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped normally (setting the combination of decorative symbols in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above), and terminates the stopping symbol combination setting process.

As described above, in this embodiment, the opening mode of the second winning opening 315 by the electric role device 315b is set to a short opening in which it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315, and a long opening in which the opening time of the second winning opening 315 by the electric role device 315b is longer than the short opening and it is easy for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315. Also, in this embodiment, the second special chart for the second reservation is executed with priority over the first special chart game for the first reservation.

In this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the next reserved first special symbol game, if the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 by the short opening of the second winning port 315, the reserved continuous performance executed in the first special symbol game will be continued in the second special symbol game executed after the end of the first special symbol game as the variation. That is, in this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the next reserved first special symbol game, even if the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 by the short opening of the second winning port 315, the second special symbol special performance will not be executed and the reserved continuous performance will be continued in the second special symbol game by the game ball 99 entering the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is short opened. For this reason, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed continuously in the next reserved first special symbol game, the player will not feel uncomfortable that the reserved continuous performance is not executed after the end of the second special symbol game, which is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened. This prevents a decrease in the interest of the game due to the reserved continuous performance not being executed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of the second special symbol game.

In particular, when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened, it is more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315 (the number of balls entering is smaller) than when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened, and it is more likely that the player will remember that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the second special chart game was executed. Therefore, when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened, the effect of the reserved continuous performance being executed without the second special chart special performance being executed in the second special chart game due to the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 is high.

In addition, in a short opening where it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315, it is expected that the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning opening 315 will be small. Therefore, even if the reserved continuous performance continues to be executed in the second special chart game due to the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened, the number of consecutive executions of the reserved continuous performance does not increase significantly, so the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being executed continuously in the second special chart game. On the contrary, by continuously executing the reserved continuous performance in the second special chart game, the reserved continuous performance can be effectively utilized in the second special chart game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the chance eye effect, which becomes a jackpot confirmation effect when executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games, is executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games, if the results of the jackpot lottery for all special symbol games from the first special symbol game in which the chance eye effect was started are all misses, before the number of special symbol games in which the chance eye effect is executed reaches four, the reserved continuous effect is changed from the chance eye effect to a same-color pattern effect that does not become a jackpot confirmation effect even if executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games. This prevents the chance eye effect from being executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games, and prevents inconsistencies from occurring between the result indicated by the chance eye effect being executed in succession as the reserved continuous effect and the result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the next reserved first special symbol game, when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 by the long opening of the second winning opening 315, the second special symbol special performance is executed in the second special symbol game executed after the end of the first special symbol game as the variation, and the capture image 77 of the reserved continuous performance executed in the first special symbol game is displayed. In other words, the capture image 77 clearly indicates or suggests that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance. This significantly reduces the possibility that the player will forget that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and can understand that the reserved continuous performance will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance. Therefore, even if the reserved continuous performance is resumed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance, the player's sense of discomfort about the reserved continuous performance being executed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance is significantly reduced. As a result, a decrease in the interest of the game caused by the reserved continuous performance being executed before the execution of the second special chart special performance being resumed after the end of the second special chart special performance is prevented.

In particular, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a game where a long-opening regular pattern is won, the player is preoccupied for a long time with whether or not the game ball 99 will enter the second winning port 315, compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a game where a short-opening regular pattern is won. Therefore, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was being performed before the second special pattern game was played. Also, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a game where a long-opening regular pattern is won, the game ball 99 is more likely to enter the second winning port 315 (the number of balls entering is large) compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a game where a short-opening regular pattern is won, so the number of second special pattern games in which the second special pattern special performance is executed is larger (the execution time of the second special pattern special performance is longer). Therefore, the time from the end of the reserved continuous performance before the execution of the second special performance (the start of the second special performance) to the restart of the reserved continuous performance due to the end of the second special performance is longer, and the player pays more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special performance in which the second special performance is executed is a jackpot, compared to when the first special performance is executed. In this way, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a long-open normal performance, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special performance, compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a short-open normal performance, so the effect of clearly indicating or suggesting that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special performance before the execution of the second special performance during the execution of the second special performance is high.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fifth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, in a gaming machine in which the opening mode of the second winning port by the electric device is set to a first opening (short opening) which is a first time, and a second opening (long opening) which is a second time longer than the first time, when a game ball enters the second winning port when it is scheduled to continuously execute a predetermined number of first special symbol games, the hold continuous performance is continuously executed in the second special symbol game caused by the game ball entering the second winning port in the case of the short opening, while the second special symbol special performance is executed in the second special symbol game caused by the game ball entering the second winning port in the case of the long opening, and at the time of execution of the second special symbol special performance, it is clearly indicated or suggested that the hold continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special performance.

However, the opening mode of the second winning opening by the electric device in the gaming machine can be set to a short opening and a long opening, and there are various other opening modes. For example, the opening mode of the second winning opening can be set to a single opening time, a mode in which the second winning opening is opened multiple times for one normal winning win, or a mode in which the opening time of the second winning opening differs between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and the like. It is not necessarily the case that the opening mode of the second winning opening can be set to a short opening and a long opening.

In addition, in gaming machines, the opening mode of the second winning port generally includes a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter the second winning port, such as the long opening of the sixth embodiment described above. On the other hand, even during a game, the game ball may not flow down the game area of the game board. For example, when a reach performance is being performed or when the reserve for the first special chart has reached the upper limit, the game ball may not flow down the game area of the game board when the game ball does not reach the game area of the game board due to a poor shooting of the game ball. Therefore, even if the second winning port is opened in a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter, the number of game balls entering the second winning port may be reduced due to a delay in the player's shooting of the game ball or due to a poor shooting of the game ball. For example, even if the second winning port is opened so that the reserved number for the second special game can reach the upper limit, the reserved number for the second special game may not reach the upper limit, and the number of game balls entering the second winning port may be a small number of two or less, which is similar to the number of balls entering the second winning port when it is short-opened.

Here, in the sixth embodiment described above, when the opening mode of the second winning opening is long opening, regardless of the number of balls entering the second winning opening, the second special chart special performance is executed in the second special chart game by the game ball entering the second winning opening in response to the opening mode of the second winning opening being long opening. On the other hand, as described above, even if the opening mode of the second winning opening is long opening, the number of game balls entering the second winning opening may not reach the upper limit number in the second special chart game, and the number of game balls entering the second winning opening may be a small number of two or less, which is about the same as the number of balls entering the second winning opening when it is short opening. Therefore, even though the opening mode of the second winning opening is short opening, the situation is similar to that in which the performance is executed when the opening mode of the second winning opening is long opening. In other words, a mismatch occurs between the opening mode of the second winning opening and the performance.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special game as the variation, if it is scheduled to be executed continuously in the next reserved first special game (for example, special 1 variation + special 1 reserved 1 + special 1 reserved 2 (see FIG. 72 (A))), regardless of the opening mode of the electric role, when a game ball enters the second winning port by opening the second winning port, the performance in the second special game executed in response to the game ball entering the second winning port is different between the case where the number of balls entering the second winning port is a predetermined number or less that exceeds 0 (for example, 1 or 2) and the case where the number of balls entering the second winning port exceeds a predetermined number (3 or more). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), when the number of balls entering the second winning port is a predetermined number or less that exceeds 0 (for example, 1 or 2), the reserved continuous performance is continuously executed in the second special game, as in the case of the short opening of the second winning port in the above-mentioned sixth embodiment. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101(B), if the number of balls entering the second winning hole exceeds a predetermined number (three or more), the second special symbol special effect is executed in the second special symbol game, just as in the case of the long opening of the second winning hole in the sixth embodiment described above, and it is clearly indicated or suggested that the reserved continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect when the second special symbol special effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be performed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special symbol games, if the game ball enters the second winning port by opening the second winning port, the performance performed in the second special symbol game is different when the number of balls entering the second winning port is equal to or less than a predetermined number exceeding 0, and when the number of balls entering the second winning port exceeds the predetermined number. Therefore, even in gaming machines other than those in which the opening mode of the second winning port by the electric device is set to a short opening in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning port and a long opening in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second winning port, that is, regardless of the opening and closing mode of the second winning port, a decrease in the interest in the game due to the reserved continuous performance not being performed in the first special symbol game performed after the end of the second special symbol game is prevented, and a decrease in the interest in the game due to the reserved continuous performance being performed before the execution of the second special symbol special performance being resumed after the end of the second special symbol special performance is prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special pattern game as the variation, and it is scheduled to be executed continuously in the next reserved first special pattern game, if the game ball enters the second winning opening by opening the second winning opening, the performance executed in the second special pattern game is different when the number of balls entering the second winning opening is equal to or less than a predetermined number exceeding 0 and when the number of balls entering the second winning opening exceeds the predetermined number, so that it is possible to also deal with the case where the number of game balls entering the second winning opening is small when the second winning opening is opened in an opening/closing mode that makes it easy for game balls to enter.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 102 to 107.

This embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment in that, when a reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special game as the variation, and it is planned to execute the reserved continuous performance in the next reserved first special game, regardless of the opening mode, when a game ball enters the second winning port by opening the second winning port, the performance in the second special game executed in response to the game ball entering the second winning port is set to be different between the case where the number of balls entering the second winning port is a predetermined number or less that exceeds 0 (for example, 1 or 2) and the case where the number of balls entering the second winning port exceeds a predetermined number (3 or more). Therefore, this embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment in that some of the processing procedures in the command determination process, the second special special performance setting process, and the performance type setting process are different.

[Command Judgment Process]
The command determination process of this embodiment differs from that of the sixth embodiment described above in that the process when a second hold command and an electric feature close command are received.

Here, Figures 102 and 103 are flowcharts to explain the differences in command determination processing from the sixth embodiment described above.

<Step S4501>
As shown in FIG. 102, in the command judgment process of this embodiment, when the second reserved command is received and the second special chart reserved information is updated (step S4015: Yes and S4016), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the electric role opening winning counter (step S4501) and ends the command judgment process. That is, in the command judgment process of this embodiment, the number of balls entering the second winning port 315 is not counted by distinguishing between the short opening and the long opening as in the sixth embodiment described above, but the number of balls entering the second winning port 315 is counted in the electric role opening winning counter without distinguishing between the short opening and the long opening. Also, in this embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment described above, even if the second reserved command is received, the second special chart special performance setting process is not executed, and is executed in step S4502 in FIG. 103 described later, on the condition that the electric role closing command is received (step S4021: Yes).

The electric role opening winning counter is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the second special symbol special effect in step S4601 of the second special symbol special effect setting process in FIG. 104 described below.

<Step S4502>
As shown in Fig. 103, in the command judgment process of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives an electric role object closing command (step S4021: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special chart special effect setting process when the electric role object is closed, without distinguishing between the short opening and the long opening (step S4502). That is, in this embodiment, the second special chart special effect setting process that was executed when the second hold command was received in the above-mentioned sixth embodiment is set when the electric role object closing command is received.

[Second special chart special effect setting process]
The second special chart special effect setting process of this embodiment differs from the aforementioned sixth embodiment in that whether or not to execute the second special chart special effect is determined based on the number of balls that enter the second winning port 315 until the electric device 315b is closed, and in that whether or not to execute the second special chart special effect is determined based on whether the opening is short or long.

Here, Figure 104 is a flowchart to explain the differences between the second special chart special effect setting process of this embodiment and the sixth embodiment described above.

<Steps S4601 to S4603>
As shown in FIG. 104, when the electric role device 315b is closed, if both the second special chart special effect setting flag and the second special chart special effect execution flag are set to off (No in both steps S4201 and S4202), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the electric role opening winning counter, which indicates the number of game balls 99 that have entered the second winning port 315, is 3 or greater (step S4601).

If the value of the electric role opening winning counter is 3 or more (step S4601: Yes), the second special chart special effect setting flag is set to ON to start the second special chart special effect (step S4602), and the second special chart special effect setting process is terminated.

If the value of the electric role opening winning counter is not 3 or more (step S4601: No), and if the value of the electric role opening winning counter is 2 or less, the second special chart special performance non-setting flag indicating that the second special chart special performance will not be started is set to on (step S4603), and the second special chart special performance setting process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the second special effect is executed when the value of the electric role opening winning counter is 3 or more, but the second special effect may also be executed when the value of the electric role opening winning counter is 4 or more, when the value of the electric role opening winning counter is 2 or more, etc.

[Performance type setting process]
The effect type setting process of this embodiment differs from the aforementioned sixth embodiment in that, regardless of the opening/closing mode of the electric role device 315b, when the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning port 315 is three or more, a second special effect is set for the second special game as the corresponding variation, in that the second special effect is set for the second special game as the corresponding variation when the electric role device 315b is fully opened, regardless of the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning port 315.

Here, Figures 105 to 107 are flowcharts for explaining the differences in the performance type setting process of this embodiment from the sixth embodiment described above.

<Steps S4701 to S4703>
As shown in FIG. 105, when the second special effect is set for the second special game as the change, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game as the change is a jackpot (step S4345: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the value of the electric role opening winning counter (step S4701). On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game as the change is not a jackpot (step S4345: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the electric role opening winning counter (step S4702), and determines whether the value of the electric role opening winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4703).

In other words, in this embodiment, instead of the short opening winning counter and long opening winning counter of the sixth embodiment described above, an electric role opening winning counter common to short opening and long opening is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of the processing related to the long opening winning counter in the sixth embodiment described above, the processing of steps S4701 to S4703 related to the electric role opening winning counter is executed.

<Step S4704>
When it is determined in step S4341 that the second special effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S4341: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4704 in Fig. 106 and determines whether or not the second special effect non-setting flag indicating that the second special effect will not be started is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second special effect game as the change is the first second special effect game to be executed when the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning hole 315 is two or less.

Then, if the second special chart special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S4704: Yes), i.e., if the second special chart game as the variation is the first second special chart game to be executed when two or fewer game balls 99 enter the second winning port 315, the MPU 51 sets the second special chart special effect setting flag to OFF (step S4705) and transitions to step S4354.

On the other hand, if the second special chart special effect setting flag is set to off (step S4704: No), i.e., if the second special chart game as the variation in question is not the first second special chart game to be executed when two or fewer game balls 99 enter the second winning port 315, the MPU 51 transitions to step S4358 in FIG. 107, and thereafter executes the same processing as in the sixth embodiment described above.

<Steps S4705 to S4708>
If the second special chart special effect non-setting flag, indicating that the second special chart special effect will not be started, is set on (step S4704: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second special chart special effect setting flag to off (step S4705) and transitions to step S4354, thereby executing the same processing as in the sixth embodiment described above.

However, in this embodiment, as described above, instead of the short opening winning counter and long opening winning counter of the sixth embodiment, an electric role opening winning counter common to the short opening and long opening is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of the processing related to the long opening winning counter in the sixth embodiment, the processing of step S4706 related to the electric role opening winning counter and the processing of steps S4707 and S4708 in FIG. 107 are executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the number of balls entering the second winning opening 315 is equal to or less than a predetermined number exceeding 0 (for example, 1 or 2), the reserved continuous performance is continuously executed in the second special chart game, similar to the short opening of the second winning opening 315 in the sixth embodiment described above. On the other hand, when the number of balls entering the second winning opening 315 exceeds a predetermined number (3 or more), the second special chart special performance is executed in the second special chart game, similar to the long opening of the second winning opening 315 in the sixth embodiment described above. Therefore, even in gaming machines other than those in which the opening mode of the second winning opening 315 by the electric device 315b is set to a short opening in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second winning opening 315 and a long opening in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the second winning opening 315, that is, regardless of the opening/closing mode of the second winning opening 315, a decrease in the interest in the game due to the reserve continuous performance not being executed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of the second special symbol game is prevented, and a decrease in the interest in the game due to the reserve continuous performance being executed before the execution of the second special symbol special performance being resumed after the end of the second special symbol special performance is prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the continuous reserved effect is being executed in the first special pattern game as the variation, if the second winning opening 315 is opened and a game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315, the effect executed in the second special pattern game is different between when the number of balls entering the second winning opening 315 is equal to or less than a predetermined number exceeding 0 and when the number of balls entering the second winning opening 315 exceeds the predetermined number, so that it is possible to also deal with the case where the number of game balls entering the second winning opening 315 is small when the second winning opening 315 is opened in an opening/closing mode that makes it easy for game balls to enter.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to sixth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

In addition, various modifications are possible in the sixth and seventh embodiments described above. For example, in the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, a reduced image of the image of the reserved continuous effect executed in the first special symbol game was displayed in the lower left area of the symbol display section 341 as the capture image 77, but the capture image 77 may be displayed in other ways as long as the display of the changing decorative symbols is visible. For example, the capture image 77 may be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols as a background effect on the entire symbol display section 341, or the decorative symbols may be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols with a visible density (transparency), or only the outline may be displayed on the front or back side of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the indication or suggestion that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance, is not limited to the display of the capture image 77, and may be any other method as long as the display of the change in the decorative pattern is visible. For example, the indication or suggestion may be displayed as a specific image different from the capture image 77, such as an icon image, a character image, or an image combining two or more of these, to indicate that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance.

The capture image 77 may be displayed during the entire period during which the second special symbol game is being played, or may be displayed during a portion of the period during which the second special symbol game is being played, for example, only for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game, only for a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game, or both for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game and a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game, and there is no particular limit to the display period of the capture image 77. In addition, the capture image 77 does not need to be displayed during all second special symbol games when the second special symbol game is played multiple times in succession, and may be displayed, for example, only for the first second special symbol game played, only for the last second special symbol game played, or for the first and last second special symbol games played, and the number of second special symbol games in which the capture image 77 is displayed may be different from the number of second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special performance is played.

In addition, the explicit indication or suggestion that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol performance such as a capture image, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol performance may be displayed on a display means other than the pattern display unit 341 where the decorative symbols are displayed variably. For example, the explicit indication or suggestion may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 that displays the non-set value, which is the game setting value other than the set value, which is the game setting value set in the gaming machine 10, and when a display means is provided for executing image performance such as a sub-LCD display unit other than the pattern display unit 341 where the decorative symbols are displayed variably or image performance is executed, the indication may be displayed on the display means such as the sub-LCD display unit. In this way, the indication or suggestion that the reserved continuous performance was being performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance, are displayed on another display means, such as a sub-LCD display unit, separate from the pattern display unit 341 where the image performance is performed, so that the indication or suggestion can be displayed on the other display means without interfering with the display of the decorative symbol fluctuations and image performances on the pattern display unit 341. This allows both the fluctuation display and image performance and the indication or suggestion to be displayed reliably and appropriately without interfering with each other's visibility.

The second special symbol special effect is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 87(B) and 87(C) and may take other forms. For example, the second special symbol special effect may display other images, such as character images, instead of or in addition to text images, and may execute a specified audio effect through the speaker 26 instead of or in addition to the effect on the pattern display unit 341.

The second special chart special effect may be any effect that clearly indicates or suggests that a special benefit will be given to the player when a certain condition is met, and does not necessarily require that the decorative pattern be stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern (e.g., a repeat number) and that the jackpot type when the condition is met be a jackpot with a certain probability. Examples of the specified condition include the decorative pattern being a reach and a specific effect being executed. In other words, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines other than those in which the jackpot type when the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is a jackpot is always a jackpot with a certain probability. For example, the present invention can be applied to ST machines such as V-ST machines and type 1/2 mixed machines in which the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 includes a win other than a jackpot with a certain probability, in addition to loop jackpot machines such as the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above.

In addition, in the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, the hold continuous effects and the second special effect are executed in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, and the hold continuous effects and the second special effect are not executed in the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-frequency support mode, in the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-frequency support mode, in both or one of the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-frequency support mode, in ...

In addition, in the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, when the reserved continuous performance is executed consecutively in a given number of first special chart games, except for the exception of avoiding the occurrence of inconsistencies in which the chance eye performance is executed consecutively in four or more special chart games, a single type of reserved continuous performance is executed in each first special chart game, but different reserved continuous performances may be executed in each first special chart game, and multiple types of reserved continuous performances (for example, mini character performance and zone performance) may be executed simultaneously in one first special chart game as long as the combination is executable as a performance.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the timing for changing the type of the reserved continuous performance may be any timing at which no inconsistency occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the reserved continuous performance. For example, it may be any timing between the special game that is executed next to the special game that is executed at the stage when it is found that there may be an inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the reserved continuous performance, and the special game where there is an inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the reserved continuous performance (for example, the special game executed for the fourth time from the start of the predetermined reserved continuous performance). In other words, the timing for changing the type of the reserved continuous performance may be either the first special game or the second special game, as long as there is no inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the reserved continuous performance.

Of course, the type of the continuous reserved performance may be changed even if the number of special game plays in which the continuous reserved performance is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, four times) when a continuous reserved performance other than a chance eye performance is being executed. In other words, the type of the continuous reserved performance may be changed even if no inconvenience occurs when a single type of continuous reserved performance is executed in succession more than a predetermined number of times. In this way, by changing the type of the continuous reserved performance when no inconvenience occurs when a single type of continuous reserved performance is executed in succession more than a predetermined number of times, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored when a single type of continuous reserved performance is executed in succession in many special game plays, and therefore to prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by a single type of continuous reserved performance being executed in succession in many special game plays.

In addition, when changing the type of the reserved continuous performance, not only to prevent inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the reserved continuous performance, but also when changing the type of the reserved continuous performance, if the variable display time for the reserved first special game that triggered the start of the reserved continuous performance is long, that is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the reserved is a jackpot or a reach performance with a high jackpot expectation is executed, the type of the reserved continuous performance may be changed so that the specific reserved continuous performance type after the change has a higher jackpot expectation than the type of the predetermined reserved continuous performance before the change. For example, if the predetermined reserved continuous performance before the change is a mini character performance with the lowest jackpot expectation, the specific reserved continuous performance after the change may be set to a chance eye performance, same color pattern performance, or zone performance (mode performance) with a higher jackpot expectation than the mini character performance, and if the predetermined reserved continuous performance before the change is a chance eye performance or same color pattern performance, the specific reserved continuous performance after the change may be set to a zone performance (mode performance) with a higher jackpot expectation than the chance eye performance and same color pattern performance. In this case, the difference in the probability of winning between the specific consecutive reserved performance after the change and the specific consecutive reserved performance before the change is set to, for example, 10% or more, and preferably 25% or more.

In addition, the change in the continuous hold effect is not limited to one time, but may be made multiple times.

In addition, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent that they are applicable.

[Other Modifications]
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the outer frame 14 of the gaming machine 10 is generally made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the inner frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11, and the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12, but the gaming machine 10 may lock the inner frame 12 to be unopenable relative to the front frame 11 and lock the back pack unit 13 to be unopenable relative to the inner frame 12 by a locking means such as a cylinder lock, or a locking means for making the inner frame 12 unopenable relative to the front frame 11 and a locking means for making the back pack unit 13 unopenable relative to the inner frame 12 may be separately provided. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, a configuration in which the left end of the inner frame 12 as viewed from the front is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11, may be adopted, but a configuration in which the right end of the inner frame 12 as viewed from the front is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11 may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the left end of the back pack unit 13 in front view is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, so that the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12. However, the right end of the back pack unit 13 in front view can be rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, so that the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the game board 31 provided in the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the gaming machine 10 is configured to include an upper tray 23 and a lower tray 24, but the lower tray 24 may be omitted and only the upper tray 23 may be included. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on the right side as viewed from the front is adopted, but a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on another part, such as the left side as viewed from the front, may be adopted. In addition, a configuration in which a plurality of launch handles 22 are provided, such as a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on both the right and left sides as viewed from the front, may be adopted. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration in which the touch sensor 21a capable of detecting whether or not the player is touching the launch handle 22 (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the launch handle 22) is adopted, but a configuration in which the touch sensor 21a is omitted as the launch handle 22 may be adopted. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, and for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched using the elastic force of a spring or the like, or a configuration in which the game ball is launched using the wind pressure when compressed gas is ejected, may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, when the launch handle 22 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, one game ball is launched, for example, every 0.6 sec (100 game balls per minute), but the configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 balls) are launched per minute, or the configuration may be such that 100 or more game balls (for example, 200 balls) are launched per minute. Also, the configuration may be such that the game balls are launched when the launch handle 22 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount. Also, the configuration may be such that the game balls are launched one by one by flicking the lever. Also, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration including a speaker 26 is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or instead of the speaker 26 may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the player brings with him/her to the earphone jack, the player can fully enjoy the sound of the gaming machine 10 that the player is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding gaming machines 10. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, a configuration including a 7-segment display device is adopted as a means capable of displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts to be displayed variably based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. However, other configurations can be adopted as a means capable of displaying the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol. For example, a configuration in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a row or matrix, a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, a configuration including a halogen lamp, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-mentioned sixth and seventh embodiments, the predetermined suggestive information was the capture image 77 displayed on the symbol display unit 341 where the decorative symbols are displayed variably, but the predetermined suggestive information may be displayed on a display unit other than the symbol display unit 341. In this case, it is possible to set a dedicated display unit for displaying the predetermined suggestive information as a display unit, but it is also possible to use a display unit already provided in the gaming machine 10. That is, the predetermined suggestive information may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 that displays non-set values that are game setting values other than the set values that are game setting values set in the gaming machine 10, the main display unit 36 (the normal symbol display unit 361, the first special symbol display unit 362, the second special symbol display unit 363, the first reserved number display unit 364, and the second reserved number display unit 365), etc. Also, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration including two LED lamps is adopted as a means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts to change based on the game ball passing through the through gate 317, but other configurations may be adopted as a means capable of displaying a normal symbol, and for example, a configuration in which three or more LED lamps are arranged in a row or matrix, a configuration including a display device such as a 7-segment display device, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display device, or a configuration including a halogen lamp may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as display means such as the pattern display unit 341 capable of displaying decorative patterns, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, a plasma display device, a drum rotating display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or a configuration combining two or more of these may be adopted. In addition, in the above-mentioned sixth and seventh embodiments, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed by continuing to display the capture image 77 displayed on the pattern display unit 341, but the displayed suggestive information may be other information other than the capture image 77. For example, it may be information displayed in the first special pattern game in which the chance eye effects were continuously displayed or in the first special pattern game immediately before the second special pattern game is executed, and may be the entire screen of the first special pattern game or an image displayed on that screen explained in text. In that case, regardless of the effects displayed continuously, it may be the type of effects displayed continuously at that time, the number of jackpots, the number of changes since the end of the jackpot, the number of reserved balls, the number of shot balls, etc., or a combination of multiple of them, or one of them. In the sixth and seventh embodiments, a combination of stop symbols such as a chance eye effect was used as the reserved continuous effect, but it is not limited to this and may be anything that allows the player to visually recognize the continuity of the effect. For example, the display object displayed on the back side of the changing pattern may be something that is displayed continuously in multiple first special pattern games, for example, a specific character, a character that suggests that it is displayed continuously, a display object displayed in a part of the background image, or the background itself. The same applies to the changed effect, and it is only necessary for the player to visually recognize that the continuous effect has been changed, and it may be changed to an effect in which a specific character is displayed, for example. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the decorative pattern may be not limited to numbers, but may be various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, combinations of two or more of these, etc. For example, the decorative pattern may be alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, combinations of two or more of these, etc. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the number of pattern rows through which the decorative pattern scrolls is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In addition, when a configuration in which there is one decorative pattern row is adopted, for example, a configuration in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops may be adopted. In addition, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more decorative pattern rows is adopted, for example, a configuration in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative pattern stops on a specific line (valid line) may be adopted. In addition, in the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, a zone performance (mode performance) with a high jackpot expectation is set as the reserved continuous performance, but the reserved continuous performance may include a background performance other than the zone performance (mode performance). That is, multiple background performances may be set as the reserved continuous performance, and in this case, it is considered that the jackpot expectation of the multiple background performances is set to different values. In addition, when multiple background performances with different jackpot expectation are set as the reserved continuous performance, when a low expectation background performance with a low jackpot expectation is executed as the reserved continuous performance, it is also considered to change from the low expectation background performance to a high expectation background performance with a higher jackpot expectation. Of course, multiple background effects with the same degree of expectation of winning, for example, multiple low expectation background effects with a low expectation of winning, may be set, and the background effects may be changed between the low expectation background effects. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, various configurations may be adopted for the special electric role such as the opening and closing door 319 for opening and closing the large winning opening such as the variable winning opening 316. For example, a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the plate-like member rotates forward around the rotating shaft to open the large winning opening, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-like member that can slide in the front and rear directions of the game board 31, and a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a vane member rotating in the left and right directions (clockwise and counterclockwise directions) may be adopted. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, so-called loop probability variable machines have been described, but in a gaming machine such as a V-ST machine that transitions to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a probability variable gaming state, after the end of a jackpot game on the condition of a V winning in the jackpot game, a V winning port is provided in a large winning port such as the variable winning port 316. The V winning port may be one that can always win a prize when the large winning port is opened, but a configuration may be adopted in which it is opened when a specific condition is satisfied. An example of the specific condition is the execution of a specific round game (for example, the first round round game, the final round game). In addition, in the case where the V winning port is configured to be opened when a specific condition is satisfied, a movable member that can open and close the V winning port is provided in the V winning port, and the V winning port is opened and closed by controlling the operation of the movable member. In addition, in the case where the V winning port is opened when a specific condition is satisfied, a configuration may be adopted in which the V winning port is closed when a game ball enters the V winning port or after a certain time has passed. In addition, the changed performance (reserved continuous performance) may be the type of decorative pattern used in the first special pattern game, the color tone of the background of the first special pattern game, a part of the background of the first special pattern game, or the entire background of the first special pattern game. The timing of the change may be the start of the change of the first special pattern game, may be during the change, may be the timing when a specific event occurs in the change (e.g., reach establishment, super reach development, special reach development), or may be when the pattern stops. For example, a part or the entire performance of the background before the occurrence of a specific event (a specific performance image) may be changed to a different type of background (a predetermined performance image) at the timing when a specific event occurs (e.g., reach establishment, super reach development, special reach development). In addition, a plurality of large prize winning ports may be provided, and for example, a large prize winning port with a V prize winning port and a large prize winning port without a V prize winning port may be separately provided. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, various configurations can be adopted for ordinary electric devices such as the electric device 315b that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of game balls into a starting winning port such as the second winning port 315.For example, a tulip-shaped ordinary electric device (so-called electric chu) in which a pair of movable valves (wing members) can be opened to the left and right, a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending approximately horizontally is provided below a plate-shaped member and the starting winning port can be opened by the plate-shaped member rotating forward around the rotating shaft, a configuration in which the starting winning port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-to-rear direction of the game board 31, and a configuration in which the starting winning port is opened and closed by the blade members rotating left and right (clockwise and counterclockwise). In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the number of prize balls set for each winning port (general winning port 313, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, variable winning port 316, etc.) is an example, and by appropriately changing the number of prize balls set for each winning port, it is possible to realize multiple types of gaming machines 10 with different specifications.

Summary of the Invention
Below, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be added. Note that, for the sake of convenience, symbols may be added to the description in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each of the additions and each of the embodiments, but the invention related to the additions is not limited to the specific configurations to which the symbols are added. In addition, it is possible to select and combine the respective configurations and processing functions described below in any desired manner.

[Appendix A1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1', when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means during a specified period. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and it is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2' or Appendix A3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix A4']
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas in which the specific information is displayed,
The gaming machine according to claim A2' or A3', wherein the display control means (51) displays the special information using a part of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4', the special information is displayed in a part of the multiple display areas of the display means in which the specific information is displayed. In other words, the display area for the special information is shared with the display area for the specific information. This allows the specific information and the special information to be displayed on a common display means, so that the control for displaying the specific information and the special information can be simplified, and the configuration of the display means can also be simplified.

[Appendix A5']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A4', wherein the display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions (segments A to G) as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5', the display means has a plurality of light-emitting regions. Such a display means can be realized by an easily available, low-cost display device, such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with a display means that displays specific information and special information, while preventing the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated and the manufacturing costs from increasing.

[Appendix A6']
The display means (341) is capable of displaying an image,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A4', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (341) to display the specific information or the special information as an image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6', the specific information and special information are displayed as images on the display means. Therefore, there are many options for the image types and display modes to be displayed as the specific information and special information, and the specific information and special information can be displayed in a variety of forms. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in identifying or guessing specific numerical information or predetermined numerical information based on the specific information and special information.

[Appendix A7']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A6', characterized in that the image display means (341) is capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7', the specific information and special information are displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying the specific information and special information.

[Appendix A8']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A7', wherein the specified period is set to a period that suggests or indicates the result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A8', when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means, and a specified period during which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is not displayed on the display means is set to a period suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination. This makes it possible to display the specific information together with the result of the transition determination. For example, when a variable display image of a pattern suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination is displayed on the image display means, it is also possible to simultaneously display the specific information on the image display means. This makes it possible to increase interest in suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination by displaying the specific information.

[Appendix A9']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', wherein the specific condition is established when the gaming ball passes through a specific area (373).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A9', a specific condition may be met when the specific area is passed through, so the player can easily understand that the specific condition has been met. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the specific condition is met. In addition, when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, the display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display means. Therefore, even in situations where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by drawing attention to whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix A10']
Further provided is an outlet (373) for discharging the game ball to the rear side of the game board (31) from which the game ball is shot out;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A9', wherein the specific area is the discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix A11']
The machine further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) from which winning balls are paid out when game balls enter the winning hole,
The discharge opening (373) includes a first discharge opening (318) that discharges game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board (31), and a second discharge opening (373) different from the first discharge opening (318);
The gaming machine described in Appendix A10', wherein the specific area is the second discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix A12']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A11', wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of receiving balls during the special game.

In the gaming machines according to appendix A10' to appendix A12', when a specific condition is met in a special game triggered by the passing of a game ball through a second outlet through which the game ball can enter, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the playability by focusing on whether or not the game ball enters the second outlet.

[Appendix A13']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A12', wherein the second discharge opening (373) allows the gaming ball that has passed through the variable winning opening (316) to pass through.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A13', when a specific condition is met triggered by the passing of a gaming ball through a second outlet through which a gaming ball that has entered a variable winning port can pass in a special game, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game, a gaming ball can be shot into the game area to enter a variable winning port, causing the gaming ball to pass through the second outlet. Therefore, by simply playing the special game normally, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring special skill. This prevents players from avoiding playing the gaming machine because of the possibility of a skill difference, compared to when a skill difference may occur to cause the gaming ball to enter the second outlet.

[Appendix A14']
A third outlet (378) through which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (316) can pass and which is different from the second outlet (373);
A distribution means (37) for distributing the game balls entering the variable winning opening (316) to either the second discharge opening (373) or the third discharge opening (378);
The gaming machine described in Appendix A13', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A14', the distribution means distributes the gaming balls to the second outlet and the third outlet, so that the gameplay is provided in which whether or not a specific condition is met depends on the distribution of the gaming balls by the distribution means. This makes it possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the gaming balls in the distribution means in terms of whether or not a specific condition is met.

[Appendix A15']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific conditions are satisfied during a specified period in which the start of the special game is set.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A15', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or determining specific numerical information, and even guessing or determining specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix A16']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A15', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A16', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the transition determination result is to transition to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information and thus the specific numerical information is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix A17']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A15' or Appendix A16', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start of the special game and a start of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A17', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix A18']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A15' to Appendix A17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A18', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix A19']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A18' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state is ended.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix A20']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to claim A18' or A19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the value-granting game ends.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine of Appendix A20', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix A21']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', wherein the specified period is set to a period during which the special game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A21', specific information showing specific numerical information when a specific condition is satisfied is displayed on the display means during a specified period set during the execution period of the special game. This allows the player to enjoy identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A22']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) ends,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A21', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A22', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if a specific condition is met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix A23']
When the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays specific information (numbers) indicating at least the specific numerical information (non-set value) on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
The gaming machine according to claim A21' or A22', wherein the specified period is set at least after the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A23', if a specific condition is met within a specified period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed after the specified period has elapsed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the specific condition is met within the specified period, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the specific information displayed on the display means after the specified period has elapsed. This increases the interest in the game during the series of periods from the start of the specified period until the specific information is displayed after the specified period has elapsed.

[Appendix A24']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is to be transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game,
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A21' to Appendix A23', characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state is ended.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A24', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the special game state to which the game is transferred when the result of the transition judgment in the first game state is to transition to the special game state. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is the first win. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last, regardless of whether it is the first win or the consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first win as a trigger, the end is set to the special game to be executed last, and the specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. This makes it possible to provide a game feature in which the period during which the special game is executed is effectively used to present the player with specific information indicating specific numerical information. In addition, in the case of consecutive wins, it is also possible to present the number (amount) of information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the consecutive wins all at once after the predetermined period has elapsed. This allows the player to check a lot of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the specified period has passed, improving convenience when identifying or inferring specific numerical information, and ultimately specific numerical information, based on specific information that indicates specific numerical information.

[Appendix A25']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game to be started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specific period has elapsed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A23' or Appendix A24', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A25' includes a specific period set for a special game that is started within a specified period. That is, when multiple special games are started in a specified period, such as a consecutive win, multiple special periods are set according to the number of special games that are started in the specified period. In addition, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, when multiple specific periods exist in a specified period, it is determined whether a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period has elapsed. This allows the player to focus on whether a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and when the specific condition is satisfied, the player can focus on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest in the special game.

[Appendix A26']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-granting game is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A25', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A26', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is met for each specific period including the value-imparting game, and if the specific condition is met during that specific period, specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed after the value-imparting game ends. Therefore, in the value-imparting game, attention is focused on whether or not a specific condition is met, and if the specific condition is met, attention is focused on the content of the specific information in the ending after the value-imparting game ends. This makes it possible to effectively use the ending of the special game to provide a playful feature that displays specific information, and also increases the interest in the game by focusing attention on the progress of the game throughout the entire special game.

[Appendix A27']
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through a specific area (373) and a display lottery that is executed in response to the game ball passing through the specific area (373) is won.
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A21' to Appendix A26', wherein the specified period is after the display lottery is won.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A27', the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery which is executed when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. By carrying out a display lottery as a condition for the specific information to be displayed on the display means in this way, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the display lottery has been won (whether or not the specific information is displayed), thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, when a display lottery is carried out as a condition for the specific information to be displayed on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty and variance with which the specific condition is satisfied (the difficulty and variance with which the specific information is displayed). This allows various gameplay characteristics to be provided with respect to the display of the specific information depending on the probability of winning the display lottery, the lottery method, etc.

[Appendix A28']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', characterized in that when specific conditions are satisfied during a specified period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A28', when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. This allows the player to guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and by displaying all the specific numerical information, the player can identify all the specific numerical information. It is also possible to recognize the specific numerical information by identifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, which increases the interest of the game. In particular, since the specific information showing the specific numerical information based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period is displayed on the display means, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the number of specific conditions satisfied while hoping that many specific conditions will be satisfied in the predetermined period.

[Appendix A29']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A28', wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A29', the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display content of the display means. This allows the player to easily grasp the specific information, and therefore makes it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix A30']
The specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information,
the information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of pieces of individual information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A29', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays a number of individual information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period in the multiple display areas of the information display means.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A30', the specific information includes multiple individual pieces of information, and the information display means has multiple display areas for displaying the multiple individual pieces of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display the multiple pieces of individual information required to identify the specific numerical information in any of the multiple display areas. This provides a gameplay that allows the difficulty of identifying or guessing the specific numerical information to be adjusted depending on which of the multiple pieces of individual information is displayed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Appendix A31']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A30', characterized in that each of the multiple display areas (segments A to G) displays individual information that corresponds to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A31', each of the multiple display areas displays corresponding pieces of individual information from among the multiple pieces of individual information, making it possible to identify or guess specific numerical information based on the corresponding relationship. This allows the player to enjoy identifying or guessing specific numerical information while looking forward to seeing which of the multiple pieces of individual information will be displayed when a specific condition is met.

[Appendix A32']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30' or Appendix A31', wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A32', the information display means has a plurality of light-emitting regions. Such information display means can be realized by an easily available, low-cost display device, such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with information display means that displays specific information, while preventing the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated and the manufacturing costs from increasing.

[Appendix A33']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30' or Appendix A31', wherein the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A33', since the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be identified or guessed, there are many options for the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be identified or guessed in a variety of patterns depending on the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. This improves the playability of identifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix A34']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A33' is characterized in that the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A34', a specific image is displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying the specific image.

[Appendix A35']
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets using the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A29' to Appendix A34', wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A35', the information display means is capable of displaying numbers or letters, and the specific information is displayed corresponding to the numbers or letters. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or letters, making it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and allowing players to easily enjoy identifying or guessing the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge.

[Appendix A36']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A29', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the specific information on the individual display units (351-356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information depending on the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A36', the specific information is displayed in an individual display section corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section in which the specific information is displayed is specified for each specific numerical information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of individual display section in which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily identified. This increases the convenience when identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A37']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A36' is characterized in that the display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) to one of two states: a display state in which the specific information is displayed, and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A37', the individual display unit is controlled to one of two states, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily identified by the state of the individual display unit. This increases the convenience when identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A38']
The gaming machine according to Appendix A36' or Appendix A37', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix A39']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A36' to Appendix A38', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In the gaming machines according to appendix A38' and appendix A39', it becomes possible to form information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Appendix A40']
a display order determination means (51) for determining a display order in which the specific information is to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Further equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', characterized in that when the specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A40', when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a display order for displaying specific information on the display means is determined. In this way, the display order for displaying specific information is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby preventing the display order of specific information from becoming constant. This makes it possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly, and to prevent the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A41']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A41', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine. Incidentally, the power of the gaming machine is often turned on before the opening of the gaming hall. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A42']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A42', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A43']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period starts.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A43', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined period begins. This determines the display order of the specific information for each predetermined period. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A44']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A44', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by the start of a special game. This determines the display order of the specific information for each special game. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A45']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-granting game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A45', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a value-granting game is started. This determines the display order of the specific information for each value-granting game. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A46']
a display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information to be displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
an operating means (21) operated by a player to cause the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) during a special period (e.g., a waiting state period) different from the specified period;
a second display control means (51) for causing the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by a player during the special period;
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A46', the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. This allows the player to cause the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period to be displayed on the second display means by operating the operating means during the special period. Therefore, when the player wants to check the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, when the player has forgotten the display contents or when a player is replaced, the player can check the display contents during the special period. As a result, the player can identify or guess the specific numerical information by checking the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and can decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine based on the identification or guess.

[Appendix A47']
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A46', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A47', the special period during which the display contents can be confirmed during the specified period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is being played. This allows the player to carefully and thoroughly check the display contents at his or her own pace without being subject to time constraints, and to decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine.

[Appendix A48']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display contents of a plurality of pieces of specific information displayed during a plurality of different specified periods,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A46' or Appendix A47', characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a specified operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix A49']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A48', characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays on the second display means (35, 39, 341) the display content selected by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period from the display contents of the multiple specific information during the special period.

[Appendix A50']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A49' is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays two or more of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a specified operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A48' to appendix A50', at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information displayed during multiple specified periods can be presented on the second display means. For example, the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) can be presented on the second display means. In this case, the player can select the display contents to be presented on the second display means from the display contents of the multiple specific information, so that the player can confirm the display contents he or she desires. This allows the display contents to be confirmed effectively while avoiding confirmation of display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the display contents can be confirmed efficiently. In addition, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, so that the presented contents can also be confirmed efficiently in this case.

[Appendix A51']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A46' to Appendix A50', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix A52']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A51', wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means for displaying a variable pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment.

The gaming machine according to appendix A51' and appendix A52' is provided with a first display means displayed during a specified period and a second display means displayed during a special period, and specific information is displayed by different display means during each of the specified period and the special period. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the specified period, the display can be prevented from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is a variable display image display means, the visibility of the image (e.g., image performance) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, during the special period (e.g., standby state), the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the second display means such as a variable display image display means that displays a variable pattern. In general, the variable display image display means has a large display area, so that when the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, visibility is improved. In addition, the variable display image display means may be used to set various effects and characters executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, it becomes possible to have the variable display image display means present the display content of the specific information during the specified period by performing operations similar to those for performing various settings. Therefore, the convenience of displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix A53']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A8', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A53', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, and can be set, for example, to an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A54']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A53' is characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A54', if the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A54' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix A55']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period;
The display system further includes a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A53', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order memory means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A55', the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of the multiple specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the multiple specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A56']
the display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A55', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A56', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, a display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A57']
The gaming machine according to appendix A56', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A57', it is also possible to make a particular display sequence easier to select, and harder to select. In other words, unlike when all display sequences are selected with the same probability, it is possible to make it easier to identify a particular non-set value, and conversely, more difficult to identify a particular non-set value. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of a high setting value, the likelihood of a low setting value, and so on.

[Appendix A58']
The plurality of display orders includes a first display order in which the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is the lowest;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the first display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the first display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A58', the first display order, which has the lowest priority, is likely to be selected for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable judgment among multiple favorable judgment probabilities corresponding to multiple specific information. In other words, excluding the favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, specific information indicating specific numerical information having the lowest probability of a favorable judgment and being the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical information that is the most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, the possibility of the most disadvantageous favorable judgment probability for the player and the favorable judgment probability that is more advantageous to the player remains until the last specific information is displayed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the favorable judgment probability is the most disadvantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent early termination of play on the gaming machine and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

[Appendix A59']
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of favorable determination among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities,
the plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first identification information and the second identification information have the lowest two priorities;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57' is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the second display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the second display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A59', the second display order is likely to be selected, in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of the multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information is given a low priority. Therefore, as with the gaming machine according to appendix A58', it is difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability is the most unfavorable to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine from being ended early and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine. Furthermore, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the most favorable judgment probability among the multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information is given a low priority. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability is advantageous to the player as well as the advantageous judgment probability that is unfavorable to the player. In this way, the two specific information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the disadvantageous advantageous judgment probability and the advantageous judgment probability that is favorable to the player are given a low priority, so that it is difficult for the player to judge until the end which of the two advantageous judgment probabilities is the most advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix A60']
The multiple display orders include a third display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than a first favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than the first favorable judgment probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57' is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the third display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the third display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A60', the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of advantageous judgment higher than the first probability of advantageous judgment is set to a higher selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than that of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of advantageous judgment lower than the first probability of advantageous judgment. By setting such a high selection rate of the third display order, it is possible to make the player expect that the probability of advantageous judgment will be higher than the actual first probability of advantageous judgment up until just before grasping the first probability of advantageous judgment. This allows the player to enjoy guessing specific information (predetermined information) while hoping for the possibility that the probability of advantageous judgment will be high until just before grasping the first probability of advantageous judgment.

[Appendix A61']
The multiple display orders include a fourth display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than a first favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than the first favorable judgment probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57' is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the fourth display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the fourth display order.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A61', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is set higher than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability higher than the first advantageous judgment probability. By setting such a high selection rate of the fourth display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is left as hidden specific information just before the first advantageous judgment probability is grasped. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous judgment probability is the actual first advantageous judgment probability and the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability. As a result, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability advantageous to the player is finally grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so that the joy when the set value is grasped is improved.

[Appendix A62']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', further comprising a display restriction means (51) for restricting the specific information from being displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during periods other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A62', the display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during periods other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for a player who has performed a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. This makes it possible to prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A63']
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A62', wherein the period other than the specified period is a standby period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A63', during the standby period when neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed, the specific information is restricted from being displayed on the display means. Here, players are generally replaced during the standby period. Therefore, by restricting the specific information from being displayed on the display means during the standby period, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A64']
The gaming machine described in Appendix A62' or Appendix A63', characterized in that the display restriction means (51) restricts the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period, during a period other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A64', during periods other than the prescribed period, the display of specific information previously displayed on the display means during the prescribed period is restricted. In other words, the specific information is only displayed during the prescribed period, and the display of the display history of past specific information is also restricted outside the prescribed period. This makes it impossible to check the specific information previously displayed based on the display history, and therefore more reliably prevents other players from taking advantage of the benefit obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information based on the display history.

[Appendix A65']
The gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1' to A3', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the multiple specific information (numbers) in a first display order when a first specific condition is met during a specified period, and causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the multiple specific information (numbers) in a first display order different from the first display order when a second specific condition different from the first specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A65', when a first specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces are displayed on the display means in a first display order, and when a second specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces (numbers) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces is set according to the type of specific condition that is met. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information pieces from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents a player from quickly realizing that the probability of a favorable judgment is low when the probability of a favorable judgment corresponds to a low probability of a favorable judgment. As a result, even if the probability of a favorable judgment is low, early termination of play on the gaming machine is prevented, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine is prevented.

[Appendix A66']
the first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41);
The gaming machine described in Appendix A65', characterized in that the second specific condition includes that second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the multiple types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A66', the first specific condition includes first predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes second predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is specified based on the predetermined numerical information, and multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to the display order. In other words, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it also becomes possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A67']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied;
The display system further includes a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A65' or Appendix A66', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A67', the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of the multiple specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the multiple specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A68']
the display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A67', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A68', multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A69']
The device further includes a second display control means (41) for displaying predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information on a second display means (45),
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to a player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1' to Appendix A3', wherein the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A69', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted. That is, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one specific numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information during a specified period is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, by displaying the specified information on the second display means provided at a position where player visibility is restricted, it is possible to prevent players from understanding the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the specified information can be understood by the amusement hall outside business hours. This allows the amusement hall to check the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the specified numerical information, the specified information showing the changed specified numerical information can be checked, making it easier to change the specified numerical information.

[Appendix A70']
The game machine further includes a game board (31) from which the game balls are shot out;
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A69', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A70', specific information showing specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided on the front side of the gaming board, and predetermined information showing the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a second display means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, the specific information displayed on the first display means is easy to view, and the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be easily restricted.

[Appendix A71']
The game board (31) is fixed to a frame body (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A70', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position that is visible when the game board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A71', a second display means is provided on the back side of a gaming board that is fixed to a frame so as to be able to be opened and closed. Therefore, by closing the gaming board, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the specific information displayed on the second display means, while by opening the gaming board, the specific information displayed on the second display means can be confirmed by the gaming hall. In this way, a state in which the specific information on the second display means is visible and a state in which visibility is restricted can be achieved by the simple task of opening and closing the gaming board.

[Appendix A72']
The second display control means (41)
The second display means (45) is controllable between a display state in which the predetermined numerical information is displayed and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the second display means (45),
When a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the game board (31) is controlled from the non-display state to the display state,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A70' or Appendix A71', characterized in that when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the gaming machine controls from the display state to the non-display state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A72', a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed can be selected by operating a specific operating means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the gaming hall, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the predetermined information through the second display means, even when the gaming board is opened in the event of a ball jam or the like occurring in the gaming machine.

[Appendix B1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The specific condition can be established when the game ball passes through a specific area (373),
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1', a specific condition can be met by passing through a specific area, so the player can easily understand that the specific condition has been met. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the specific condition has been met. In addition, the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means by the gaming ball passing through the specific area. Therefore, even in situations where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by focusing on whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix B2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix B3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2' or Appendix B3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix B4']
Further provided is an outlet (373) for discharging the game ball to the rear side of the game board (31) from which the game ball is shot out;
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix B1' to Appendix B3', wherein the specific area is the discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix B5']
The machine further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) from which winning balls are paid out when game balls enter the winning hole,
The discharge opening (373) includes a first discharge opening (318) that discharges game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board (31), and a second discharge opening (373) different from the first discharge opening (318);
The gaming machine described in Appendix B4', wherein the specific area is the second discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix B6']
The gaming machine described in Appendix B5', wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of receiving balls during the special game.

In the gaming machines according to appendix B4' to appendix B6', when a specific condition is met in a special game triggered by the passing of a game ball through a second outlet through which the game ball can enter, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the playability by focusing on whether or not the game ball enters the second outlet.

[Appendix B7']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
The gaming machine described in Appendix B6', characterized in that the second discharge opening (373) allows the gaming ball that has passed through the variable winning opening (316) to pass through.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B7', when a specific condition is met triggered by the passing of a gaming ball through a second outlet through which a gaming ball that has entered a variable winning port can pass in a special game, the display content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game, a gaming ball can be shot into the game area to enter the variable winning port, causing the gaming ball to pass through the second outlet. Therefore, by simply playing the special game normally, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring special skill. This prevents players from avoiding playing the gaming machine because of the possibility of a skill difference, compared to when a skill difference may occur to cause the gaming ball to enter the second outlet.

[Appendix B8']
A third outlet (378) through which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (316) can pass and which is different from the second outlet (373);
A distribution means (37) for distributing the game balls entering the variable winning opening (316) to either the second discharge opening (373) or the third discharge opening (378);
The gaming machine described in Appendix B7' further comprises:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B8', the distribution means distributes the gaming balls to the second outlet and the third outlet, so that the gameplay is provided in which whether or not a specific condition is met depends on the distribution of the gaming balls by the distribution means. This makes it possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the gaming balls in the distribution means in terms of whether or not a specific condition is met.

[Appendix B9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices B1' to B8', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B9', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix B10']
The gaming machine described in Appendix B9', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B10', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix B10' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix C1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a prescribed period from a prescribed start timing to a prescribed end timing when a specific condition is satisfied during the prescribed period;
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine characterized in that the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information showing the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy identifying the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix C2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1' is characterized in that, when the specific condition is met, the display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information during the specified period.

[Appendix C3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period when the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2' or appendix C3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows a part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix C4']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices C1' to C3', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information and thus the specific numerical information is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix C5']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C1' to Appendix C4', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C5', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix C6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C5', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C6', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix C7']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix C6' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C7', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix C8']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The gaming machine according to claim C6' or C7', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C8', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix C9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices C1' to C8', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C9', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix C10']
The gaming machine described in Appendix C9' is characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C10', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C10' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix D1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
The specified period is set to a period during which the special game is being played.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1', specific information showing specific numerical information when a specific condition is satisfied is displayed on the display means during a specified period set during the execution period of the special game. This allows the player to enjoy identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix D2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1' is characterized in that, when the specific condition is met, the display control means (51) is capable of causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information during the specified period.

[Appendix D3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period when the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2' or appendix D3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix D4']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) ends,
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D3', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix D4', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix D5']
When the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays specific information (numbers) indicating at least the specific numerical information (non-set value) on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D4', wherein the specified period is set at least after the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D5', if a specific condition is met within a specified period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed after the specified period has elapsed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the specific condition is met within the specified period, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the specific information displayed on the display means after the specified period has elapsed. This increases the interest in the game during the series of periods from the start of the specified period until the specific information is displayed after the specified period has elapsed.

[Appendix D6']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is to be transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D5' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the special game state to which the game is transferred when the result of the transition judgment in the first game state is to transition to the special game state. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is the first win. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last, regardless of whether it is the first win or the consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first win as a trigger, the end is set to the special game to be executed last, and the specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. This makes it possible to provide a game feature in which the period during which the special game is executed is effectively used to present the player with specific information indicating specific numerical information. In addition, in the case of consecutive wins, it is also possible to present the number (amount) of information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the consecutive wins all at once after the predetermined period has elapsed. This allows the player to check a lot of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the specified period has passed, improving convenience when identifying or inferring specific numerical information, and ultimately specific numerical information, based on specific information that indicates specific numerical information.

[Appendix D7']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game to be started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specific period has elapsed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D5' or Appendix D6', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to appendix D7' includes a specific period set for a special game that is started within a specified period. That is, when multiple special games are started in a specified period, such as a consecutive win, multiple special periods are set according to the number of special games that are started in the specified period. In addition, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, when multiple specific periods exist in a specified period, it is determined whether a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period has elapsed. This allows the player to focus on whether a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and when the specific condition is satisfied, the player can focus on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest in the special game.

[Appendix D8']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-granting game is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D7', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D8', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is met for each specific period including the value-imparting game, and if the specific condition is met during that specific period, specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed after the value-imparting game ends. Therefore, in the value-imparting game, attention is focused on whether or not a specific condition is met, and if the specific condition is met, attention is focused on the content of the specific information in the ending after the value-imparting game ends. This makes it possible to effectively use the ending of the special game to provide a playful feature that displays specific information, and also increases the interest in the game by focusing attention on the progress of the game throughout the entire special game.

[Appendix D9']
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through a specific area (373) and a display lottery that is executed in response to the game ball passing through the specific area (373) is won.
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix D1' to Appendix D8', wherein the specified period is after the display lottery is won.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D9', the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery which is executed when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. By carrying out a display lottery as a condition for the specific information to be displayed on the display means in this way, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the display lottery has been won (whether or not the specific information is displayed), thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, when a display lottery is carried out as a condition for the specific information to be displayed on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty and variance with which the specific condition is satisfied (the difficulty and variance with which the specific information is displayed). This allows various playability to be imparted to the display of the specific information depending on the probability of winning the display lottery, the lottery method, etc.

[Appendix D10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices D1' to D9', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D10', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, and can be set, for example, to an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix D11']
The gaming machine described in Appendix D10', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D11', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix D11' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix E1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the specific numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a prescribed period from a prescribed start timing to a prescribed end timing, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied during the predetermined period; and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1', when a specific condition is satisfied in a specified period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the specified period. This allows the player to guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and by displaying all the specific numerical information, the player can identify all the specific numerical information. It is also possible to recognize the specific numerical information by identifying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, which increases the interest of the game. In particular, since the specific information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a specified period, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the number of specific conditions satisfied, hoping that many specific conditions will be satisfied in the specified period.

[Appendix E2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix E3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2' or appendix E3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix E4']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E1' to Appendix E3', wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4', the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display content of the display means. This allows the player to easily grasp the specific information, and therefore makes it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix E5']
The specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information,
the information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of pieces of individual information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix E4', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays a number of individual information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period in the multiple display areas of the information display means.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E5', the specific information includes multiple individual pieces of information, and the information display means has multiple display areas for displaying the multiple individual pieces of information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display the multiple pieces of individual information required to identify the specific numerical information in any of the multiple display areas. This provides a gameplay that allows the difficulty of identifying or guessing the specific numerical information to be adjusted depending on which of the multiple pieces of individual information is displayed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Appendix E6']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E5', characterized in that each of the multiple display areas (segments A to G) displays individual information that corresponds to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E6', each of the multiple display areas displays corresponding pieces of individual information from among the multiple pieces of individual information, making it possible to identify or guess specific numerical information based on the correspondence. This allows the player to enjoy identifying or guessing specific numerical information while looking forward to seeing which of the multiple pieces of individual information will be displayed when a specific condition is met.

[Appendix E7']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5' or Appendix E6', wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E7', the information display means has a plurality of light-emitting regions. Such information display means can be realized by an easily available, low-cost display device, such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with information display means that displays specific information, while preventing the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated and the manufacturing costs from increasing.

[Appendix E8']
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5' or Appendix E6', wherein the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E8', since the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be identified or guessed, there are many options for the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be identified or guessed in a variety of patterns depending on the form of the specific image and the process leading up to the display of the specific image. This improves the playability of identifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix E9']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E8' is characterized in that the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E9', a specific image is displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying the specific image.

[Appendix E10']
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets using the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix E5' to Appendix E9', wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E10', the information display means is capable of displaying numbers or letters, and the specific information is displayed corresponding to the numbers or letters. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or letters, making it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and allowing players to easily enjoy identifying or guessing the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge.

[Appendix E11']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E4' is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the specific information on the individual display units (351-356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information depending on the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E11', the specific information is displayed in an individual display section corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section in which the specific information is displayed is specified for each specific numerical information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of individual display section in which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily identified. This increases the convenience when identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix E12']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E11' is characterized in that the display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) to one of two states: a display state in which the specific information is displayed, and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E12', the individual display unit is controlled to one of two states, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily identified by the state of the individual display unit. This increases the convenience of identifying the specific numerical information.

[Appendix E13']
The gaming machine according to appendix E11' or appendix E12', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix E14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E11' to E13', wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In the gaming machines according to appendix E13' and appendix E14', it becomes possible to form information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Appendix E15']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1' to E14', wherein a start time of the predetermined period is set during the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E15', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix E16']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R special jackpot game state and a 16R special jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified;
The gaming machine described in Appendix E15', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E16', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game in the first game state in which the probability of the transition determination means determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is lower than in the second game state. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game of the so-called first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for one first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, so that at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information, and thus the specific numerical information, is guaranteed for one first win.

[Appendix E17']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to appendix E15' or appendix E16', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start of the special game and a start of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E17', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix E18']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E15' to E17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E18', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of players in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in the special game in addition to the start of the period, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is increased.

[Appendix E19']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E18' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information can be obtained to identify specific numerical information, making it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix E20']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix E18' or appendix E19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, game value is not awarded and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix E20', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if a specific condition is met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix E21']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix E1' to Appendix E20', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E21', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, and can be set, for example, to an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix E22']
The gaming machine described in Appendix E21', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E22', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix E22' differs from conventional slot machines in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value, in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means.

[Appendix F1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a specified start timing to a specified end timing when a specific condition is satisfied during the specified period;
a display order determination means (51) for determining a display order in which the specific information is to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
When the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information during the specified period based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51);
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F1', when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a display order for displaying specific information on the display means is determined. In this way, the display order for displaying specific information is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby preventing the display order of specific information from becoming constant. This makes it possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly, and to prevent the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix F3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F2' or appendix F3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix F4']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4', the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine. Incidentally, the power of the gaming machine is often turned on before the opening of the amusement hall. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined period begins. This determines the display order of the specific information for each predetermined period. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appended note F7', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by the start of a special game. This determines the display order of the specific information for each special game. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F8']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-granting game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F8', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a value-granting game is started. This determines the display order of the specific information for each value-granting game. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F9']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51);
Further equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices F1' to F8', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appended note F9', the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of the multiple specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the multiple specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F10']
the display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine according to appended claim F9', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F10', multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix F11']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F10', wherein a start point of the predetermined period is set during the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F11', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or determining specific numerical information, and even guessing or determining specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix F12']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix F11', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F12', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the transition determination result is that the game state will be transitioned to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information, and thus the specific numerical information, is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix F13']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to appendix F11' or appendix F12', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start of the special game and a start of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F13', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix F14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F11' to F13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F14', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix F15']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix F14' is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note F15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix F16']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix F14' or appendix F15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix F16', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix F17']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices F1' to F16', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F17', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, and can be set, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F18']
The gaming machine described in Appendix F17', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F18', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix F18' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix G1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a first display control means (51) for displaying, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the specific numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information on a first display means (35, 39, 341) during a specified period from a specific start timing to a specific end timing;
a display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information to be displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
an operating means (21) operated by a player to cause the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) during a special period (e.g., a waiting state period) different from the specified period;
a second display control means (51) for causing the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by a player during the special period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1', the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. This allows the player to display the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period on the second display means by operating the operating means during the special period. Therefore, when the player wants to check the display contents of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, when the player has forgotten the display contents or when a player is replaced, the player can check the display contents during the special period. As a result, the player can identify or guess the specific numerical information by checking the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and can decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine based on the identification or guess.

[Appendix G2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2' or appendix G3', not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the first display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the first display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix G4']
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G3', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G4', the special period during which the display contents can be confirmed during the specified period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is being played. This allows the player to carefully and thoroughly check the display contents at his or her own pace without being subject to time constraints, and to decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine.

[Appendix G5']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display contents of a plurality of pieces of specific information displayed during a plurality of different specified periods,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices G1' to G4', characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a specified operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix G6']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G5' is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays on the second display means (35, 39, 341) the display content selected by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period from the display contents of the multiple specific information during the special period.

[Appendix G7']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G5' is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays two or more of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a specified operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G5' to appendix G7', at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information displayed during multiple specified periods can be presented on the second display means. For example, the display contents selected by the player from the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) can be presented on the second display means. In this case, the player can select the display contents to be presented on the second display means from the display contents of the multiple specific information, so that the player can confirm the display contents he or she desires. This allows the display contents to be confirmed effectively while avoiding confirmation of display contents such as previously confirmed information and information with a small amount of information, so that the display contents can be confirmed efficiently. In addition, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at once, so that the presented contents can also be confirmed efficiently in this case.

[Appendix G8']
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G7', characterized in that the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix G9']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G8', characterized in that the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means for displaying a variable pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or indicating the result of the transition judgment.

The gaming machine according to appendix G8' and appendix G9' is provided with a first display means displayed during a specified period and a second display means displayed during a special period, and specific information is displayed by different display means during each of the specified period and the special period. Therefore, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means during the specified period, the display can be prevented from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is a variable display image display means, the visibility of the image (e.g., image performance) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, during the special period (e.g., standby state), the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the second display means such as a variable display image display means that displays a variable pattern. In general, the variable display image display means has a large display area, so that when the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, visibility is improved. In addition, the variable display image display means may be used to set various effects and characters executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, it becomes possible to have the variable display image display means present the display content of the specific information during the specified period by performing operations similar to those for performing various settings. Therefore, the convenience of displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix G10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices G1' to G9', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G10', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix G11']
The gaming machine described in Appendix G10', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G11', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix G11' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix H1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information, in a distinguishable manner, during a prescribed period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period;
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information for the specified period in a predetermined display order;
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H1', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order that makes it easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order that makes it easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix H3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H2' or Supplementary Note H3', not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix H4']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders defining the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period;
The display system further includes a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices H1' to H3', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H4', the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of the multiple specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the multiple specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H5']
the display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine according to claim H4', wherein the one display order is selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H5', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix H6']
The gaming machine according to claim H5', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H6', it is also possible to make a specific display sequence easier to select, and harder to select. In other words, unlike when all display sequences are selected with the same probability, it is possible to make it easier to identify a specific non-set value, and conversely, more difficult to identify a specific non-set value. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of a high setting value, the likelihood of a low setting value, and so on.

[Appendix H7']
The plurality of display orders includes a first display order in which the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is the lowest;
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the first display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the first display order.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7', the first display order, which has the lowest priority, is likely to be selected for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable judgment among multiple favorable judgment probabilities corresponding to multiple specific information. In other words, excluding the favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, specific information indicating specific numerical information having the lowest probability of a favorable judgment and being the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical information that is the most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, the possibility of the most disadvantageous favorable judgment probability for the player and the favorable judgment probability that is more advantageous to the player remains until the last specific information is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the favorable judgment probability is the most disadvantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent early termination of play on the gaming machine and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

[Appendix H8']
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of favorable determination among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities,
the plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first identification information and the second identification information have the lowest two priorities;
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the second display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the second display order.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H8', the second display order is likely to be selected, in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of the multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information has a low priority. Therefore, as with the gaming machine according to the appendix H6', it is difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability is the most unfavorable to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine from being ended early and to prevent a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine. Furthermore, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the most probable advantageous judgment probability among the multiple advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information has a low priority. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand that not only the advantageous judgment probability that is unfavorable to the player, but also the advantageous judgment probability that is favorable to the player. In this way, the two specific information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability that is unfavorable to the player and the advantageous judgment probability that is favorable to the player have a low priority, so that it is difficult for the player to judge until the end which of the two advantageous judgment probabilities is the most advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix H9']
The multiple display orders include a third display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than a first favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than the first favorable judgment probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the third display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the third display order.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H9', the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of advantageous judgment higher than the first probability of advantageous judgment is set to a higher selection rate for the third display order, which is lower than the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of advantageous judgment lower than the first probability of advantageous judgment. By setting such a high selection rate for the third display order, it is possible to make the player expect that the probability of advantageous judgment will be higher than the actual first probability of advantageous judgment up until just before grasping the first probability of advantageous judgment. This allows the player to enjoy guessing specific information (predetermined information) while hoping for the possibility that the probability of advantageous judgment will be high up until just before grasping the first probability of advantageous judgment.

[Appendix H10']
The multiple display orders include a fourth display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability lower than a first favorable judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable judgment probability higher than the first favorable judgment probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6', characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the fourth display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the fourth display order.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note H10', the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is set higher than the selection rate of the fourth display order, which is lower than the selection rate of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability higher than the first advantageous judgment probability. By setting the selection rate of the fourth display order higher, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is left as hidden specific information just before the first advantageous judgment probability is grasped. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous judgment probability is the actual first advantageous judgment probability and the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability lower than the first advantageous judgment probability. As a result, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability advantageous to the player is finally grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so that the joy when the set value is grasped is improved.

[Appendix H11']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H1' to Appendix H10', wherein a start point of the predetermined period is set during the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H11', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix H12']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H11', characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H12', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the transition determination result is to transition to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information and thus the specific numerical information is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix H13']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to claim H11' or H12', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start of the special game and a start of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H13', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix H14']
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H11' to Appendix H13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H14', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is increased.

[Appendix H15']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state is ended.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note H15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix H16']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to claim H14' or H15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the value-granting game ends.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded and no transition judgment results are not announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix H16', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix H17']
The gaming machine described in any of Appendices H1' to H15', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H17', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix H17' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix I1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied;
a display restriction means (51) for restricting the specific information from being displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the specified period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1', the display of the specific information on the display means is restricted during periods other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for a player who has performed a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. This makes it possible to prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information.

[Appendix I2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix I3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1', characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix I2' or appendix I3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix I4']
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix I1' to Appendix I3', characterized in that the period other than the specified period is a standby period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I4', during the standby period when neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed, the specific information is restricted from being displayed on the display means. Here, players are generally replaced during the standby period. Therefore, by restricting the specific information from being displayed on the display means during the standby period, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information.

[Appendix I5']
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1' to I4', characterized in that the display restriction means (51) restricts the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period, during a period other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I5', during periods other than the prescribed period, the display of specific information previously displayed on the display means during the prescribed period is restricted. In other words, the specific information is only displayed during the prescribed period, and the display of the display history of past specific information is also restricted outside the prescribed period. This makes it impossible to check the specific information previously displayed based on the display history, and therefore more reliably prevents other players from taking advantage of the benefit obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for identifying or guessing the specific numerical information based on the display history.

[Appendix I6']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1' to I5', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, and can be set, for example, to an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix I7']
The gaming machine described in Appendix I6' is characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I7', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix I7' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix J1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information, in a distinguishable manner during a prescribed period from a prescribed start timing to a prescribed end timing when a first specific condition or a second specific condition different from the second specific condition is satisfied during a prescribed period;
Equipped with
the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, and causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a second display order different from the first display order when the second specific condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1', when a first specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces are displayed on the display means in a first display order, and when a second specific condition is met, a plurality of specific information pieces (numbers) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces is set according to the type of specific condition that is met. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information pieces, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information pieces from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents a player from early realizing that the probability of an advantageous judgment is low when the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponds to a low probability of an advantageous judgment. As a result, even when the probability of an advantageous judgment is low, early termination of play on the gaming machine is prevented, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine is prevented.

[Appendix J2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix J3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1' is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J2' or appendix J3', not only specific information is displayed on the display means, but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on special information when special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix J4']
the first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41);
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1' to J3', characterized in that the second specific condition includes that second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the multiple types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appended note J4', the first specific condition includes first predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes second predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is determined by the predetermined numerical information, and multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to the display order. In other words, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This allows the display order to be set based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it also becomes possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J5']
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information during the predetermined period when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied;
The display system further includes a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1' to J4', characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order memory means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J5', the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period according to one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority order of the display order of the multiple specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of the multiple display orders, it is possible to display multiple specific information in various orders, thereby preventing the display order of the multiple specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J6']
the display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine according to appended claim J5', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J6', multiple specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in accordance with a display order selected from multiple display orders based on the predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous judgment corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J7']
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1' to J6', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J7', when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period in which the start of a special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or determining specific numerical information, and even guessing or determining specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a specified period. And, by setting the start of the specified period to a special game, a player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix J8']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming machine described in Appendix J7' is characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition judgment in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J8', the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state at a lower probability than at the second game state and the transition determination result is that the game state will be transitioned to the special game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or determine the specific numerical information, and thus the specific numerical information, is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix J9']
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to appendix J7' or appendix J8', wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-imparting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J9', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so that the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game starts.

[Appendix J10']
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices J7' to J9', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J10', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game will decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in addition to the start of the period in the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease in interest in the game, is increased.

[Appendix J11']
The special game state is:
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which the game state is transitioned to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified after the special game in the special game state is ended;
a second special game state (a 5R high probability jackpot game state and a 16R high probability jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of the transition determination means (41) determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the game state is transitioned to a second game state (a high probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination is notified,
The end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note J11', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state that transitions to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, that is, in the case of a single win in which the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, when the result of the transition judgment of the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, that is, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, and when the result of the transition judgment of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win in which the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive win ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game is transitioned to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more times than a single win, and in the case of a consecutive win, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more the player can expect to earn in game value, and the more specific information indicating specific numerical information can be obtained, which can make it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix J12']
The special game includes a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value imparting game ends,
The gaming machine according to claim J10' or J11', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, game value is not awarded and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J12', the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so that if a specific condition is met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize the blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during the special game.

[Appendix J13']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1' to J12', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J13', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J14']
The gaming machine described in Appendix J13', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J14', if the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix J14' differs from conventional slot machines in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value, in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means.

[Appendix K1']
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a first display control means (51) for displaying, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the specific numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information on a first display means (35, 39, 341) during a specified period from a specific start timing to a specific end timing;
a second display control means (41) for causing a second display means (45) to display predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information;
Equipped with
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to a player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appended note K1', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted. That is, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one specific numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information during a specified period is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is also possible to recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, by displaying the specified information on the second display means provided at a position where player visibility is restricted, it is possible to prevent players from understanding the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the specified information can be understood by the amusement hall outside business hours. This allows the amusement hall to check the specified numerical information based on the specified information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the specified numerical information, the specified information showing the changed specified numerical information can be checked, making it easier to change the specified numerical information.

[Appendix K2']
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1', characterized in that the first display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix K3']
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1', characterized in that the first display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K2' or appendix K3', not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to guess specific numerical information based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing specific numerical information based on the special information, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix K4']
The game machine further includes a game board (31) from which the game balls are shot out;
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1' to K3', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K4', specific information showing specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided on the front side of the gaming board, and predetermined information showing the predetermined numerical information is displayed on a second display means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, the specific information displayed on the first display means is easy to view, and the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be easily restricted.

[Appendix K5']
The game board (31) is fixed to a frame body (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine according to appendix K4', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position that is visible when the game board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K5', a second display means is provided on the back side of a gaming board that is fixed to a frame so as to be able to be opened and closed. Therefore, by closing the gaming board, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the specific information displayed on the second display means, while by opening the gaming board, the specific information displayed on the second display means can be confirmed by the gaming hall. In this way, a state in which the specific information on the second display means is visible and a state in which visibility is restricted can be achieved by the simple act of opening and closing the gaming board.

[Appendix K6']
The second display control means (41)
The second display means (45) is controllable between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed on the second display means (45),
When a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the game board (31) is controlled from the non-display state to the display state,
The gaming machine according to claim K4' or K5', wherein when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the gaming machine controls from the display state to the non-display state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K6', a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed can be selected by operating a specific operating means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the gaming hall, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the predetermined information through the second display means, even when the gaming board is opened in the event of a ball jam or the like occurring in the gaming machine.

[Appendix K7']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendices K1' to K6', characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K7', multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order in which the predetermined numerical information is easy to narrow down or recognize, or conversely, an order in which the predetermined numerical information is difficult to narrow down or recognize, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous judgment is high or low, or conversely, an order in which it is difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix K8']
The gaming machine described in Appendix K7', characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K8', if the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, which allows the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to appendix K8' differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that no information is presented that negates a high setting value, such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix A1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a specific condition is met in the specific first notification game (first special pattern game), the specific effect image (e.g., an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (e.g., an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, a specific effect image is continuously displayed in a specific first notification game triggered by a game ball entering the second winning port, which is executed after the end of a specific second notification game triggered by a game ball entering the second winning port in the first judgment state, and when a specific condition is established in the specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to a specific effect image. In this way, a specific effect image is continuously displayed in a specific first notification game triggered by a game ball entering the second winning port, which is executed after the end of a specific second notification game triggered by a game ball entering the second winning port in the first judgment state, and when a specific condition is established in the specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to a specific effect image, making it possible to select whether to continue displaying the specific effect image or to switch to and display the specific effect image based on whether or not a specific condition is established. For example, if the continued execution of a specific effect image does not cause any inconvenience, the specific effect image can be continued, and if the continued execution of a specific effect image causes any inconvenience, it is possible to switch to and execute a predetermined effect image. As a result, inconvenience caused by the continued execution of a specific effect image can be prevented.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, it is possible to select whether to continue displaying the specific effect image or to switch to and display a predetermined effect image based on whether a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state. This reduces the possibility that, when a specific effect image ends and a predetermined effect image is displayed, the player will feel uncomfortable when the specific effect image is resumed, or, conversely, will feel uncomfortable with the presentation in the progress of the game when the specific effect image is not resumed, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game caused by the player feeling uncomfortable with the presentation in the progress of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, if a specific condition is not met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state, the specific effect image continues to be displayed, so that the specific effect image displayed in the first notification game can also be usefully used in the second notification game.

[Appendix A2]
a bonus awarding means (41) for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is displayed consecutively in the notification game a specific number of times or more;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1, characterized in that the specific condition includes that no bonus will be given to the player when the specific presentation image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game more than the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, the specific conditions include that no special benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in a specific number of notification games or more. In this way, by including that no special benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in a specific number of notification games or more, when the specific performance image continues to be displayed when the specific conditions are not met, it is possible to avoid the specific performance image being displayed consecutively in a specific number of notification games or more, even though no special benefit will be given to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a special benefit is not given to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a special benefit will be given.

[Appendix A3]
The permissible state of the second winning port (315) includes a first permissible state (short open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is a first time, and a second permissible state (long open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is longer than the first time,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A2, characterized in that the specific condition includes a game ball entering the second winning port (315) that is in the first permissible state (short open) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, the game ball enters the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by having the game ball enter the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed, when the specific effect image is continuously displayed by opening the second winning port in the first permissible state, it is possible to avoid the specific effect image being displayed continuously for a predetermined number of notification games or more, even though there is no bonus to be awarded to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A2, characterized in that the specific condition includes that a specific number (exceeding 0) of gaming balls or less enters the second winning port (315) that is in the permissible state during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4, the game includes a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 being entered into the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means. In this way, by including a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 being entered into the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means, when the number of second notification games executed in the allowed state triggered by the entry of game balls into the second winning port is a specific number exceeding 0 or less, and the specific effect image is continuously displayed, it is avoided that the specific effect image is not granted to the player even though there is no bonus to be granted to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not granted to the player even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be granted.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A2 to Appendix A4, wherein the bonus is execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the bonus is the execution of a special game. In this way, by the bonus being the execution of a special game, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the special game is not executed even though it is clearly indicated in the notification game that the special game will be executed.

[Appendix A6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A5, wherein the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix A7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1 to A6, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix A8]
A gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A7, characterized in that in the specified second notification game (second special chart game), the specific presentation image can be switched to the specified presentation image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A8, when a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state, the specific effect image can be switched to a specific effect image in a specific second notification game. In this way, when a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to a specific effect image in the specific second notification game, thereby avoiding inconveniences occurring in the specific second notification game due to the specific effect image being continuously executed due to the specific condition being met in the specific first notification game, and even if an inconvenience occurs in the first notification game that is resumed after the end of the specific second notification game, the occurrence of the inconvenience is avoided in advance before the first notification game is executed.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A8, characterized in that the specified second notification game (second special chart game) is the second notification game (second special chart game) that is executed following the specific first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A9, the predetermined second notification game is a second notification game that is executed following a specific first notification game in which a specific condition is met. In this way, by the predetermined second notification game being a second notification game that is executed following a specific first notification game in which a specific condition is met, the occurrence of an inconvenience is immediately avoided after it is recognized that an inconvenience will occur due to the continued execution of the specific presentation image.

[Appendix A10]
a bonus awarding means (41) for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is displayed consecutively in the notification game a specific number of times or more;
The specific condition includes that no special benefit is given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game the specific number of times or more;
The specified second notification game (second special game) is the second notification game (second special game) of the specified number of times in which the specific performance image is executed consecutively.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A10, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the second notification game. In this way, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the second notification game, so that the specific effect image can be displayed continuously for the maximum period of time. This makes it possible to maximize the player's expectations due to the specific effect image being displayed continuously, and therefore reduces the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the specific effect image being switched to the predetermined effect image, and thus prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix A11]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A7, characterized in that in a predetermined first notification game (first special chart game) executed in the specific first notification game, the specific presentation image can be switched to the predetermined presentation image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A11, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state, the specific presentation image can be switched to a predetermined presentation image in the predetermined first notification game. In this way, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state, the specific presentation image can be switched to a predetermined presentation image in the predetermined first notification game, thereby avoiding inconvenience in the first notification game caused by continuing to execute the specific presentation image due to the fulfillment of the specific condition.

In addition, by switching from the specific effect image to the specific effect image in the first notification game that is resumed after the end of the specific second notification game, a large number of notification games in which the specific effect image is displayed continuously are ensured in cases where continued execution of the specific effect image would cause inconvenience. In this way, by maximizing the number of notification games in which the specific effect image is displayed continuously, the player can enjoy the specific effect image to the fullest extent, even in cases where continued execution of the specific effect image would cause inconvenience due to the establishment of a specific condition.

[Appendix A12]
a bonus awarding means (41) for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is displayed consecutively in the notification game a specific number of times or more;
The specific condition includes that no special benefit is given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game the specific number of times or more;
The specific first notification game (first special game) is the specific number of times the first notification game (first special game) is executed in succession, the gaming machine described in Appendix A11.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A12, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the first notification game. In this way, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the first notification game, so that the specific effect image can be displayed continuously for the maximum period of time. This makes it possible to maintain the player's expectations due to the specific effect image being displayed continuously to the maximum extent, and thus reduces the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the specific effect image being switched to the predetermined effect image, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix A13]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A12, wherein the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are set to have the same or substantially the same expectation level.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A13, the degree of expectation of transitioning to a special gaming state is set to be the same or approximately the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image. In this way, by setting the degree of expectation of transitioning to a special gaming state to be the same or approximately the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, even when the predetermined image displayed on the display means is switched from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image, the switching of the predetermined image can maintain the player's expectation of the display of the predetermined image without lowering it, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest due to the switching of the predetermined image and preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix A14]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A13, wherein the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%.

[Appendix A15]
The gaming machine according to appendix A14, wherein the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -2.5% to +2.5%.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A14 and A15, the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%. In this way, by setting the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%, the player's expectation for the display of the predetermined image can be more appropriately maintained, so that the player's interest in the game can be more appropriately prevented from decreasing due to the switching of the predetermined image, and a decrease in interest in the game can be more appropriately prevented.

[Appendix A16]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A13 to Appendix A15, characterized in that the probability of the specific effect image being displayed on the display means (341) in the first notification game (first special game) in the first judgment state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability of the predetermined effect image being displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A16, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed. In this way, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed, thereby appropriately avoiding the occurrence of inconveniences caused by the continuous display of specific effect images, which have a high probability of causing inconveniences when continuously played.

[Appendix A17]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A12, wherein the degree of expectation of the predetermined effect image is set higher than the degree of expectation of the specific effect image.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A17, the degree of expectation that the specified effect image after switching will cause a transition to a special gaming state is set higher than the specific effect image before switching. In this way, the degree of expectation that the specified effect image after switching will cause a transition to a special gaming state is set higher than the specific effect image before switching, so that when the specific image is switched from the specific effect image to the specific effect image, the degree of expectation suggested to the player by the switching to the specific effect image is increased. As a result, when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image will be switched to the specific effect image, and when the specific effect image is switched to the specific effect image, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game while having high hopes that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed will cause a transition to a special gaming state, so the interest in the game is increased by the switching of the specific image from the specific effect image to the specific effect image.

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A17 is characterized in that the difference between the degree of expectation when the specified presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game and the degree of expectation when the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game is set to 10% or more.

[Appendix A19]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A18 is characterized in that the difference between the expectation level when the specified presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game and the expectation level when the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game is set to 25% or more.

In the gaming machines according to appendix A18 and appendix A19, the difference in the expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more. In this way, by setting the difference in the expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more, when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while looking forward to switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image, and when the specific effect image is switched to, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game with high expectations because the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined effect image is displayed is to transition to a special game state, so that the interest in the game is further increased by the switching of the predetermined image from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image.

[Appendix A20]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A17 to Appendix A19, characterized in that the probability of the specific effect image being displayed on the display means (341) in the first notification game (first special chart game) in the first judgment state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability of the predetermined effect image being displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A20, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first judgment state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed. In this way, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first judgment state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed, so that the frequency with which a specific effect image is displayed increases, and the player has more opportunities to expect that the specific effect image will be switched to the predetermined effect image, further increasing the interest in the game, and by setting the probability that the predetermined effect image after switching is selected low, the frequency with which the predetermined effect image is displayed decreases, and the player's joy when the predetermined effect image is displayed increases, further increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix A21]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices A1 to A20, characterized in that when the specific effect image (e.g., an image of a chance eye effect) is switched to the predetermined effect image (e.g., an image of a same-color pattern effect), a specific information image different from the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, which explicitly or suggest specific information, is displayed on the display means (341) in an announcement game executed between the announcement game before the switching and the announcement game after the switching.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A21, in the notification game executed between the notification game before the predetermined image is switched and the notification game after the predetermined image is switched, a specific information image that clearly indicates or suggests specific information is displayed. In this way, in the notification game executed between the notification game before the predetermined image is switched and the notification game after the predetermined image is switched, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are not displayed consecutively in a plurality of notification games, and the continuity between the display of the specific effect image and the display of the predetermined effect image is interrupted. This gives the player the illusion that the display of the predetermined effect image was executed independently of the display of the specific effect image after the display of the specific effect image ends, rather than being switched from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image, and therefore makes it possible to disguise that the switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image did not occur. Therefore, the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the continuous execution of the specific effect image can be avoided without the player realizing it.

However, when a specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image to avoid inconvenience caused by the continued execution of a specific effect image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is executed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, when a specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image, there is a concern that the player will realize that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, by disguising it as if a switch from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image had not been made, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state.

[Appendix B1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the specified second notification game (second special chart game), the specific presentation image can be switched to the specified presentation image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, when a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image in a specific second notification game. In this way, when a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image in the specific second notification game, thereby avoiding inconveniences occurring in the specific second notification game due to the specific effect image being continuously executed due to the specific condition being met in the specific first notification game, and even if an inconvenience occurs in the first notification game that is resumed after the end of the specific second notification game, the occurrence of the inconvenience is avoided in advance before the first notification game is executed.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1, characterized in that the specified second notification game (second special chart game) is the second notification game (second special chart game) that is executed following the specific first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, the predetermined second notification game is a second notification game that is executed following a specific first notification game in which a specific condition is met. In this way, by the predetermined second notification game being a second notification game that is executed following a specific first notification game in which a specific condition is met, the occurrence of an inconvenience is immediately avoided after it is recognized that an inconvenience will occur due to the continued execution of the specific presentation image.

[Appendix B3]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The specific condition includes that no special benefit is given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game the specific number of times or more;
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1, characterized in that the specified second notification game (second special chart game) is the second notification game (second special chart game) of the specified number of times in which the specific performance image is executed consecutively.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B3, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the second notification game. In this way, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the second notification game, so that the specific effect image can be displayed continuously for the maximum period of time. This makes it possible to maximize the player's expectations due to the specific effect image being displayed continuously, and therefore reduces the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the specific effect image being switched to the predetermined effect image, and thus prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix B4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix B1 to Appendix B3, wherein the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix B5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices B1 to B4, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B5, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix C1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined first notification game (first special chart game) executed in the specific first notification game, the specific presentation image can be switched to the predetermined presentation image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state, the specific presentation image may be switched to a predetermined presentation image in the predetermined first notification game. In this way, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state, the specific presentation image may be switched to a predetermined presentation image in the predetermined first notification game, thereby avoiding inconvenience in the first notification game caused by the specific presentation image being continuously executed due to the fulfillment of the specific condition.

In addition, by switching from the specific effect image to the specified effect image in the first notification game that is resumed after the end of the specified second notification game, a large number of notification games in which the specific effect image is displayed continuously are ensured in cases where continued execution of the specific effect image would cause inconvenience. In this way, by maximizing the number of notification games in which the specific effect image is displayed continuously, the player can enjoy the specific effect image to the fullest extent, even in cases where continued execution of the specific effect image would cause inconvenience due to the establishment of a specific condition.

[Appendix C2]
a bonus awarding means (41) for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is displayed consecutively in the notification game a specific number of times or more;
The specific condition includes that no special benefit is given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game the specific number of times or more;
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1, characterized in that the specific first notification game (first special chart game) is the first notification game (first special chart game) of the specific number of times in which the specific performance image is executed continuously.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the first notification game. In this way, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the first notification game, so that the specific effect image can be displayed continuously for the maximum period of time. This makes it possible to maintain the player's expectations due to the specific effect image being displayed continuously to the maximum extent, and thus reduces the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the specific effect image being switched to the predetermined effect image, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix C3]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1 or Appendix C2, wherein the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C3, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix C4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices C1 to C3, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix D1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will transition to the special game state,
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are set to have the same or substantially the same expectation level.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, the degree of expectation that a transition to a special gaming state will occur is set to be the same or approximately the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image. In this way, by setting the degree of expectation that a transition to a special gaming state will occur to be the same or approximately the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, even when the predetermined image displayed on the display means is switched from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image, the switching of the predetermined image can maintain the player's expectation for the display of the predetermined image without lowering it, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest due to the switching of the predetermined image and preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine described in appendix D1, wherein the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -2.5% to +2.5%.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes D2 and D3, the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%. In this way, by setting the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%, the player's expectation for the display of the predetermined image can be more appropriately maintained, so that the player's interest in the game can be more appropriately prevented from decreasing due to the switching of the predetermined image, and a decrease in interest in the game can be more appropriately prevented.

[Appendix D4]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix D1 to Appendix D3, characterized in that the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in the first judgment state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D4, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed. In this way, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed, thereby appropriately avoiding the occurrence of inconveniences caused by the continuous display of specific effect images, which have a high probability of causing inconveniences when continuously played.

[Appendix D5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix D1 to Appendix D4, wherein the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D5, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix E1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the expected degree of the predetermined effect image is set to be higher than that of the specific effect image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the degree of expectation that the specified effect image after switching will cause a transition to a special gaming state is set higher than the specific effect image before switching. In this way, the degree of expectation that the specified effect image after switching will cause a transition to a special gaming state is set higher than the specific effect image before switching, so that when the specific image is switched from the specific effect image to the specific effect image, the degree of expectation suggested to the player by the switching to the specific effect image is increased. As a result, when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image will be switched to the specific effect image, and when the specific effect image is switched to, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game while having high hopes that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed will cause a transition to a special gaming state, so the interest in the game is increased by the switching of the specific effect image to the specific effect image.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1 is characterized in that the difference between the degree of expectation when the specified presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game and the degree of expectation when the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game is set to 10% or more.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E2 is characterized in that the difference between the degree of expectation when the specified presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game and the degree of expectation when the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game is set to 25% or more.

In the gaming machines according to appendix E2 and appendix E3, the difference in the expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more. In this way, by setting the difference in the expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more, when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while looking forward to switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image, and when the specific effect image is switched to, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game with high expectations because the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined effect image is displayed is to transition to a special game state, so that the interest in the game is further increased by the switching of the predetermined image from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image.

[Appendix E4]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix E1 to Appendix E3, characterized in that the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in the first judgment state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first judgment state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed. In this way, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first judgment state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed, so that the frequency with which a specific effect image is displayed increases, and the player has more opportunities to expect that the specific effect image will be switched to the predetermined effect image, further increasing the interest in the game, and by setting the probability that the predetermined effect image after switching is selected low, the frequency with which the predetermined effect image is displayed decreases, and the player's joy when the predetermined effect image is displayed increases, further increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix E5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E1 to Appendix E4, wherein the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E5, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix F1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
When the specific effect image (e.g., an image of a chance eye effect) is switched to the predetermined effect image (e.g., an image of a same-color pattern effect), a specific information image different from the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, which explicitly or suggest specific information, is displayed on the display means (341) in an announcement game executed between the announcement game before the switching and the announcement game after the switching.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F1, in the notification game executed between the notification game before the predetermined image is switched and the notification game after the predetermined image is switched, a specific information image that clearly indicates or suggests specific information is displayed. In this way, in the notification game executed between the notification game before the predetermined image is switched and the notification game after the predetermined image is switched, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are not displayed consecutively in multiple notification games, and the continuity between the display of the specific effect image and the display of the predetermined effect image is interrupted. This gives the player the illusion that the display of the predetermined effect image was executed independently of the display of the specific effect image after the display of the specific effect image ended, rather than being switched from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image, and therefore makes it possible to disguise that the switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image did not occur. Therefore, the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the continuous execution of the specific effect image can be avoided without the player realizing it.

However, when a specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image to avoid inconvenience caused by the continued execution of a specific effect image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is executed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, when a specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image, there is a concern that the player will realize that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, by disguising it as if a switch from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image had not been made, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state.

[Appendix F2]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1, characterized in that the specific condition includes that no bonus will be given to the player when the specific presentation image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game more than the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F2, the specific conditions include that no special benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games or more. In this way, by including that no special benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games or more, when the specific performance image continues to be displayed when the specific conditions are not met, it is possible to avoid the specific performance image being displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games or more, even though no special benefit will be given to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a special benefit is not given to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a special benefit will be given.

[Appendix F3]
The permissible state of the second winning port (315) includes a first permissible state (short open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is a first time, and a second permissible state (long open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is longer than the first time,
The gaming machine described in Appendix F2, characterized in that the specific condition includes a game ball entering the second winning port (315) that is in the first permissible state (short open) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F3, the game ball enters the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by having the game ball enter the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed, when the specific effect image is continuously displayed by opening the second winning port in the first permissible state, it is possible to avoid the specific effect image being displayed continuously for a predetermined number of notification games or more, even though there is no bonus to be awarded to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix F4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix F2, characterized in that the specific condition includes that a specific number (greater than 0) of gaming balls enters the second winning port (315) that is in the permissible state during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4, the game includes a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 entering the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means. In this way, by including a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 entering the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means, when the number of second notification games executed in the allowed state triggered by the entry of game balls into the second winning port is a specific number exceeding 0 or less, and the specific effect image is continuously displayed, it is avoided that the specific effect image is not granted to the player even though there is no bonus to be granted to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not granted to the player even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be granted.

[Appendix F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F2 to F4, wherein the bonus is the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5, the bonus is the execution of a special game. In this way, by the bonus being the execution of a special game, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the special game is not executed even though it is clearly indicated in the notification game that the special game will be executed.

[Appendix F6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix F1 to Appendix F5, wherein the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix F7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1 to F6, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F7, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix G1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix G2]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1, characterized in that the specific condition includes that no bonus will be given to the player when the specific presentation image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game more than the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G2, the specific conditions include that no special benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in notification games a specific number of times or more. In this way, by including that no special benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in notification games a specific number of times or more, when the specific performance image continues to be displayed when the specific conditions are not met, it is possible to avoid the specific performance image being displayed consecutively in notification games a specific number of times or more, even though no special benefit will be given to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a special benefit is not given to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a special benefit will be given.

[Appendix G3]
The permissible state of the second winning port (315) includes a first permissible state (short open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is a first time, and a second permissible state (long open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is longer than the first time,
The gaming machine described in Appendix G2, characterized in that the specific condition includes a game ball entering the second winning port (315) that is in the first permissible state (short open) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G3, the game ball enters the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by having the game ball enter the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed, when the specific effect image is continuously displayed by opening the second winning port in the first permissible state, it is possible to avoid the specific effect image being displayed continuously for a predetermined number of notification games or more, even though there is no bonus to be awarded to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix G4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G2, characterized in that the specific condition includes that a specific number (greater than 0) of gaming balls enters the second winning port (315) that is in the permissible state during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G4, the game includes a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 being entered into the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means. In this way, by including a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 being entered into the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means, when the number of second notification games executed in the allowed state triggered by the entry of game balls into the second winning port is a specific number exceeding 0 or less, and the specific effect image is continuously displayed, it is avoided that the specific effect image is not granted to the player even though there is no bonus to be granted to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not granted to the player even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be granted.

[Appendix G5]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices G2 to G4, wherein the bonus is the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G5, the bonus is the execution of a special game. In this way, by the bonus being the execution of a special game, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the special game is not executed even though it is clearly indicated in the notification game that the special game will be executed.

[Appendix G6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices G1 to G5, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G6, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix H1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H1, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix H2]
a bonus awarding means (41) for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is displayed consecutively in the notification game a specific number of times or more;
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1, characterized in that the specific condition includes that no bonus will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game more than the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H2, the specific conditions include that no special benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in a specific number of notification games or more. In this way, by including that no special benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in a specific number of notification games or more, when the specific performance image continues to be displayed when the specific conditions are not met, it is possible to avoid the specific performance image being displayed consecutively in a specific number of notification games or more, even though no special benefit will be given to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a special benefit is not given to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a special benefit will be given.

[Appendix H3]
The permissible state of the second winning port (315) includes a first permissible state (short open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is a first time, and a second permissible state (long open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is longer than the first time,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H2, characterized in that the specific condition includes a game ball entering the second winning port (315) that is in the first permissible state (short open) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H3, the game ball enters the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by having the game ball enter the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed, when the specific effect image is continuously displayed by opening the second winning port in the first permissible state, it is possible to avoid the specific effect image being displayed continuously for a predetermined number of notification games or more, even though there is no bonus to be awarded to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix H4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H2, characterized in that the specific condition includes that a specific number (greater than 0) of gaming balls enter the second winning port (315) that is in the permissible state during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H4, the game includes a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 being entered into the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means. In this way, by including a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 being entered into the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means, when the number of second notification games executed in the allowed state triggered by the entry of game balls into the second winning port is a specific number exceeding 0 or less, causing the specific effect image to be continuously displayed, it is avoided that the specific effect image is not granted to the player even though there is no bonus to be granted to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not granted to the player even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be granted.

[Appendix H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H2 to Appendix H4, wherein the bonus is the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H5, the bonus is the execution of a special game. In this way, by the bonus being the execution of a special game, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the special game is not executed even though it is clearly indicated in the notification game that the special game will be executed.

[Appendix H6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix H1 to Appendix H5, wherein the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix I1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win due to the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
a reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 77) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, when a specific effect image is displayed in the second notification game, the specific suggestive information is continuously displayed. In this way, when a specific effect image is displayed in the second notification game, the specific suggestive information is continuously displayed, so that the player can understand that the specific suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the specific suggestive information will be resumed after the end of the second notification game. This prevents the player from forgetting that the specific suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to understand in advance that the display of the specific suggestive information will be resumed after the end of the second notification game. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the display of the specific suggestive information being resumed after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the specific suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and therefore, a decrease in the interest of the game due to the display of the specific suggestive information being resumed is prevented.
[Appendix I2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1, wherein the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continues to display the specified suggestion information without changing it when the specified suggestion information is to be displayed continuously.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I2, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed, so that the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to know in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. As a result, the player is further prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the display of the predetermined suggestive information being resumed after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and therefore the decrease in interest in the game due to the display of the predetermined suggestive information being resumed is further prevented.

[Appendix I3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I2 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game) executed following the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specified suggestion information was displayed, while maintaining the appearance displayed in the first notification game (first special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I3, in the second notification game executed following the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in the same manner as it was displayed in the first notification game, allowing the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed in the first notification game before the execution of the second notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information after the end of the second notification game, and thus prevents a further decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I4]
The gaming machine of Appendix I1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays the specified suggestion information in a manner different from that of the first notification game (first special chart game) in the second notification game (second special chart game) executed following the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specified suggestion information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I4, in the second notification game executed next to the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first notification game. In this way, in the second notification game executed next to the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first notification game, so that the player can be made to understand in various ways that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, and the player can be made to understand without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game.

[Appendix I5]
The gaming machine described in Appendices I1 to I4, wherein the suggestion information continuing display means (51) is characterized in that when the specified suggestion information is to be continuously displayed, the specified suggestion information is continuously displayed without changing the display position of the specified suggestion information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I5, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information is not changed and the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information is not changed and the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will be resumed after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to know in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will be resumed after the end of the second notification game. As a result, the player is further prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and therefore the decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is further prevented.

[Appendix I6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1 to I5, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continues to display (display as a capture image 77) the specified suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the patterns during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the patterns during the second notification game, the player can be made to understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the changing display of the patterns executed during the second notification game.

[Appendix I7]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I6 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 77) the specified suggestion information in a position adjacent to the variable display area of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I7, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern change during the second notification game to more easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This makes it possible for the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix I8]
a first reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to a first upper limit number (e.g., four) of rights to play the first notification game (first special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314);
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1 to I7, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continues to display the specified suggestion information when the right to execute the first notification game (first special chart game) is reserved by the first reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I8, when the right to play the first notification game triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning port is reserved, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. In this way, when the right to play the first notification game triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning port is reserved, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, thereby preventing the predetermined suggestive information from being displayed for the first notification game when the right to play the first notification game is reserved while the second notification game is being played in the specific gaming state. This prevents the predetermined suggestive information from being displayed for the first notification game a number of times that exceeds the number of consecutive occurrences of the predetermined suggestive information that was set before the transition to the specific gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state. As a result, in cases where a bonus is awarded to a player by the predetermined suggestion information being displayed consecutively in a specific number of first notification games or more, the predetermined suggestion information is prevented from being displayed consecutively in a specific number of first notification games or more even when there is no bonus to be awarded to the player, thereby preventing a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to a player even when it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix I9]
an allowable frequency control means for switching between a first frequency state in which the frequency at which the second winning opening (315) is in the allowable state is a first frequency and a second frequency state in which the frequency at which the second winning opening (315) is in the allowable state is a second frequency higher than the first frequency;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices I1 to I8, characterized in that the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in at least one of the first frequency state and the second frequency state.

[Appendix I10]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I9, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the first frequency state.

[Appendix I11]
The gaming machine according to claim 19 or 11, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the second frequency state.

In the gaming machines according to appendix I9 to appendix I11, a specific gaming state is generated in at least one of a first frequency state in which the second winning port is placed in an allowable state at a first frequency with a low frequency, and a second frequency state in which the second winning port is placed in an allowable state at a second frequency with a high frequency. In the first frequency state, the second winning port is placed in an allowable state at a low frequency. Therefore, in the first frequency state, the specific gaming state is generated less frequently, and the specific gaming state is generated as a special state. On the other hand, in the second frequency state, the second winning port is placed in an allowable state at a high frequency. Therefore, in the second frequency state, the specific gaming state is generated more frequently, and the specific gaming state is generated as a non-special state. In this way, the frequency of occurrence of the specific game state differs between the first and second frequency states, and the positioning of the specific game state also differs, so that different gameplay characteristics are provided when the specific game state is generated in the first frequency state, which is the first frequency at which the second winning port is placed in the permissible state at a low frequency, and when the specific game state is generated in the second frequency state, which is the second frequency at which the second winning port is placed in the permissible state at a high frequency. This can increase the player's attention and interest in the game, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

[Appendix I12]
a first display means (341) for displaying the specific effect image by the specific effect image display means (51);
a second display means (39, etc.) different from the first display means (341) on which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by the suggestion information continuing display means (51);
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I11, comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I12, the first display means on which a specific effect image corresponding to a second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state is displayed is different from the second display means on which the specified suggestion information is displayed. In this way, by having the first display means on which a specific effect image corresponding to a second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state displayed be different from the second display means on which the specified suggestion information is displayed, it is possible to display the specified suggestion information on the second display means without impeding the display of the specific effect image on the first display means. This allows both the specific effect image and the specified suggestion information to be reliably and appropriately displayed without impeding visibility of each other.

[Appendix I13]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1 to I12, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed on the display means (341) as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I13, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix I14]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1 to I13, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I14, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I15]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1 to I14, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I15, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I16]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendices I1 to I15, wherein the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestion information in front of or behind the varyingly displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I16, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the pattern that is variably displayed in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the pattern that is variably displayed in the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern variation in the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix I17]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1 to I16, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I17, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I18]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix I1 to Appendix I17, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I18, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix I19]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1 to I18, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I19, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix J1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information on the probability of a big win by the first special chart reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special chart game in which the first special chart reserved continuous performance is executed);
a reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 77) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestion information without changing it when the specified suggestion information is continuously displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed, so that the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to know in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. As a result, the player is further prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the display of the predetermined suggestive information being resumed after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and therefore the decrease in interest in the game due to the display of the predetermined suggestive information being resumed is further prevented.

[Appendix J2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continues to display (display as a capture image 77) the specified suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the pattern during the second notification game.

In a gaming machine according to Appendix J2, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the patterns during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the patterns during the second notification game, the player can be made to understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the changing display of the patterns executed during the second notification game.

[Appendix J3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1 or Appendix J2, wherein the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 77) the specified suggestion information in a position adjacent to the variable display area of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J3, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern change during the second notification game to more easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This makes it possible for the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix J4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1, wherein the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestion information in front of or behind the varyingly displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J4, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the pattern that is variably displayed in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the pattern that is variably displayed in the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern variation in the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix J5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix J1 to Appendix J4, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J5, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix J6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1 to J5, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix K1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win due to the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
a reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 77) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game) executed following the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specified suggestion information was displayed, while maintaining the appearance displayed in the first notification game (first special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K1, in the second notification game executed following the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in the same manner as it was displayed in the first notification game, allowing the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed in the first notification game before the execution of the second notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information after the end of the second notification game, and thus prevents a further decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix K2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continues to display (display as a capture image 77) the specified suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K2, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the patterns during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the patterns during the second notification game, the player can be made to understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game.

[Appendix K3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix K2, wherein the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 77) the specified suggestion information in a position adjacent to the variable display area of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K3, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern change during the second notification game to more easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This makes it possible for the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix K4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestive information in front of or behind the varyingly displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K4, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the pattern that is being changed and displayed in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the pattern that is being changed and displayed in the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the change in the pattern in the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game.

[Appendix K5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K4, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K5, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix K6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices K1 to K5, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix L1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information on the probability of a big win by the first special chart reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special chart game in which the first special chart reserved continuous performance is executed);
a reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 77) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the specified suggestive information is to be continuously displayed, the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continues to display the specified suggestive information without changing the display position of the specified suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note L1, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information is not changed and the display position of the predetermined suggestive information is not changed and the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will be resumed after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to know in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will be resumed after the end of the second notification game. As a result, the player is more prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and the player's interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is more prevented.

[Appendix L2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestive information in front of or behind the varyingly displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L2, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the pattern that is variably displayed in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the pattern that is variably displayed in the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern variation in the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix L3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix L1 or Appendix L2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L3, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix L4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L1 to L3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L4, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix L5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L1 to L4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L5, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix L6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L1 to L5, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L6, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix L7]
The gaming machine described in any one of appendices L1 to L6, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L7, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix L8]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L1 to L7, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L8, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix M1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win due to the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 77) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 77) the specified suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix M1, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the patterns during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the patterns during the second notification game, the player can be made to understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game.

[Appendix M2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix M1, wherein the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 77) the specified suggestion information in a position adjacent to the variable display area of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern change during the second notification game to more easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This makes it possible for the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix M3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix M1 or Appendix M2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix M3, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix M4]
The gaming machine described in any of Appendices M1 to M3, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix M4, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix M5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices M1 to M4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix M5, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix M6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices M1 to M5, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix M6, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix M7]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix M1 to Appendix M6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of patterns displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M7, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix M8]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices M1 to M7, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M8, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix N1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information on the probability of a big win by the first special chart reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special chart game in which the first special chart reserved continuous performance is executed);
a first reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to a first upper limit number (e.g., four) of rights to play the first notification game (first special game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314);
a second reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to a second upper limit number (e.g., four) of rights to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the second upper limit number based on the second winning port (315) being in the predetermined permissible state (long opening),
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 77) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continues to display the specified suggestion information when the right to execute the first notification game (first special chart game) is reserved by the first reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N1, when the right to play the first notification game triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning port is reserved, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. In this way, when the right to play the first notification game triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning port is reserved, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, so that when the right to play the first notification game is reserved while the second notification game is being played in the specific gaming state, the predetermined suggestive information is prevented from being displayed for this first notification game. This prevents the predetermined suggestive information from being displayed for the first notification game a number of times that exceeds the number of consecutive occurrences of the predetermined suggestive information that was set before the transition to the specific gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state. As a result, in cases where a bonus is awarded to a player by the predetermined suggestion information being displayed consecutively in a specific number of first notification games or more, the predetermined suggestion information is prevented from being displayed consecutively in a specific number of first notification games or more even when there is no bonus to be awarded to the player, thereby preventing a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to a player even when it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix N2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix N1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix N3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix N1 or Appendix N2, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix N4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices N1 to N3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix N5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices N1 to N4, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestive information in the first notification game as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix N6]
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix N1 to Appendix N5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix N7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices N1 to N6, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix N7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix O1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information on the probability of a big win by the first special chart reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special chart game in which the first special chart reserved continuous performance is executed);
a reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 77) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
an allowable frequency control means for switching between a first frequency state in which the frequency at which the second winning opening (315) is in the allowable state is a first frequency and a second frequency state in which the frequency at which the second winning opening (315) is in the allowable state is a second frequency higher than the first frequency;
Equipped with
The specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in at least one of the first frequency state and the second frequency state.

[Appendix O2]
The gaming machine described in appendix O1, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the first frequency state.

[Appendix O3]
The gaming machine according to claim 01 or 02, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the second frequency state.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes O1 to O3, a specific gaming state is generated in at least one of a first frequency state, which is a first frequency at which the second winning port is placed in an allowable state with a low frequency, and a second frequency state, which is a second frequency at which the second winning port is placed in an allowable state with a high frequency. In the first frequency state, the second winning port is placed in an allowable state with a low frequency. Therefore, in the first frequency state, the specific gaming state is generated with a low frequency, and the specific gaming state is generated as a special state. On the other hand, in the second frequency state, the second winning port is placed in an allowable state with a high frequency. Therefore, in the second frequency state, the specific gaming state is generated with a high frequency, and the specific gaming state is generated as a non-special state. In this way, the frequency of occurrence of the specific game state differs between the first and second frequency states, and the positioning of the specific game state also differs, so that different gameplay characteristics are provided when the specific game state is generated in the first frequency state, which is the first frequency at which the second winning port is placed in the permissible state at a low frequency, and when the specific game state is generated in the second frequency state, which is the second frequency at which the second winning port is placed in the permissible state at a high frequency. This can increase the player's attention and interest in the game, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

[Appendix O4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices O1 to O3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O4, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix O5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices O1 to O4, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note O5, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix O6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices O1 to O5, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note O6, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix O7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices O1 to O6, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O7, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix O8]
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix O1 to Appendix O7, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O8, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix O9]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices O1 to O8, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O9, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix P1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information on the probability of a big win by the first special chart reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special chart game in which the first special chart reserved continuous performance is executed);
a reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 77) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
a first display means (341) for displaying the specific effect image by the specific effect image display means (51);
a second display means (39, etc.) different from the first display means (341) on which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by the suggestion information continuing display means (51);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P1, the first display means on which a specific effect image corresponding to a second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state is displayed is different from the second display means on which the specified suggestion information is displayed. In this way, by having the first display means on which a specific effect image corresponding to a second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state displayed be different from the second display means on which the specified suggestion information is displayed, it is possible to display the specified suggestion information on the second display means without interfering with the display of the specific effect image on the first display means. This allows both the specific effect image and the specified suggestion information to be reliably and appropriately displayed without interfering with each other's visibility.

[Appendix P2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix P1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix P3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix P1 or Appendix P2, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices P1 to P3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices P1 to P4, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestive information in the first notification game as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices P1 to P5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix P7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices P1 to P6, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix Q1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win due to the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 77) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays the specified suggestion information in a manner different from that of the first notification game (first special chart game) in the second notification game (second special chart game) which is executed following the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specified suggestion information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q1, in the second notification game executed next to the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first notification game. In this way, in the second notification game executed next to the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first notification game, so that the player can be made to understand in various ways that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, and the player can be made to understand without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game.

[Appendix Q2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix Q1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix Q3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix Q1 or Appendix Q2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix Q4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices Q1 to Q3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix Q5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices Q1 to Q4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix Q6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix Q1 to Appendix Q5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix Q7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices Q1 to Q6, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix R1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win due to the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
a reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 77) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestive information in front of or behind the varyingly displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R1, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the pattern that is being changed and displayed in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the pattern that is being changed and displayed in the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the change in the pattern in the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game.

[Appendix R2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix R1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix R3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix R1 or Appendix R2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix R4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices R1 to R3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix R5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices R1 to R4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix R6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1 to R5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix R7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices R1 to R6, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix R7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix S1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win due to the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
a reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 77) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S1, the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is notified by the static display of the variably displayed symbols, and the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of statically displayed symbols, allowing the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix S2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix S1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix S3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix S1 or Appendix S2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix S4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices S1 to S3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix S5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices S1 to S4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix S6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices S1 to S5, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix T1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win due to the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
a reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 77) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T1, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while paying attention to whether the result of the transition determination will transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix T2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix T1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix T1 or Appendix T2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices T1 to T3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices T1 to T4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a text image corresponding to an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T5, a text image corresponding to an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a text image corresponding to an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices T1 to T5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

10: Gaming machine 31: Gaming board 316: Variable winning port 341: Pattern display section 35: Lamp display section 351: First individual lamp section 352: Second individual lamp section 353: Third individual lamp section 354: Fourth individual lamp section 355: Fifth individual lamp section 356: Sixth individual lamp section 37: Clone device 373: Special out ball port 38: Gaming ball retention section 381: Retention lane 383: Stopper section 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7-segment display section E to G: Segment 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: REM
45: Setting value display section 46: Setting value change operation section 47: ROM
5: Audio and lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: REM
6: Display control device 75: The variable display image 76: Hold display image 77: Capture image

Claims (1)

A transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a game state in which a game advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning means for satisfying the judgment condition based on the entry of a game ball;
a result notification information display means for displaying result notification information for notifying a result of the transition determination by the transition determination means;
A display means is provided corresponding to the game board, and displays the result notification information;
A launching means for launching game balls toward the game board at predetermined intervals when a predetermined game operation is performed;
A gaming machine comprising :
The predetermined winning means is :
A first winning means ;
a second winning means different from the first winning means , capable of switching between an allowable state in which the entry of the game ball is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of the game ball is restricted;
The result notification information is
First result notification information that can be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed on the condition that a gaming ball enters the first winning means ;
and second result notification information that can be displayed after a specific period of time has elapsed on the condition that the game ball enters the second winning means ,
This gaming machine is
a reserved ball number display means capable of displaying reserved ball number information indicating a reserved ball that has entered at least the first winning means but has not yet been judged to be in a transition state up to a predetermined upper limit;
A suggestion information display means for displaying a predetermined suggestion information different from the reserved ball number information, the suggestion information being information that can be displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes in response to the entry of a game ball into the first winning means, during at least a plurality of consecutively executed predetermined periods ;
a specific permissible state generating means for generating a specific permissible state, which is the permissible state during a period in which the predetermined game operation can be performed and a plurality of predetermined numbers of game balls can be launched toward the game board, based on the establishment of a specific condition;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
The game ball is configured to enter the second winning means in the specific permissible state during the execution of the display of the predetermined suggestive information,
When a game ball enters the second winning means, a specific display image is displayed during the specific period, and the predetermined suggestive information is displayed together with the specific display image at least while the specific display image is being displayed.
When the specific permissive state is not generated, the specific display image is prevented from being displayed and the specific suggestion information is displayed.
The predetermined suggestion information is configured to be displayed in at least a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode as the plurality of display modes;
This gaming machine is
The display mode of the predetermined suggestion information is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the specific period executed after the predetermined period in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in the first display mode,
The second display mode is configured to be more valuable to a player in terms of the transition determination than the first display mode;
This gaming machine is
a display area for displaying the second result notification information after the specific period has elapsed,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specified suggestive information is displayed at the edge of a specified display surface outside the display area, and the back side of the specified suggestive information is drawn and displayed so as to be invisible.

Images